Anda di halaman 1dari 144

Bab 1 Statistik

Matematika Kelas 11 SMA

STATISTIK
Penyajian data dapat dilakukan dalam bentuk
diagram dan tabel distribusi frekuensi. Tabel distribusi
frekuensi terdiri dari distribusi frekuensi tunggal,
bergolong, dan kumulatif.
Contoh Tabel distribusi frekuensi bergolong

1. Ukuran Pemusatan Data


a. Rataan Hitung (Mean)
Data Tunggal

x 1 + x 2 + x 3 + .... + x 1
n

Rataan =
atau

Data distribusi frekuensi

Istilah-istilah dalam distribusi frekuensi bergolong atau


berkelompok adalah :
a. Interval kelas
Tiap-tiap kelompok disebut interval kelas atau
sering disebut interval atau kelas saja.
65 67 Interval kelas pertama
68 70 Interval kelas kedua, dst.
b. Batas kelas
Berdasarkan tabel distribusi frekuensi di atas, angka
65, 68, 71, 74, 77, dan 80 merupakan batas bawah
dari tiap-tiap kelas, sedangkan angka 67, 70, 73, 76,
79, dan 82 merupakan batas atas dari tiap-tiap kelas.
c. Tepi kelas (Batas Nyata Kelas)
Tepi bawah = batas bawah 0,5
Tepi atas = batas atas + 0,5
d. Lebar Kelas
Lebar kelas = tepi atas tepi bawah
e. Titik Tengah
Titik tengah = (batas atas + batas bawah)
Daftar distribusi kumulatif ada dua macam, yaitu sebagai
berikut.
a. Daftar
distribusi
kumulatif
kurang
dari
(menggunakan tepi atas).
b. Daftar distribusi kumulatif lebih dari (menggunakan
tepi bawah).

atau

Data bergolong
Rata-rata untuk data bergolong pada hakikatnya
sama dengan menghitung rata-rata data pada
distribusi frekuensi tunggal dengan mengambil titik
tengah kelas sebagai xi.
Cara lain yaitu menggunakan rataan sementara

Keterangan :

x s = rata-rata sementara
n

f d
i =1

= jumlah frekuensi simpangan

b. Median
Data tunggal
Untuk n ganjil:
Me = x 1
2

(n +)

Untuk n genap:

xn +xn
Me =

+1

Keterangan:

x n = data pada urutan ke2

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

n
setelah diurutkan.
2

Data bergolong

1
N -F
Me = b 2 + c 2
f

Keterengan :
b2 = tepi bawah kelas median
c = lebar kelas
N = banyaknya data
F = frekuensi kumulatif kurang dari sebelum kelas
median
f
= frekuensi kelas median
c. Modus
Data tunggal
Modus dari data tunggal adalah data yang sering
muncul atau data dengan frekuensi tertinggi.
Data bergolong

Mo = b 0 + l
d
+
1 d2

Keterangan :
b0 = tepi bawah kelas median
l
= lebar kelas (lebar kelas)
d1 = selisih frekuensi kelas modus dengan kelas
sebelumnya
d2 = selisih frekuensi kelas modus dengan kelas
sesudahnya
2. Ukuran Letak
a. Kuartil (Q)

Keterangan:
xmin = data terkecil
xmaks = data terbesar
Q1 = kuartil ke-1
Q2 = kuartil ke-2
Q3 = kuartil ke-3
Data tunggal
Letak Qi =

i (n + i )
4

sehingga:
Q1 = x3 + (x4 x3)
= 4 + (4 4) = 4
Data bergolong
Menentukan letak kuartil untuk data bergolong,
caranya sama dengan data tunggal. Nilai kuartil
dirumuskan sebagai berikut.

i
N -F
Qi = b i + l 4
f

Keterangan:
Qi = kuartil ke-i (1, 2, atau 3)
bi = tepi bawah kelas kuartil ke-i
N = banyaknya data
F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas
kuartil
l
= lebar kelas
= frekuensi kelas kuartil
f
Jangkauan interkuartil dan semi interkuartil
a) Jangkauan adalah selisih antara nilai terbesar
dan nilai terkecil, dilambangkan dengan J.
J = xmaks xmin
b) Jangkauan interkuartil (H) adalah selisih antara
kuartil ketiga dan kuartil pertama:
H = Q3 Q1
c) Jangkauan semi interkuartil (Qd) atau
simpangan kuartil dirumuskan:
Qd = (Q3 Q1)
d) Langkah (L) adalah satu setengah dari nilai
jangkauan interkuartil:
L = 3/2 (Q3 Q1) atau L = 3/2 H
b. Desil
Data tunggal
Letak Di di urutan data ke

i (n + 1)
10

Misal:
Data diurutkan: 4, 5, 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
diurutan
data
Letak
desil
ke-2

2(10 + 1) 22
=
= 2,2
10
10

ke-

Misal:
Data yang telah diurutkan:

D2 terletak pada urutan ke-2,2 sehingga: D2 = x2 +


0,2 (x3 x2).
Jadi D2 = 5 + 0,2 (5 5) = 5 + 0 = 5,0

3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9, 10, 12.

Data bergolong

Letak Q1 adalah :

1(14 + 1) 15
3
=
=3
4
4
4

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Letak Di di urutan data ke


nilainya adalah

i (n + 1)
, sedangkan
10

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
i .n
-F

Di = b + l 10
f

SR =

Keterangan :
D = desil ke-i
n = banyak data
F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas desil
f = frekuensi kelas desil
b = tepi bawah kelas
l = lebar kelas
c. Persentil
Data tunggal
Letak di urutan data ke -

i (n + 1)
100

Data bergolong
Letak di urutan data ke nilainya adalah

i .n
-F

Pi = b + l 100
f

1 n
xi - x
2 i =1

Keterangan:
SR = simpangan rata-rata
n = ukuran data
xi = data ke-i dari data x1, x2, x3, , xn

= rataan hitung

Data bergolong

SR =

f xi - x

i =1 i
n

i =1 i

c. Simpangan Baku (Deviasi Standar)


Data tunggal

i (n + 1)
, sedangkan
100

Keterangan:
Pi = persentil ke-i
b = tepi bawah
n = banyaknya data
F = frekuensi kumulatif kelas sebelum kelas
persentil
f = frekuensi kelas persentil
l = lebar kelas

Data bergolong

3. Ukuran Penyebaran
a. Jangkauan (Range)
Data tunggal
R = xmaks xmin
Data bergolong
Untuk data bergolong, nilai tertinggi diambil dari
nilai tengah kelas tertinggi dan nilai terendah
diambil dari nilai tengah kelas yang terendah.
b. Simpangan Rata-Rata (Deviasi Rata-Rata)
Data tunggal

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

d. Ragam atau Variansi


Jika simpangan baku atau deviasi standar
dilambangkan dengan s, maka ragam atau
variansi dilambangkan dengan s2.

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Latihan Konsep
1.

Dari data berikut, tentukan ukuran terkecil, ukuran


terbesar, median, kuartil bawah, kuartil atas,
jangkauan data, dan jangkauan antarkuartil.
a. 75, 65, 50, 48, 72, 60, 75, 80, 48, 70, 55
b. 165, 158, 164, 173, 168, 160, 172, 156, 170,
164, 169, 155, 168
c. 212, 225, 220, 217, 224, 208, 222, 205, 220,
210, 205, 215
d. 315, 300, 306, 325, 320, 315, 330, 312, 325,
310, 320, 318, 305, 317

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Suatu keluarga mempunyai lima orang anak. Anak
2.
termuda berumur t tahun dan yang tertua 2(2t 1)
tahun. Tiga anak yang lain masing-masing
berumur (t + 2) tahun, (2t + 1) tahun, dan (3t 1)
tahun. Jika rataan hitung umur mereka 8,8 tahun,
tentukan umur anak termuda dan tertua.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

3.

Tabel berikut menunjukkan data tinggi badan


Kelas XI SMA Megah.

Tentukanlah:
a. modus
b. median, kuartil bawah, dan kuartil atas
c. rataan hitungnya.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
4.

Tabel berikut menunjukkan data tabungan


domestik (dalam triliun rupiah) per triwulan dari
tahun 19931998.

a.

Buatlah diagram garisnya (tidak setiap tri


wulan).
b. Pada triwulan dan tahun berapa tabungan
domestik terbesar? Jelaskan.
c. Pada triwulan dan tahun berapa tabungan
domestik terkecil? Jelaskan.
d. Berapa kali tabungan domestik mengalami
penurunan? Jelaskan.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
5.

Dalam suatu ujian yang diikuti 42 orang diperoleh


rataan nilai ujian 30, median 35, dan simpangan
baku 8. Oleh karena rataannya terlalu rendah,
semua nilai dikalikan 2, kemudian dikurangi 5.
a. Hitung rataan nilai yang baru.
b. Hitung median yang baru.
c. Hitung simpangan baku baru.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
6.

Data banyak kendaraan yang parkir tiap dua jam


dari pukul 06.00 sampai 18.00 disajikan dalam
tabel sebagai berikut.
a.
b.

Gambarlah data tersebut dalam diagram garis.


Perkiraan banyak kendaraan yang parkir
antara pukul 11.00 13.00.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
7.
Nilai ujian suatu mata pelajaran adalah sebagai
berikut.

Jika nilai siswa yang lebih rendah dari rata-rata


dinyatakan tidak lulus, tentukan banyaknya siswa
yang tidak lulus.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

8.

Diketahui diagram batang daun hasil


Matematika di kelas XI IPA sebagai berikut.

a.
b.
c.

tes

Tentukan jumlah siswa yang ikut tes


Matematika.
Tentukan nilai terendah dalam tes
Matematika.
Tentukan nilai tertinggi yang dicapai dalam
tes.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
9.

Dari data di samping, tentukan rataannya dengan


menggunakan rataan sementara.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
10.

Dari data di samping, tentukan modusnya.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
13.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
11.

Diketahui data seperti pada tabel di samping.

a. jangkauan, dan
b. jangkauan semi interkuartil.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
14.

Tentukan nilai:
a. D4, D9
b. P30, P70
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
12.

Tentukan median dari data yang disajikan pada


tabel distribusi frekuensi di samping ini.

Dari diagram kotak garis di atas tentukan:

Berat badan siswa kelas XI IPA disajikan pada


tabel berikut.

Tentukan:
a. statistik lima serangkai,
b. hamparan.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
15.

Tentukan simpangan baku dari


disajikan dalam tabel di bawah ini.

data

yang

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

Nilai rataan hitung sekelompok siswa yang


berjumlah 40 orang adalah 51. Jika seorang siswa
dari kelompok itu yang mendapat nilai 90 tidak
dimasukkan dalam perhitungan rataan hitung
tersebut maka nilai rataan hitung ujian akan
menjadi ....
a. 50
d. 47
b. 49
e. 46
c. 48

2.

Nilai Bahasa Indonesia dari 10 orang siswa yang


diambil secara acak adalah 3, 4, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7, 7, 8,
9. Pernyataan berikut yang benar adalah ....
(1) rataan hitungnya = 6
(2) mediannya = 6,5
(3) modus = 7
(4) jangkauan = 6
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. (1), (2), dan (3)
b. (1) dan (3)
c. (2) dan (4)
d. (4)
e. Semua benar

3.

Simpangan rataan hitung data 10, 10, 9, 8, 8, 7, 7,


6, 6, 5 adalah ....
a. 7,6
d. 2,2
b. 6,6
e. 1,4
c. 2,8

4.

Simpangan rataan hitung data x1, x2, ... , x10


adalah 2,29. Jika setiap data ditambah satu maka
simpangan rataan hitungnya adalah ....
a. 0,29
d. 2,39
b. 1,29
e. 4,58
c. 2,29

5.

Tes Matematika diberikan kepada tiga kelas siswa


berjumlah 100 orang. Nilai rataan hitung kelas
pertama, kedua, dan ketiga adalah 7,8, dan 7,5.
Jika banyaknya siswa kelas pertama 25 orang dan
kelas ketiga 5 orang lebih banyak dari kelas
kedua, nilai rataan hitung seluruh siswa adalah ....
a. 7,65
d. 7,68
b. 7,66
e. 7,69
c. 7,67

6.

Nilai rataan hitung pada tes Matematika dari 10


siswa adalah 55 dan jika digabung lagi dengan 5
siswa, nilai rataan hitung menjadi 53. Nilai rataan
hitung dari 5 siswa tersebut adalah ....
a. 49
d. 50,5
b. 49,5
e. 51
c. 50

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

7.

Dari empat bilangan diketahui bilangan yang


terkecil adalah 30 dan yang terbesar 58. Rataan
hitung hitung keempat bilangan itu tidak mungkin
....
(1) < 37
(3) > 51
(2) < 40
(4) > 48
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. (1), (2), dan (3)
b. (1) dan (3)
c. (2) dan (4)
d. (4)
e. Semua benar

8.

Untuk kelompok bilangan 2, 3, 7, 7, 8, 8, 8, 9, 11


(1) modus lebih dari rataan hitung
(2) median kurang dari rataan hitung
(3) modus = median
(4) modus = rataan hitung
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. (1), (2), dan (3)
b. (1) dan (3)
c. (2) dan (4)
d. (4)
e. Semua benar

9.

Untuk memudahkan perhitungan, semua nilai data


pengamatan dikurangi 1300. Nilai-nilai baru
menghasilkan jangkauan 28, rataan hitung 11,7,
simpangan kuartil 7,4 dan modus 12. Data aslinya
mempunyai ....
(1) rataan hitung = 1311,7
(2) jangkauan = 28
(3) modus = 1312
(4) simpangan kuartil = 657,4
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. (1), (2), dan (3)
b. (1) dan (3)
c. (2) dan (4)
d. (4)
e. Semua benar

10.

Tabel berikut memperlihatkan distribusi frekuensi


yang salah satu frekuensinya belum diketahui.

Rataan hitung yang mungkin dari data itu adalah


....
a. 0
d. 4
b. 2
e. 5
c. 3

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
11.

Pernyataan yang benar berdasarkan


distribusi frekuensi berikut adalah ....

tabel

c. (2) dan (4)


d. (4)
e. semua benar
17.

Data tinggi badan 30 siswa sebagai berikut.


168 159 159 161 158 158 161 158 162 159 155
169 163 159 157 156 161 161 163 162 187 162
158 159 154 188 160 187 162 168
Rataan hitung dari data di atas adalah ....
a. 163,13
d. 166,20
b. 164,13
e. 167,5
c. 165,03

18.

Gaji rataan hitung pegawai suatu perusahaan


Rp250.000,00. Gaji rataan hitung pegawai prianya
Rp260.000,00, sedangkan gaji rataan hitung
pegawai wanitanya Rp210.000,00. Berapakah
perbandingan jumlah pegawai pria dan pegawai
wanita perusahaan itu?
a. 1 : 9
d. 3 : 2
b. 1 : 4
e. 4 : 1
c. 2: 3

19.

Dalam tabel di atas, nilai rataan hitung ujian


matematika adalah 6. Oleh karena itu, a adalah ....

a. modus < median < mean


b. mean = median
c. modus < mean < median
d. mean < median < modus
e. median < modus < mean
12.

Jika jangkauan data 1, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, x sama


dengan rataan hitungnya maka nilai x adalah ....
a. 1
d. 4
b. 2
e. 5
c. 3

13.

Diketahui data 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 1, x. Jika mean =


median = 2 maka nilai x adalah ....
a. 0
d. 1,5
b. 0,5
e. 2
c. 1

14.

Median dari data yang disajikan histogram berikut


adalah ....
a. 0
b. 5
c. 10
20.

a. 60,5
b. 65
c. 65,5
15.

16.

d. 20
e. 30

Kuartil bawah dari data pada tabel distribusi


frekuensi berikut adalah ....

d. 67,5
e. 70,5

Empat kelompok siswa yang masing-masing


terdiri atas 5, 8, 10, dan 17 orang menyumbang
korban bencana alam. Rataan hitung sumbangan
masing-masing kelompok adalah Rp4.000,00;
Rp2.500,00; Rp2.000,00; dan Rp1.000,00. Rataan
hitung sumbangan setiap siswa seluruh kelompok
itu adalah ....
a. Rp2.025,00
d. Rp1.625,00
b. Rp1.925,00
e. Rp1.550,00
c. Rp1.750,00
Diketahui data x1, x2, ..., x10. Jika setiap nilai
data ditambah 10 maka ....
(1) rataan hitungnya ditambah 10
(2) simpangan rataan hitungnya tetap
(3) mediannya ditambah 10
(4) modusnya tetap
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. (1), (2), dan (3)
b. (1) dan (3)

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

a. 66,9
b. 66,6
c. 66,2
21.

d. 66,1
e. 66,0

Tabel berikut memperlihatkan suatu pengukuran.


Rataan hitungnya adalah ....

a. 1
b. 3
c. 4

d. 8
e. 9

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
22.

Rataan hitung dari data berikut adalah ....

a. 4,5
b. 5,0
c. 5,5
23.

24.

26.

d. 6
e. 6,5

Simpangan baku dari data 3, 6, 6, 2, 6, 2, 1, 1, 5, 3


adalah ....
a. 1,6
d. 2,3
b. 1,9
e. 2,4
c. 2,1

a. jumlah PNS 12 orang


b. jumlah wiraswasta 90 orang
c. jumlah pedagang 135 orang
d. jumlah TNI/Polri 27 orang
e. jumlah TNI 15 orang

Simpangan kuartil dari data tabel berikut adalah


....
27.

a. 1,2
b. 2,5
c. 3,4
25.

d. 4,8
e. 5,9

Dari 400 siswa diperoleh data tentang pekerjaan


orang tua/wali. Data tersebut jika disajikan dalam
diagram lingkaran sebagai berikut. Berdasar data
di bawah ini, pernyataan yang benar adalah .

Jika rata-rata nilai ujian pada tabel di bawah ini


sama dengan 6, maka a = .

a. 9 1/6
b. 9 1/3
c. 9
28.

Dari jumlah lulusan suatu SMA yang diterima di


Perguruan Tinggi Negeri tahun 1996 2003
disajikan dalam diagram di bawah.

Perhatikan diagram kotak garis di samping. Dari


diagram kotak garis tersebut nilai jangkauan dan
jangkauan semi interkuartil berturut-turut adalah
.

a. 41 dan 10
b. 47 dan 11
c. 23,5 dan 10,5
29.

d. 9 4/6
e. 9 5/6

d. 47 dan 10
e. 47 dan 10,5

Nilai rata-rata dari data yang ditunjukkan oleh


grafik di samping ini adalah .

Menurut diagram garis di atas, prestasi yang


paling buruk terjadi pada tahun .
a. 1996 1997
b. 1998 1999
c. 1999 2000
d. 2000 2001
e. 2002 2003
a. 5,6
b. 6
c. 6,6
d. 7
e. 7,6

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

10

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
30.

Hasil tes Matematika terhadap 20 siswa


digambarkan pada diagram batang daun di
samping. Banyaknya siswa yang memperoleh
nilai < 5 adalah .

a. 2
b. 4
c. 7
d. 9
e. 13
31.

34.

a. 67,5
b. 69,5
c. 7,15
d. 76
e. 77
35.

Data penimbangan berat badan terhadap 10 siswa


dalam kg adalah : 50, 39, 36, 42, 34, 50, 47, 39,
44, 4. Nilai statistika lima serangkai dari data
tersebut adalah .
a. 34, 38, 41, 47, 50
d. 33, 38, 41, 47, 50
b. 34, 39, 41, 48, 50
e. 33, 38, 42, 48, 50
c. 34, 39, 42, 47, 50

36.

Diketahui data :
23, 22, 29, 32, 21, 24, 24, 23, 25, 30, 31, 26, 27,
27, 28, 24, 25, 31, 26, 26, 27, 28, 30, 29, 28, 29,
28, 26, 27, 27. Jika dibuat interval kelas dengan
tepi bawah 19,5 dan lebar kelas 3, maka banyak
interval adalah .
a. 4
d. 7
b. 5
e. 8
c. 6

37.

Nilai dari D3 dan D9 (D = desil) dari data di


bawah ini berturut-turut adalah .
40 42 46 53 58 60 62 63 63 66 68 68 68 70 72
73 74 76 77 78 78 79 80 82 84 85 88 90 92 96
a. 63,5 dan 88,9
d. 65,5 dan 89,5
b. 63,9 dan 89,8
e. 66,4 dan 89
c. 65,4 dan 88

38.

Modus dari data pada histogram di samping


adalah .

Median dari data pada tabel di samping adalah .

a. 11,83
b. 12,83
c. 13,83
d. 12,17
e. 14,35
32.

Modus dari data yang disajikan pada tabel


distribusi frekuensi di samping adalah .

a. 59,18
b. 60,12
c. 65,12
d. 68,12
e. 68,18
33.

Rata-rata data pada tabel di samping jika dipilih


rata-rata sementara 75,5 adalah .

Kuartil bawah dari data yang disajikan pada tabel


frekuensi di samping adalah .
a. 25,0
b. 25,5
c. 26,0
d. 26,5
e. 27,0
a. 66,9
b. 66,6
c. 66,2
d. 66,1
e. 66,0

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

11

Bab 1 Statistik
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
39.

Simpangan kuartil dari data di samping adalah .

a. 21
b. 18
c. 14
d. 12
e. 9
40.

Jangkauan dari data: 54, 59, 63, 71, 53, 63, 71, 75,
78, 80, 83 adalah .
a. 30
d. 15
b. 29
e. 10
c. 20

41.

Persentil ke-75 dari data: 8, 6, 4, 3, 2, 9, 10, 15,


12, 14 adalah .
a. 11
d. 12,75
b. 11,5
e. 13
c. 12,5

42.

Simpangan baku dari data: 7, 5, 6, 5, 7, 6, 8, 4, 8,


4, 6 adalah .

2
55
11
11
b.
55
2
11
c.
2
55
a.

d.

44.

Diketahui data di samping ini. Simpangan baku


dari tabel di samping adalah .

45.

Jangkauan semi interkuartil dari data 9, 7, 12, 6,


14, 8, 10, 11 adalah . . . .
a. 0,75
d. 1,75
b. 1,0
e. 2,0
c. 1,5

48.

Nilai rata-rata ulangan matematika dari 39 siswa


adalah 45. Jika nilai matematika seorang siswa
lain digabungkan maka nilai rata-ratanya menjadi
46. Nilai matematika siswa lain itu adalah . . . .
a. 58
d. 65
b. 85
e. 56
c. 90

49.

Jika 9 adalah rata-rata dari 2, x, 10, 12 dan 15,


maka x sama dengan . . . .
a. 30
d. 9
b. 12
e. 6
c. 10

50.

Dari suatu penelitian diperoleh data sebagai


berikut.

Maka rata-rata dan nilainya berturut-turut adalah .


...
a. 4,4 dan 5
d. 4,7 dan 4
b. 4,5 dan 5
e. 5 dan 4
c. 4,6 dan 4
51.

Jika siswa x dalam rapornya memperoleh nilai: 8,


7, 6, 7, 5, 6, 8, 9, 8, 9, maka mediannya adalah . . .
a. 5
d. 7,5
b. 6
e. 8
c. 7

52.

Jangkauan semi interkuartil dari data: 12, 8, 10, 3,


6, 4, 5,12 adalah . . . .
a. 2,75
d. 3,25
b. 2,5
e. 4,5
c. 3,5

53.

Jika rata-rata dari data x, 3, x2, 9, dan 10 adalah


5,6 maka nilai x sama dengan . . . .
a. 2
d. 3
b. 2,2
e. 4
c. 2,4

d. 91
e. 86

Dari data di atas, rata-rata berat siswa adalah . . . .

a. 46,3
b. 46,5
c. 46,6

47.

e. 1

Diketahui data x1 = 3,5; x2 = 5,0; x3 = 6,0; dan x4 =


7,5; x5 = 8,0 maka simpangan baku dari kelima
data tersebut (deviasi standar) adalah .
a. 0
d. 1,64
b. 0,94
e. 6
c. 1,0

3
b. 7 2
c. 4 6

Median dari susunan bilangan-bilangan 4, 3, 8, 7,


9, 5 adalah . . . .
a. 4
d. 6
b. 4,5
e. 6,5
c. 5,5

2
11
55

43.

a. 6

46.

d. 46,8
e. 47

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

12

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
PELUANG
A. Kaidah Pencacahan
1. Aturan Perkalian
Contoh: Tono mempunyai 3 buah baju berwarna
putih, cokelat, dan batik. Ia juga memiliki 2 buah
celana warna hitam dan putih yang berbeda.
Banyaknya pasangan baju dan celana dapat dipakai
dengan pasangan yang berbeda adalah

P=
b.

7!
7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1
=
= 1260
2! 2!
2 .1 .2 .1
Permutasi Siklis
Permutasi siklis adalah permutasi yang cara
menyusunnya melingkar, sehingga banyaknya
menyusun n unsur yang berlainan dalam lingkaran
ditulis:

n!
= (n - 1)! atau
n

P(siklis) =
3.
Jadi banyaknya pasangan baju dan celana secara
bergantian sebanyak
3 2 = 6 cara.
Jadi jika persoalan pertama dapat diselesaikan
dengan a cara yang berlainan dan persoalan kedua
dapat diselesaikan dengan b cara yang berlainan,
maka persoalan pertama dan kedua dapat
diselesaikan dengan a b cara.
Notasi Faktorial
Faktorial adalah hasil kali bilangan asli berurutan
dari 1 sampai dengan n.
Untuk setiap bilangan asli n, didefinisikan:
n! = 1 2 3 ... (n 2) (n 1) n
lambang atau notasi n! dibaca sebagai n faktorial
untuk n > 2.
2.

Permutasi
Permutasi adalah urutan yang mungkin dari
sejumlah unsur yang berbeda tanpa adanya
pengulangan. Pada permutasi urutan diperhatikan.
Banyaknya permutasi dari n unsur diambil r unsur
dinotasikan:
nPr = n (n 1) (n 2) (n 3) (n r + 1) atau
nPr =

a.

n!
(n - r )!

Permutasi Beberapa Unsur yang Sama


Banyaknya permutasi n unsur yang memuat k, l, dan
m unsur yang sama dapat ditentukan dengan rumus:
P=

n!
k !l ! m !

Misal:
Banyak kata yang dapat disusun dari kata
AGUSTUS adalah
Banyaknya huruf = 7, banyaknya S = 2, banyaknya
U=2
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

P(siklis) = (n 1)!

Kombinasi
Kombinasi r unsur dari n unsur ialah himpunan
bagian r unsur yang dapat diambil dari n unsur yang
berlainan dengan urutan penyusunan unsur tidak
diperhatikan.
Banyaknya kombinasi dari n unsur yang berbeda
dengan setiap pengambilan dengan r unsur ditulis

C rn , nCr atau C(n r) adalah:


nCr =

Pr n
n!
=
r ! (n - r )! r !

Binomial Newton
n

(x + y)n =

C
k =0

n
k

n -k

-yk

B. Peluang Suatu Kejadian


Kejadian adalah himpunan bagian dari ruang
sampel, sedangkan titik sampel adalah setiap hasil
yang mungkin terjadi pada suatu percobaan. Jika A
adalah suatu kejadian yang terjadi pada suatu
percobaan dengan ruang sampel S, di mana setiap
titik sampelnya mempunyai kemungkinan sama
untuk muncul, maka peluang dari suatu kejadian A
ditulis sebagai berikut.
P(A) =

n (A )
n (S )

Keterangan:
P(A) = peluang kejadian A
n(A) = banyaknya anggota A
n(S) = banyaknya anggota ruang sampel S
Jika kejadian A dalam ruang sampel S selalu terjadi
maka n(A) = n(S), sehingga peluang kejadian A
adalah:
P(A) =

n (A ) S
= =1
n (S ) S

Frekuensi harapan dari sejumlah kejadian


merupakan banyaknya kejadian dikalikan dengan
peluang kejadian itu. Misalnya pada percobaan A

13

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
dilakukan n kali, maka frekuensi harapannya ditulis
sebagai berikut: Fh = n P(A)
Peluang Komplemen Suatu Kejadian
P(A) + P(AC) = + = 1
P(A) + P(AC) = 1 atau P(AC) = 1 P(A)
Peluang Dua Kejadian Saling Asing
Peluang gabungan dua kejadian (kejadian A atau
kejadian B) dapat ditentukan dengan rumus sebagai
berikut.
Misal A dan B adalah dua kejadian yang berbeda S,
maka peluang kejadian A B ditentukan dengan
aturan:
P(A B) = P(A) + P(B) P(AB)
Peluang gabungan dua kejadian saling asing
(kejadian A atau B di mana A dan B saling asing)
Karena A dan B saling asing maka AB = 0 atau
P(AB) = 0
Sehingga: P (A B) = P(A) + P(B) P(AB)
P(A) + P(B) 0
P (A B) = P(A) + P(B)
Peluang Kejadian Saling Bebas
Jika kejadian A tidak memengaruhi terjadinya
kejadian B dan sebaliknya atau terjadi atau tidaknya
kejadian A tidak tergantung pada terjadi atau
tidaknya kejadian B. Hal ini seperti digambarkan
pada pelemparan dua buah dadu sekaligus. Maka
peluang kejadian ini dapat dirumuskan:
P(AB) = P(A) P(B)
Peluang Kejadian Bersyarat
Dua kejadian disebut kejadian bersyarat atau
kejadian yang saling bergantung apabila terjadi atau
tidak terjadinya kejadian A akan memengaruhi
terjadi atau tidak terjadinya kejadian B. Peluang
terjadinya kejadian A dengan syarat kejadian B telah
muncul adalah:
P(A/B) =

P (A B )
, dengan syarat P(B) 0
P (B )

Atau peluang terjadinya kejadian B dengan syarat


kejadian A telah muncul adalah:
P(B/A) =

P (A B )
, dengan syarat P(A) 0
P (A )

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

14

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Latihan Konsep
1.

Dalam satu keranjang terdapat 9 buah tomat. Jika


diambil tiga buah tomat secara acak dari empat
buah tomat berwarna merah, tiga buah tomat
berwarna hijau kemerahan, dan tiga buah tomat
yang masih hijau. Tentukan banyaknya cara yang
dapat dilakukan.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Dari 36 orang siswa terdapat 22 orang gemar voli,
2.
17 orang gemar tenis, dan 4 orang tidak gemar
keduanya. Jika seorang siswa dipilih secara acak,
berapa peluang:
a. seorang gemar olahraga voli;
b. seorang siswa gemar olahraga tenis;
c. seorang siswa hanya gemar olahraga voli;
d. seorang siswa hanya gemar olahraga tenis;
e. seorang siswa gemar olahraga voli dan tenis.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
3.
Tiga orang perempuan harus duduk di antara
empat orang pria. Tidak ada perempuan yang
duduk di pinggir dan tidak ada perempuan yang
duduk berdampingan dengan perempuan. Dalam
berapa cara kondisi tersebut dapat diatur?
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

4.

Jabarkan dan sederhanakan bentuk-bentuk berikut.


d. (2x2 3y)6
a. (3a + b2)4
2 5
b. (2p + q )
e. (3a2 2ab)6
c. (3p2 q)5
f. (a + 2b 3c)7

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Satu stoples berisi 16 permen rasa cokelat dan 12
permen rasa jeruk. Jika diambil dua permen satu
per satu tanpa pengembalian, tentukan peluang
yang terambil itu adalah
a. keduanya rasa cokelat,
b. keduanya rasa jeruk,
c. pengambilan pertama rasa cokelat dan
pengambilan kedua rasa jeruk,
d. berturut-turut rasa jeruk, kemudian rasa
cokelat.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
6.

Dari lima buah angka 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 hendak disusun


bilangan genap yang terdiri atas tiga angka.
Berapa banyaknya bilangan yang dapat disusun
jika angka-angka itu:
a. boleh ada yang sama,
b. tidak boleh ada yang sama

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

15

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
7.

Sebuah kantong berisi 7 kelereng merah dan 5


kelereng kuning. Dari kantong itu diambil 3
kelereng sekaligus secara acak. Ada berapa cara
pengambilan, jika kelereng yang diambil adalah:
a. ketiganya berwarna merah,
b. ketiganya berwarna kuning,
c. 2 kelereng berwarna merah dan 1 kelereng
berwarna kuning?

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Terdapat 10 bola yang diberi nomor 1 sampai 10.
8.
Jika diambil 2 bola secara acak dari kartu itu,
berapa peluang terambil 2 bola dengan nomor
bilangan prima?
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
9.

Pada percobaan melempar dua buah dadu


sekaligus, tentukan peluang kejadian mata dadu
yang muncul berjumlah lebih dari 4.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
10.

Dalam pelemparan dua buah dadu sekaligus,


tentukan peluang keluarnya jumlah kedua mata
dadu sama dengan 5 atau jumlah kedua mata dadu
sama dengan 10.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
11.

Tentukan banyaknya susunan yang berbeda dapat


dibuat dari kata:
a. BUKU
b. RATARATA
c. LIMIT
d. KALKULUS

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
12. Tentukan n jika:
a. (n + 3)P2 = 56,

b. 4 nP3 = 24 nC4.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
13. Diketahui kejadian A dan B adalah kejadian yang
saling bebas tetapi tidak saling lepas. Jika P(A) =
1/3 dan P(AB) = 3/5 , hitunglah P(B).
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

16

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
14. Tentukan koefisien suku ke-5 dari (2x y)7.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
15.

Dalam sebuah kotak terdapat 12 bola merah dan 8


buah bola putih. Jika sebuah bola diambil dari
dalam kotak berturut-turut sebanyak dua kali
tanpa pengembalian, tentukan peluang yang
terambil kedua-duanya bola merah.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

17

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
2. 1.Dari angka 3, 5, 6, 7, dan 9 dibuat bilangan yang
terdiri atas tiga angka yang berbeda. Di antara
bilangan-bilangan tersebut yang kurang dari 400
banyaknya adalah ....
a. 16
d. 8
b. 12
e. 6
c. 10
3.

4.

Dua buah dadu ditos sekali. Peluang kedua mata


dadu berjumlah bilangan prima adalah ....
a.7/18
d.4/11
b.5/11
e.1/2
c.5/12
Sebuah dadu dan sekeping logam ditos bersamasama. Peluang dadu menunjukkan angka genap
dan uang menunjukkan angka adalah ....
a.1/2
d.1/6
b.1/3
e.1/12
c.

5.

Pada pengetosan dua buah dadu, peluang


munculnya mata dadu berjumlah kurang dari
delapan adalah ....
a. 5/36
d. 5/12
b. 7/12
e. 8/12
c. 5/6

6.

Jika Crn menyatakan banyaknya kombinasi r


elemen dari n elemen dan Cn3 = 2n maka C 2n7 =
....
a. 16
d. 9
b. 12
e. 8
c. 11

7.

Tiga keping uang logam ditos sebanyak 208 kali.


Frekuensi harapan munculnya minimal dua sisi
gambar adalah ....
a. 156
d. 72
b. 130
e. 52
c. 104

8.

Tiga orang siswa masuk ruangan rapat. Tempat


yang masih kosong 5 kursi. Banyaknya cara
mereka dapat mengambil tempat duduk adalah ....
a. 72
d. 24
b. 60
e. 18
c. 48

9.

Peluang pada pengetosan 7 mata uang sekaligus


yang muncul 3 gambar adalah ....
a. 17/128
d. 31/128
b. 19/128
e. 35/128
c. 27/128

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

10.

Jika P(n + 4,11) : P(n + 3,11) = 14 : 3 maka n =


....
a. 12
d. 9
b. 11
e. 8
c. 10

11.

Koefisien x17 dari x5(1 x2)17 adalah ....


a. 12.376
d. 6188
b. 924
e. 924
c. 12.376

12.

Dua buah dadu dilempar undi bersamasama.


Peluang munculnya jumlah mata dadu 9 atau 10
adalah ....
a. 5/36
d. 9/36
b. 7/36
e. 11/36
c. 8/36

13.

Tono beserta 9 orang temannya bermaksud


membentuk suatu tim bola volley terdiri atas 6
orang. Apabila Tono harus menjadi anggota tim
tersebut maka banyak tim yang mungkin dibentuk
adalah ....
a. 126
d. 216
b. 162
e. 252
c. 210

14.

Tiga buah kelereng merah dan empat buah


kelereng putih yang identik dimasukkan ke dalam
sebuah kotak. Peluang terambilnya sebuah
kelereng merah dan dua buah kelereng putih
dalam sekali pengambilan adalah ....
a. 5/35
d. 24/35
b. 12/35
e. 30/35
c. 18/35

15.

Dua buah dadu ditos bersama. Peluang munculnya


jumlah mata dadu tiga atau enam adalah ....
a. 12/36
d. 1/36
b. 8/36
e. 5/36
c. 7/36

16.

Peluang seorang pemain basket memasukkan bola


ke dalam keranjang dengan tepat adalah 0,2.
Tentukan peluang pemain basket tersebut
memasukkan paling sedikit sekali dari dua kali
percobaan ....
a. 4/100
d. 96/100
b. 2/10
e. 2/100
c. 4/10

18

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
17.

18.

Diketahui bahwa 20% siswa sebuah sekolah dasar


bercita-cita ingin menjadi dokter, 50% siswa
bercita-cita menjadi pilot, dan 10% siswa bercitacita menjadi dokter dan pilot. Jumlah siswa yang
bercita-cita menjadi dokter atau pilot adalah ....
a. 20%
d. 50%
b. 30%
e. 60%
c. 40%
Pelat nomor mobil angkutan umum di suatu kota
terdiri atas tiga huruf dan dua angka. Banyaknya
cara menyusun pelat nomor tersebut jika tidak
boleh ada huruf atau pun angka yang berulang
adalah ....
a. 26 26 26 9 9 cara
b. 26 25 24 9 8 cara
c. 26 25 9 8 7 cara
d. 26 25 24 10 9 cara
e. 26 25 10 9 8 cara

24.

Nilai n yang memenuhi


a. 2
b. 3
c. 4

n!
= 6 adalah .
(n - 1)!

d. 5
e. 6

25.

Suatu rapat diikuti 7 orang yang duduk


mengelilingi meja bundar. Banyak cara duduk
adalah .
a. 270
d. 4.050
b. 460
e. 5.040
c. 720

26.

Koefisien suku yang memuat x5 dari (x + y)8


adalah .
a. 20
d. 64
b. 28
e. 128
c. 56

19.

Peluang seorang siswa mendapat nilai baik dalam


mata pelajaran Matematika dan Fisika berturutturut adalah 0,2 dan 0,4. Peluang siswa tersebut
mendapat nilai baik untuk salah satu mata
pelajaran tersebut adalah ....
a. 0,92
d. 0,8
b. 0,08
e. 0,6
c. 0,85

27.

Sebuah kantong berisi 7 kelereng merah dan 5


kelereng kuning. Dari kantong itu diambil 3
kelereng sekaligus secara acak. Banyak cara
terambil 2 kelereng merah dan 1 kelereng kuning
adalah .
a. 103
d. 106
b. 104
e. 108
c. 105

20.

Peluang seorang anak menebak dengan tepat


huruf pertama nama temannya adalah ....
a. 1/13
d. 2/52
b. 1/26
e. 2/26
c. 1/25

28.

Jika peluang kejadian hujan dalam kurun waktu


30 hari adalah 17/30 maka peluang kejadian tidak
hujan dalam kurung waktu 30 hari adalah .
a. 12/30
d. 15/30
b. 13/30
e. 16/30
c. 14/30

21.

Peluang untuk memperoleh bilangan ganjil pada


sebuah dadu dan gambar pada sekeping mata uang
yang dilempar bersama sebanyak satu kali adalah
....
a. 1/12
d. 1/3
b. 1/6
e. 1/2
c.

29.

Pada pelemparan dua buah dadu satu kali, peluang


munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 8 atau 5 adalah
.
a. 5/19
d. 1/9
b. 1/4
e. 2/9
c. 5/26

22.

Dari 5 pria dan 4 wanita akan dipilih 3 pria dan 3


wanita. Banyak cara memilih ada ....
a. 60
d. 20
b. 40
e. 18
c. 24

30.

Tiga uang logam dilempar bersama-sama. Jika A


adalah kejadian muncul tepat dua angka, maka
P(A) adalah .
a.
d. 3/8
b. 1/8
e. 5/8
c. 2/8

23.

Banyak sepeda motor yang memakai nomor polisi


dengan susunan angka-angka 1, 2, 3, 4 dan 5 dan
terdiri atas lima angka tanpa berulang adalah .
a. 40
d. 240
b. 60
e. 400
c. 120

31.

Dua dadu dilempar bersama-sama. Peluang


muncul mata dadu pertama 3 dan mata dadu
kedua 5 adalah .
a. 6/36
d. 3/36
b. 5/36
e. 1/36
c. 4/36

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

19

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
32.

Dua buah dadu dilempar bersama-sama. Peluang


munculnya jumlah mata dadu 9 atau 10 adalah .
a. 5/36
d. 9/36
b. 7/36
e. 11/36
c. 8/36

33.

Kotak pertama berisi 5 bola merah dan 3 bola


kuning. Kotak kedua berisi 2 bola merah dan 6
bola kuning. Dari masing-masing kotak diambil
sebuah bola secara acak. Peluang terambilnya
kedua bola berwarna sama adalah .
a. 1/8
d. 9/16
b. 5/16
e. 7/8
c. 7/16

34.

Dari seperangkat kartu bridge diambil secara acak


satu lembar kartu. Peluang terambilnya kartu yang
bukan As adalah .
a. 1/52
d. 3/13
b. 1/13
e. 48/52
c. 5/52

40.

Sebuah kantong berisi 6 bola merah, 4 bola putih,


dan 8 bola biru. Apabila 3 bola diambil sekaligus
secara acak, peluang terambil 2 bola putih dan 1
bola merah adalah .
a. 55/204
d. 3/68
b. 5/204
e. 6/17
c. 7/102

41.

Sebuah kartu diambil dari seperangkat kartu


bridge. Peluang terambil kartu As atau kartu
warna merah adalah .
a. 4/54
d. 28/52
b. 10/52
e. 30/52
c. 26/52

42.

Hasil dari
a. 140
b. 200
c. 240

16 !
adalah . . . .
14 !
d. 250
e. 3.360

35.

Pada percobaan melempar sebuah dadu sebanyak


600 kali, frekuensi harapan munculnya bilangan
prima adalah .
a. 250
d. 450
b. 300
e. 500
c. 325

43.

Banyaknya bilangan ganjil yang terdiri atas 3


angka yang disusun dari angka 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, dan 8
tanpa pengulangan adalah . . . .
a. 24
d. 48
b. 28
e. 60
c. 40

36.

Jika berlaku nC4 = nP3 maka nilai n adalah .


a. 9
d. 27
b. 12
e. 35
c. 15

44.

37.

Pada suatu tiang diikatkan bendera 4 buah


berwarna merah, 2 biru, dan 2 hijau. Setiap
susunan mempunyai arti yang berbeda.
Banyaknya susunan yang mungkin adalah .
a. 70
d. 280
b. 90
e. 420
c. 240

Doni, Dedi, Dodi, dan Doli akan bekerja secara


bergiliran. Banyaknya urutan bekerja yang dapat
disusun dengan Dodi selalu pada giliran terakhir
adalah . . . .
a. 3
d. 18
b. 6
e. 24
c. 12

45.

Suatu tim bola voli terdiri atas 6 pemain yang


dipilih dari 9 orang. Banyaknya macam susunan
yang dapat dibentuk adalah . . . .
a. 18
d. 54
b. 21
e. 84
c. 48

46.

Ada 10 titik dan tidak ada 3 titik yang terletak


segaris. Banyaknya segitiga yang dapat dibuat
adalah . . . .
a. 15
d. 120
b. 30
e. 240
c. 60

47.

Suatu gedung mempunyai lima pintu masuk. Tiga


orang hendak memasuki gedung tersebut. Banyak
cara agar mereka dapat memasuki gedung tersebut
adalah . . . .
a. 10
d. 50
b. 20
e. 60
c. 30

38.

39.

Dari 10 peserta olimpiade matematika yang


masuk nominasi akan dipilih 3 nominasi terbaik
secara acak. Banyak pilihan yang dapat dilakukan
adalah .
a. 10
d. 120
b. 20
e. 720
c. 40
Dalam suatu pertemuan ada 30 orang dan saling
berjabat tangan. Banyak cara jabat tangan yang
terjadi adalah .
a. 435
d. 875
b. 455
e. 885
c. 870

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

20

48.

Dua orang pergi menonton pertandingan sepak


bola. Jika stadion itu mempunyai 4 pintu dan
mereka masuk melalui sebuah pintu dan keluar
dengan pintu yang berbeda, maka banyaknya cara
yang terjadi adalah . . . .
a. 18
d. 60
b. 20
e. 75
c. 24

49.

Pihak pengelola suatu perusahaan memerlukan 4


staf pengurus. Jika tersedia 7 calon, maka
kemungkinan banyaknya susunan staf pengurus
adalah . . . .
a. 210
d. 35
b. 105
e. 30
c. 42

50.

51.

52.

53.

Dalam suatu ruangan terdapat 30 orang. Setiap


orang saling bersalaman. Banyaknya salaman
yang dilakukan adalah . . . .
a. 435
d. 875
b. 455
e. 885
c. 870
Akan dibuat plat nomor yang terdiri atas 3 angka
dari 8 angka yang disediakan. Banyak plat nomor
yang harus dibuat adalah . . . .
a. 336
d. 24
b. 60
e. 10
c. 56
Dari 5 orang calon pengurus akan dipilih seorang
ketua, wakil ketua, dan seorang bendahara.
Banyaknya susunan pengurus yang mungkin
terjadi adalah . . . .
a. 10
d. 60
b. 15
e. 125
c. 20
Kata ADAP dapat disusun secara berlainan
dengan . . . cara.
a. 4
d. 18
b. 6
e. 24
c. 12

54.

Banyaknya cara 5 orang untuk menempati dua


kursi yang tersedia adalah . . . .
a. 5
d. 20
b. 6
e. 120
c. 10

55.

Dari delapan orang pemain bulutangkis akan


dibentuk
pasangan
ganda.
Banyaknya
kemungkinan pasangan ganda yang dapat
dibentuk adalah . . . .
a. 72
d. 16
b. 56
e. 10
c. 28

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

56.

Dari 7 orang pengurus organisasi akan dipilih


seorang ketua, wakil ketua, sekretaris, dan
bendahara. Banyaknya susunan pengurus yang
mungkin adalah . . .
a. 210
d. 260
b. 250
e. 840
c. 252

57.

Dari 7 orang musisi akan dibentuk grup musik


yang terdiri atas 4 orang. Banyaknya cara
membentuk grup tersebut adalah . . . .
a. 35
d. 560
b. 70
e. 840
c. 210

58.

Banyaknya permutasi semua huruf pada kata


MAHATMA adalah . . . .
a. 420
d. 2.520
b. 1.008
e. 5.040
c. 1.680

59.

Dua buah dadu dilempar bersama-sama satu kali,


peluang munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 7 atau
10 adalah . . . .
a.7/36
d. 17/36
b. 9/36
e. 18/36
c. 10/36

60.

Sebuah mata uang dan sebuah dadu dilempar


sekali. Peluang munculnya angka pada mata uang
dan bilangan ganjil pada dadu adalah . . . .
d.1/4
a. 5/6
b. 1/3
e.1/6
c. 2/3

61.

Badu mengikuti ujian Matematika dan Kimia.


Peluang Badu lulus ujian Matematika adalah
dan peluang lulus Kimia adalah 2/3. Peluang Badu
untuk lulus keduanya adalah . . . .
a.
d. 5/6
b. 1/3
e. 1/6
c.

62.

Di dalam sebuah kantong terdapat 3 bola merah


dan 5 bola putih. Dari dalam kantong tersebut
diambil 3 bola sekaligus. Kemungkinan bahwa
ketiga bola tersebut terdiri atas 1 bola merah dan 2
bola putih adalah . . . .
d. 3/8
a. 30/56
b. 2/10
e. 11/15
c. 13/30

63.

Dari 15 butir telur yang dijual terdapat 5 butir


yang cacat. Seorang ibu membeli 3 butir telur
tanpa memilih. Nilai kemungkinan ia mendapat 3
butir telur yang baik adalah . . . .
d. 3/10
a. 28/81
b. 1/5
e. 1/3
c. 24/91

21

Bab 2 Peluang
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
64.

Suatu kantong berisi 40 kelereng merah dan 10


kelereng putih. Bila dari kantong itu diambil 2
kelereng merah, maka peluang mengambil lagi
satu biji tanpa dikembalikan berwarna putih dari
kantong tersebut adalah . . . .
a. 9/50
d. 7/54
b. 1/16
e. 5/24
c. 1/3

65.

Dalam satu kotak terdapat 3 bola merah dan 6


bola putih. Diambil dua bola berturut-turut tanpa
pengembalian. Peluang kedua bola itu merah
adalah . . .
d. 7/12
a. 1/12
b. 2/9
e. 1/3
c.

66.

Pada percobaan melempar uang logam tiga kali,


besarnya peluang munculnya dua angka berturutturut adalah . . . .
a.
d. 3/8
b. 1/3
e. 3/4
c.

67.

Jika 2 buah dadu dilempar sekali bersamaan,


maka peluang diperoleh jumlah mata kedua dadu
paling sedikit sepuluh adalah . . . .
a.
d. 1/12
b. 1/6
e. 1/4
c. 1/3

68.

Pada percobaan melempar tiga keping uang logam


240 kali, frekuensi harapan kejadian muncul 2
gambar adalah . . . .
a. 30
d. 60
b. 40
e. 90
c. 45

69.

Dua dadu dilambungkan bersamaan. Peluang


munculnya mata dadu yang jumlahnya kurang
dari lima atau lebih dari delapan adalah . . . .
a. 1/9
d. 5/12
b. 5/18
e. 1/6
c. 4/9

70.

Pada pelemparan dua dadu sebanyak satu kali,


peluang munculnya mata dadu berjumlah 8 atau 5
adalah . . . .
d. 5/9
a. 2/9
b.
e. 5/26
c. 1/9

71.

Sebuah kotak berisi 3 bola putih dan 5 bola hitam.


Diambil dua bola sekaligus dari kotak itu. Peluang
terambil 2 bola hitam adalah . . . .
a. 4/5
d. 5/14
b.
e. 2/5
c. 5/8

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

22

Bab 3 Trigonometri
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
TRIGONOMETRI
MATERI
A. Rumus Trigonometri untuk Jumlah dan Selisih Dua Sudut
cos ( + ) = cos cos sin sin
cos ( ) = cos cos + sin sin
sin ( + ) = sin cos + cos sin
sin ( ) = sin cos cos sin

tan a + tan b
1 - tan a . tan b
tan a - tan b
tan ( ) =
1 + tan a . tan b

tan ( + ) =

B.

Rumus Trigonometri untuk Sudut Ganda


sin 2 = 2 sin cos
cos 2 = cos2 sin2 atau cos 2 = 1 2 sin2

2 tan a
1 - tan 2 a
1 - cos a
1
sin
=
2
2
tan 2 =

cos a + 1
1
=
2
2
1
sin a
tan
=
, cos 1
2
1 + cos a
1 - cos a
1
tan
=
, sin 0
sin a
2
cos

C.

Perkalian, Penjumlahan, serta Pengurangan Sinus dan Kosinus

cos(a + b ) + cos(a - b )
2
cos(a + b ) - cos(a - b )
sin sin =
-2
sin(a + b ) + sin(a - b )
sin cos =
2
cos(a + b ) - sin(a - b )
cos sin =
2
cos cos =

cos + cos = 2 cos ( + ) cos ( )


cos cos = 2 sin ( + ) sin ( )
sin + sin = 2 sin ( + ) cos ( ) dan
sin sin = 2 cos ( + ) sin ( )

2 sin(a + b )
cos(a + b ) + cos(a - b )
2 sin(a - b )
tan tan =
cos(a + b ) + cos(a - b )
tan + tan =

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

23

Bab 3 Trigonometri
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Pemahaman Konsep
1.

Buktikan bahwa
a. sin (/4 + 0) sin (/4 0) = 2 sin
b. sin (/6 + 0) + cos (/6 + 0) = cos
c.

tan(a + b ) tan 2 a - tan 2 b


=
tan(a - b ) 1 - tan 2 a tan 2 b

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
2.
a. Diketahui , , dan menyatakan besar sudutsudut segitiga ABC, tan = 3, dan tan = 1.
Tentukan tan .
b. Jika A + B + C = 180, tunjukkan bahwa tan
A + tan B + tan C = tan A tan B tan C
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
3.

Jika 3 cos (x + /6) = cos (x /6), tentukan:


a. nilai tan 2x
b. nilai cos 2x
c. nilai sin 4x

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

4.

Buktikan:

A
sin A
=
2 1 + cos A
1 + cot 2 A
b. cosec 2A =
2 cot A
sec A - 1
A
c.
= tan 2
sec A + 1
2
sin 2 A 1 + cos 2 A
d.
=
sin A
cos A
a. tan

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Buktikan kebenaran identitas berikut.

sin 4 A + sin 2 A
= tan 3 A
cos 4 A + cos 2 A
1
tan ( A - B )
sin A - sin B
2
b.
=
sin A + sin B tan 1 ( A + B )
2
sin A + sin 3 A
c.
= tan 1A
cos A + cos 3 A
a.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Diketahui sin A = 3/5 dan tan B = 5/12. Hitunglah:
6.
a. sin (A + B)
b. cos (A B)
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

24

7.

Tentukan nilai dari:


a. cos 123 cos 57 sin 123 sin 57
b. cos 100 sin 10 sin 100 cos 10

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
8.
Nyatakan dalam bentuk paling sederhana.
a. sin 75 + sin 15
b. cos 100 + cos 20
c. cos 35 cos 25
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
9.

Jika cos 2A = 0,75, dengan 0 < A < 90,


hitunglah:
a. cos A
b. sin A

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
10.

Diketahui A, B, C adalah sudut-sudut dalam


sebuah segitiga. Jika A B = 30 dan C = 5/6,
hitunglah nilai dari cos A sin B.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

25

Bab 3 Trigonometri
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

sin 15o - cos15o


= ...
tan 15o
1
2

a.
d. 2 +
6
2
4 3 -1

e. Cos

c. 2 sin

b
2

9.

4 5
5

d. sin a sin b
e. cos (ab)
10.

c. -

4 5
9
e. 4 5
d.

b. - 4

b. 2p + 1

Jika

7
, di
4

tan 2 x
= 1; 0O x 90 O maka sudut x
1 + sec x
d. 60
e. 75

sin x cos x
ekuivalen dengan ....
cos 2 x - sin 2 x
1 + tan 2 x
1 + tan 2 x
d.
a.
tan x
tan x
tan x
tan x
b.
e.
1 - tan 2 x
1 + tan 2 x
Bentuk

11.

sin (x + 30) + cos (x + 60)=


a. sin x
d. cotan x
b. cos x
e. sec x
c. sin x

12.

2 sin2 sin 15 sin 75 = ....


a.
d.

Jika sin 38 = p maka sin 76 = ....

1- p 2

dan sin = -

c. 1+ tan x

4 5
9

a. 2 p

5
3

-3 5 +2 7
12
6 - 2 35
12
-3 5 -2 7
12
8 - 35
12
6 + 35
12

adalah ....
a. 0
b. 30
c. 45

Jika sin A = 2/3 dan cos A < 0 maka tan 2A = ....


a.

d. 2p2 1
e.

p
1- p 2

c. 2p
7.

e.

sin(a - b )
= ....
tan a - tan b
a. cos a cos b
b. sin a sin b
c. cos a cos b

6.

d.

sin (30o + ) + cos (60o + )= ....


a. sin
d. 2 cos
b. cos

5.

c.

d. 2 cos
e. Sin 2

2 cos

c.

4.

b.

sin (45 + ) sin (45 ) = ....


a. 2 sin
b. 2sin

3.

a.

6
e. 3 +
3

c. 2 -

Jika cos =

kuadran II, dan di kuadran IV maka cos ( + )


= ....

2
b.
4 3 +1

2.

8.

b.
c.

e.

Jika sin = 4/5, cos = 5/13, dan di kuadran I


maka sin( ) = ....
a. 56/65
d. 63/65
b. - 33/65
e. 64/65
c. 16/65

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

26

Bab 3 Trigonometri
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA

13.

Jika sin = -

2 10
7

1
tan q = ......
2
2
a.
5

14.

15.

b.

5
2

c. -

2
5

, di kuadran IV maka

19.

17.

e. -

3
5

d. -

5
2

cos 110 sin 55 = ....


a. (sin165o + sin 55o)
b. (sin165o - sin 55o)
c. (sin 55o - sin165o)
d. (cos165o + cos 55o)
e. (cos165o + cos 55o)
cos 35 cos 75 = ...
a. 2 sin 55 sin 20
b. 2 sin 55 cos 20
c. 2 sin 55 cos 20
d. 2 cos 55 sin 20
e. 2 cos 55cos 20

1
1
d. 2- 3
2- 3
2
2
1
1
b. 2 - 2 2 e. 2- 2
2
2
1
c.
2- 2
2
20.

Jika cos = maka tan 2 = ....


d. 24/5
a. 24/7
b. 24/7
e. 24/7
c. 24/5

21.

Diketahui sin A = 13/12 , sin B = 5/3 , dengan A


dan B dikuadran I. Maka nilai cos (A + B) adalah
.
a. 16/65
d. 65/16
b. 7/25
e. 65/15
c. 7/25

22.

Sin 30 = ..
a.
b.
c.

Periode grafik fungsi y = 1/3 cos Px adalah 2/3


maka nilai P adalah ....
a. 1/3
d. 6
b. 2
e. 2/3
c. 3

p
p
sin 2x
cos 2x cos
2
2
2
(4) cos 2x = 2 cos x + 1

1
2
3
1
b.
2
1
c.
2
2
24.

Fungsi y = 4 sin x sin (x + 60) mencapai nilai


minimum pada ....
a. x = 60 + k 360
b. x = 60 + k 180
c. x = 30 + k 360
d. x = 30 + k 180
e. x = k 360

1
2
2
1
b.
3
2
1
c.
2
3

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

25.

d.

1
3
2

e. 1

Jika tan A = 1/2dan tan B = 1/3, maka tan (A + B)


adalah .
a.

a. (1), (2), dan (3)


b. (1), dan (3)
c. (2) dan (4)
d. (4)
e. semua benar

d.
e. 1

2 sin 15 cos 15 = .
a.

Identitas yang benar adalah ....


(1) cos 2x = cos4x sin4x
(2) cos 2x = (cos x + sin x) (cos x sin x)
(3) cos 2x = sin

18.

1o
= ....
2

a.

23.
16.

sin 292

d.

1
3
3

e. 1

Sin 17 cos 13 + cos 17 sin 13 = .


a.
d. 1

1
2
2
1
c.
3
2
b.

e. 0

27

Bab 3 Trigonometri
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
26.

2 cos2 30 1 = .
a.
d. 1

1
b.
2
2
1
c.
3
2
27.

28.

b.

c.

1
6
2

d.
e. 2

34.

Sin (x

d. 0
e. 1

p
4p
) + sin (x
) = .
3
3

a. 2 sin x
b. sin x
c. 0
35.

d. 1
e. sin x

Jika cos 2A = 8/10, dengan A sudut lancip, maka


tan A adalah .
d. 1/10
a. 1/3
b. 1/5
e. 1/9
c. 1/20

1
3
2

e. 1

Jika tan 5 = p, maka tan 40 = .

1+ p
1- p
1- p
b.
1+ p
1
c.
1- p

1+ p
p -1
1- p
e.
1+ p 2
d.

1 + cos 2 x
senilai dengan
1 - cos 2 x
a. tan x
b. cot x
c. tan2 x

32.

c.

d.

a.

31.

e. 0

Sin 75 cos 15 + cos 75 sin 15 = ..


a. 0

30.

1
3
2
1
b.
2
2

Jika sin (90 A) = 2 3 , maka tan A = .

1
3
6
1
b.
3
3
1
c.
3
2

Cos 41 cos 11 + sin 41 sin 11 = .


a.

Diketahui sin x = 7/25 dan sin y = 3/5, dengan x


dan y sudut tumpul. Sin (x + y) = .
a. 117/125
d. 3/5
b. 3/5
e. 4/125
c. 4/5

a.

29.

33.

d. cot2 x
e. cos2 x

Cos 2A 2 cos2A = .
a. 1
d. 2 cos A
b. 1
e. 2 cos A sin A
c. 2 sin A

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

28

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
LINGKARAN
MATERI
A. Persamaan Lingkaran
Pusat O (0, 0) dan jari-jari r: x2 + y2 = r2
Pusat T (a, b) dan jari-Jari r: (x a)2 + (y b)2 = r2
Jika 2a = 2A, 2b = 2B dan a2 + b2 r2 = C, maka diperoleh bentuk umum persamaan lingkaran:
x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, di mana pusatnya (A, B) dan jari-jari
lingkaran (r) =

a 2 + b 2 - c 2 atau r =

A 2 + B 2 -C

B.

Posisi Titik P(x1, y1) terhadap Lingkaran


1) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak di dalam lingkaran, jika berlaku
x12 + y12 <r2 atau (x1 a)2 + (y1 b)2 < r2
2) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak pada lingkaran, jika berlaku
x12 + y12 = r2 atau (x1 a)2 + (y1 b)2 = r2
3) Titik P(x1, y1) terletak di luar lingkaran, jika berlaku
x12 + y12 > r2 atau (x1 a)2 + (y1 b)2 > r2

C.

Posisi Garis y = mx + n terhadap Suatu Lingkaran


Jika persamaan kuadrat ax2 + bx + c = 0, D = diskriminan = b2 4ac
Jarak pusat lingkaran P(x1, y1) ke garis ax + by + c = 0 adalah
k=

ax 1 + by 2 + c
a 2 +b2

Maka ada tiga kemungkinan posisi garis terhadap suatu lingkaran yaitu:
1) Jika D < 0, maka persamaan garis y = mx + n terletak di luar lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, dan tidak
memotong lingkaran atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis lebih dari jari-jari lingkaran (k > r).
2) Jika D = 0, maka persamaan garis y = mx + n terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 dan
memotong lingkaran di satu titik atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis sama dengan jari-jari lingkaran (k = r).
3) Jika D > 0, maka persamaan garis garis y = mx + n terletak di dalam lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0, dan
memotong lingkaran di dua titik atau jarak pusat lingkaran ke garis lebih kecil dari jari-jari lingkaran (k < r).
D.

Persamaan Garis Singgung Lingkaran

Melalui titik P (x1, y1) pada lingkaran x2 + y2 = r2 adalah x1x + y1y = r2

Melalui titik P (x1, y1) pada lingkaran (x a)2 + (y b)2 = r2, adalah (x1 a) (x a) + (y1 b) (y b) = r2

Melalui Titik Q(x1, y1) pada Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 adalah x1x + y1y + A(x1 + x) + B(y1 + y) + C
=0
Melalui suatu titik di luar lingkaran

Diketahui titik P(x1, y1) berada di luar lingkaran


L: x2 + y2 = r2 (1)
Misalkan, persamaan garis singgung yang melalui P(x1, y1) adalah
g: y = y1 + m(x x1) (2).
Jika g menyinggung L di titik Q, substitusikan persamaan (2) ke persamaan (1) sehingga diperoleh persamaan
kuadrat dalam x. Selanjutnya, cari diskriminan (D) persamaan kuadrat tersebut. Oleh karena g menyinggung L maka
D = 0 sehingga nilai-nilai m dapat diperoleh. Apabila nilai m diketahui, dapat ditentukan persamaan garis singgung g
dengan cara menyubstitusikan m ke persamaan garis g tersebut.

Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran x2 + y2 = r2 adalah

y = mx r 1 + m
Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran (x a)2 + (y b)2 = r2 adalah
2

y b = m(x a) r 1 + m

Dengan gradien m terhadap lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2Ax + 2By + C = 0 adalah: y b = m(x a) r

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

1+ m 2

29

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Pemahaman Konsep
4.
1.

Carilah persamaan lingkaran yang melalui titik (7,


8) dan (0, 9) dan pusatnya terletak pada garis x
2y = 1.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
2.
Gedung Parthenon dibangun 440 SM. Gedung
tersebut dirancang oleh arsitek Yunani
menggunakan perbandingan nisbah emas.
Perhatikan gambar berikut.

Pada titik tengah sisi persegi ABCD dibuat busur


lingkaran dengan pusat G dan jari-jari GD.
Lingkaran tersebut memotong perpanjangan BC di
F. Nisbah BF : AB disebut perbandingan nisbah
emas. Jika diketahui busur DF memenuhi
persamaan x2+ y2 138y 44 = 0, berapa
perbandingan nisbah emas gedung Parthenon?
(Petunjuk: perhitungan dibulatkan sampai satu
desimal)
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Carilah persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran
3.
x2 + y2 = 25 yang dapat ditarik dari titik (7, 1).
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Carilah persamaan lingkaran yang melalui (0, 0),


jari-jari 5 dan pusatnya terletak pada garis x y =
1.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Berapakah jarak terdekat dari titik (7, 2) ke
lingkaran dengan persamaan x2 + y2 + 10x + 14y
151 = 0?
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
6.
Tentukan pusat dan jari-jari lingkaran dari:
a. x2 + y2 4x + 2y + 1 = 0
b. x2 + y2 + 2x 4y 4 = 0
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Tentukan persamaan lingkaran yang melalui:
7.
a. (3, 4), (1, 4), dan (5, 2)
b. (5, 0), (0, 5), dan (1, 0)
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

30

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
8.

Tentukan persamaan lingkaran dengan jari-jari 6


dan pusat di titik berikut.
a. O(0, 0)
b. A(2, 5)
c. B(3, 4)

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Diketahui persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 = a2.
9.
Tentukan batas-batas nilai a supaya:
a. titik (5, 3) pada lingkaran,
b. titik (2, 4) di luar lingkaran,
c. titik (2, 5) di dalam lingkaran.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
10.

Sisi suatu persegi mempunyai persamaan x = 5, x


= 5, y = 5, dan y = 5. Tentukan persamaan
lingkaran jika:
a. menyinggung semua sisi persegi,
b. melalui semua titik persegi.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
11.

Tentukan persamaan garis singgung


lingkaran:
a. (x 3)2 + (y + 1)2 = 25 di titik (7, 2),
b. x2 + y2 4x 6y 27 = 0 di titik (4, 1).

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

pada

12.

Tentukan persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 +


y2 = 41 yang:
a. melalui titik berabsis 5 pada lingkaran,
b. sejajar garis L: 3x + 3y = 10,
c. tegak lurus garis L: 3x 6y = 8.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
13.

Jika garis y = 3x + n menyinggung lingkaran x2 +


y2 2x 19 = 0, tentukan nilai n dan titik
singgungnya.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
14. Tentukan persamaan garis singgung yang tegak
lurus garis 3x + y + 3 = 0 pada lingkaran x2 + y2
8x 4y 20 = 0.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
15. Jika garis g adalah garis singgung melalui titik (3,
4) pada lingkaran x2 + y2 = 25, tentukan
persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 2x +
4y + 4 = 0 yang sejajar garis g.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

31

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (3,4) dan
1.
menyinggung 2x y + 5 = 0 adalah ....
a. (x 4)2 + (y 3)2 = 42
b. (x 3)2 + (y 4)2 = 49
c. (x 3)2 + (y 4)2 = 49/5
d. (x + 3)2 (y + 4)2 = 49
e. (x 3)2 (y 4)2 = 42
2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Jika titik P(0, 3) terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2 =


9, persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran di
titik P adalah ....
a. y = 2x 3
d. x = 0
b. y = x
e. x = 3
c. y = 3

9.

Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x2 + y2


2x 4y 4 = 0 dan garis g dengan persamaan y
x 1 = 0 maka ....
a. g tidak memotong L
b. g memotong L di satu titik
c. g memotong L di dua titik
d. g melalui titik pusat L
e. g memotong L dan melalui titik pusat

10.

Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 2x


4y 4 = 0 di titik (0, 5) adalah ....
a. y = 5x +1
d. y = x + 5
b. y = 3x 5
e. y = 5
c. y = 4x 3

11.

Persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 mx + 7y + 4 = 0
menyinggung sumbu-x maka nilai m adalah ....
a. 16
d. 11 atau 3
b. 4
e. 16
c. 4 atau 4

12.

Diketahui lingkaran x2 + y 2 = p dan garis x + y z


= 0. Supaya garis dan lingkaran ini berpotongan di
dua titik yang berbeda maka p harus sama dengan
....
a.
d. 3
b. 1
e. 4
c. 2

13.

Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x2 + y2


2x 6y + 1 = 0. Pernyataan berikut yang benar
adalah ....

Diketahui lingkaran L dengan persamaan x + y =


25 dan P(5, 5) maka letak titik P adalah ....
a. di dalam lingkaran L
b. di luar lingkaran L
c. pada lingkaran L
d. sejauh 5 satuan dari pusat lingkaran L
e. sejauh

3.

8.

5 satuan dari pusat lingkaran L

Diketahui lingkaran x2 + y2 + 6x 8y + 21 = 0.
Jika M adalah pusat lingkaran dan R adalah jarijari lingkaran tersebut, koordinat titik M dan
panjang R berturut-turut adalah ....
a. (3, 4) dan 2
d. (3, 4) dan 3
b. (3, 4) dan 2
e. (3, 4) dan 3
c. (3, 4) dan 2
Persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran x2 + y2 =
100 di titik (8, 6) menyinggung lingkaran dengan
pusat (4, 8) dan jari-jari R. Nilai R adalah ....
a. 2
d. 5
b. 3
e. 6
c. 4
Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 4x + 4y = p akan
menyinggung sumbu-x dan sumbu-y jika p sama
dengan ....
a. 8
d. 4
b. 4
e. 8
c. 0
Lingkaran x2 + y2 + 2px = 0 dengan p bilangan
real konstan, selalu menyinggung ....
a. sumbu-x saja
b. sumbu-y saja
c. sumbu-x dan sumbu-y
d. garis x = a dan garis x = a
e. garis y = 2a dan garis y = 2a
Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (2, 1) dan
melalui (4, 1) adalah ....
a. x2 + y2 6x 3y = 0
b. x2 + 2y2 3x 2y 3 = 0
c. x2 + y2 4x 2y 3 = 0
d. 2x2 + y2 2x 3y 1 = 0
e. 2x2 + y2 3x 2y + 1= 0

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

a. jari-jari r = 2 2
b. titik pusat lingkaran P(1,3)
c. lingkaran menyinggung sumbu-y
d. lingkaran menyinggung sumbu-x
e. lingkaran melalui titik (0,0)
14.

Supaya persamaan x2 + y2 + 4x + 6y c = 0
menyatakan suatu persamaan lingkaran maka c
harus memenuhi ....
a. c > 15
d. c > 13
b. c < 15
e. c < 13
c. c > 14

15.

Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran x2 + y2 2x


10y + 17 = 0 di titik (1, 2) adalah ....
a. x = 1
d. y = 2
b. x = 2
e. y = x
c. y = 1

32

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
16.

Jika garis g: x 2y = 5 memotong lingkaran x2 +


y2 4x + 8y + 10 = 0 di titik A dan B, luas segitiga
yang dibentuk oleh A, B, dan pusat lingkaran
adalah.....
a.

10

d. 5

e. 2

b. 2
c. 10
17.

1
2

Persamaan lingkaran dengan pusat (0, 0) dan jarijari 3 adalah .


a. x2 + y2 = 2
d. x2 + y2 = 16
2
2
b. x + y = 4
e. x2 y2 = 16
2
2
c. x + y = 9

22.

Persamaan lingkaran yang berpusat di (2, 3)


dengan jari-jari 7 adalah ..
a. x2 + y2 4x + 6y 49 = 0
b. x2 + y2 + 4x 6y 36 = 0
c. x2 + y2 + 4x 6y 49 = 0
d. x2 + y2 2x + 3y 49 = 0
e. x2 + y2 4x + 6y 36 = 0

23.

Jika lingkaran x2 + y2 4x 10y = 0 mempunyai


pusat (2, a), maka nilai a adalah .
a. 3
d. 5
b. 5
e. 10
c. 2

24.

Pusat dan jari-jari lingkaran dengan persamaan


9x2 +9y2 6x + 12y 4 = 0 berturut-turut adalah
.
a. (1, 2) dan 3
d. ( 1/3 , 1) dan 5
b. (1, 3) dan 2
e. ( 1/3 , 2/3 ) dan 1
c. ( 1/2 , 1/3 ) dan 3

25.

Persamaan lingkaran luar segitiga OAB dengan


O(0, 0), B(2, 4), dan C(1, 7) adalah .
a. x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y = 0
b. x2 + y2 6x 8y = 0
c. x2 + y2 + 6x 8y = 0
d. x2 + y2 3x 4y = 0
e. x2 + y2 6x + 8y = 0

26.

Jika titik P(p, 3) terletak pada lingkaran L: x2 + y2


13x + 5y + 6 = 0, maka nilai p adalah .
a. 3
d. 3 atau 10
b. 1
e. 3 atau 10
c. 3 atau 10

27.

Titik berikut yang terletak di luar lingkaran L: x2 +


y2 + 4x 8y 5 = 0 adalah .
a. (3, 0)
d. (1, 1)
b. (0, 7)
e. (4, 3)
c. (2, 1)

28.

Kedudukan garis x + 3y 5 = 0 terhadap lingkaran


L: x2 + y2 2x + 4y 5 = 0 adalah .
a. memotong lingkaran di dua titik
b. memotong lingkaran di satu titik
c. tidak memotong lingkaran
d. memotong lingkaran di tiga titik
e. tidak menyinggung lingkaran

Persamaan lingkaran pada gambar berikut adalah


....

a. x2 + y2 + 8x + 6y + 21 = 0
b. x2 + y2 + 8x + 6y 21 = 0
c. x2 + y2 + 8x 6y + 21 = 0
d. x2 + y2 8x + 6y + 21 = 0
e. x2 + y2 8x 6y + 21 = 0
18.

Diketahui lingkaran dengan persamaan x2 + y2+


Ax + By + C = 0. Lingkaran ini akan menyinggung
sumbu-x di titik (0,0) jika dipenuhi ....
a. A = 0 dan B = 1
b. A = 0 dan B = 0
c. A = 0 dan C = 0
d. A = 0 dan C = 1
e. A = 0 dan C = 1

19.

Persamaan lingkaran yang melalui titik-titik sudut


persegi ABCD berikut adalah ....

a. x2 + y2 2x y + 1 = 0
b. x2 + y2 2x + y + 1 = 0
c. x2 + y2 + 2x y 1 = 0
d. x2 + y2 2x + y + 1 = 0
e. x2 + y2 + 2x + y + 1 = 0
20.

21.

Supaya titik (1, 1) terletak pada lingkaran x2 + y2


px + 2y + 1 = 0, nilai p harus sama dengan ....
a. 1
d. 4
b. 2
e. 3
c. 3

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

33

Bab 4 Lingkaran
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
29.

Diketahui persamaan lingkaran x2 + y2 = 36. Jika


garis kutub titik P terhadap lingkaran ini
mempunyai persamaan 2x y 9 = 0 maka
koordinat titik P adalah .
a. (2, 1)
d. (8, 4)
b. (8, 4)
e. (8, 2)
c. (2, 1)

30.

Persamaan garis singgung berabsis 4 pada


lingkaran x2 + y2 = 25 adalah .
a. 4x + 3y = 9
d. 4x 3y = 25
b. 4x + 3y = 16
e. 3x 4y = 25
c. 4x + 3y = 25

31.

Jika titik A(2, 1) di dalam lingkaran (x + 4)2 +


(y p)2 = 13 maka nilai p adalah .
a. p > 4
d. 2 < p < 4
b. p < 2 atau p > 4
e. 4 < p < 2
c. p < 4 atau p > 2

32.

Persamaan garis singgung dengan gradien 3 pada


lingkaran x2 + y2 = 18 adalah .

5
b. y = 3x 6 2
c. y = 3x 6 5
a. y= 3x 6

d. y = 3x 2 2
e. y = 3x 2

33.

Persamaan garis singgung pada lingkaran L : x2 +


y2 + 6x 2y = 0 yang sejajar dengan garis 4x 3y
+ 7 = 0 adalah .
a. 4x 3y + 15 10 = 0
b. 3x 4y + 15 10 = 0
c. 4x + 3y + 15 10 = 0
d. 3x + 4y 15 10 = 0
e. 3x + 4y + 15 10 = 0

34.

Persamaan lingkaran yang berpusat di (1, 4) dan


menyinggung garis 3x 4y 2 = 0 adalah .
a. x2 + y2 + 4x 3y 47 = 0
b. x2 + y2 2x 8y = 0
c. x2 + y2 2x 8y + 8 = 0
d. x2 + y2 + 2x + 8y + 8 = 0
e. x2 + y2 + 3x 8y + 2 = 0

35.

Persamaan garis singgung lingkaran L: x2 6x +


y2 + 8y = 0 yang tegak lurus pada garis x + y = 1
adalah ..

2
2
c. y = x + 7 5 2
d. y = x 7 5 2
e. y = x + 1 5 2
a. y = x 1 5

b. y = x + 7 5

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

34

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SUKU BANYAK

Suku banyak adalah suatu bentuk yang memuat variabel berpangkat. Suku banyak dalam x berderajat
n dinyatakan dengan :
anxn + an 1xn 1 + an 2xn 2 + + a1x + a0
Dengan syarat: n bilangan cacah dan an, an 1, , a0 disebut koefisien-koefisien suku banyak, a0
disebut suku tetap dan an 0.
Suku banyak dengan derajat n dapat dinyatakan sebagai suatu fungsi f(x), yang nilainya dapat
dilakukan dengan dua cara yaitu :
Cara subtitusi
Misalkan suku banyak f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d. Jika nilai x diganti k, maka nilai suku banyak f(x)
untuk x = k adalah f(k) = ak3 + bk2 + ck + d.
Cara Horner/bangun/skema/sintetik
Misalkan suku banyak f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d. Jika akan ditentukan nilai suku banyak x = k, maka:
f(x) = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d
f(x) = (ax2 + bx + c)x + d
f(x) = ((ax + b)x + c)x + d
Sehingga
f(k) = ((ak + b)k + c)k + d.
Bentuk tersebut dapat disajikan dalam bentuk skema berikut ini.

Hasil Bagi dan Sisa Pembagian Suku Banyak


Jika suku banyak f(x) berderajat n dibagi oleh fungsi berderajat satu akan menghasilkan hasil bagi
berderajat (n 1) dan sisa pembagian berbentuk konstanta.
Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x k) menghasilkan h(x) sebagai hasil bagi dan f(k) sebagai sisa pembagian,
sedemikian sehingga f(x) = (x k) h(x) + f(k).
h (x )
b
Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (ax + b) menghasilkan
sebagai hasil bagi dan f ( - ) sebagai sisa
a
a
pembagian, sehingga f(x) = (ax + b)

h (x )
b
+ f (- )
a
a

Pembagian suku banyak dengan ax2 + bx + c, di mana a 0 dapat dilakukan dengan cara biasa apabila
ax2 + bx + c tidak dapat difaktorkan, sedangkan jika ax2 + bx + c dapat difaktorkan dapat dilakukan
dengan cara Horner.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

35

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Teorema Sisa
Teorema Sisa 1
Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x k), maka sisa pembagiannya adalah f(k).
Teorema Sisa 2
Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (ax + b), maka sisa pembagiannya adalah f ( b )
Teorema Sisa 3
Jika suatu suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x a)(x b), maka sisanya adalah px + q di mana f(a) = pa + q dan
f(b) = pb + q.
Teorema Faktor
Jika f(x) suatu suku banyak, maka (x k) merupakan faktor dari f(x) jika dan hanya jika f(x) = 0.
Akar Rasional
Jika diketahui suatu suku banyak f(x) dan (x a) adalah faktor dari f(x), maka a adalah akar dari
persamaan f(x) atau f(a) = 0.
Sifat-Sifat Akar Persamaan Suku Banyak
a.
Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Dua: ax2 + bx + c = 0
Jika x1 dan x2 adalah akar-akar persamaan kuadrat ax2 + bx + c = 0, maka:
b
1) x1 + x2 =
a
c
2) x1. x2 =
a
b.

Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Tiga: ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0


Jika x1, x2, dan x3 adalah akar-akar persamaan ax3 + bx2 + cx + d = 0, maka:
b
1) x1 + x2 + x3 =
a
c
2) x1. x2 + x2 . x3 + x1 . x3 =
a
d
3) x1 . x2 . x3 =
a

c.

Untuk Suku Banyak Berderajat Empat: ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0


Jika x1, x2, x3, dan x4 adalah akar-akar persamaan suku banyak ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e = 0,
maka:
b
1) x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 =
a
c
2) x1 . x2 . x3 + x2 . x3 . x4 + x3 . x4 . x1 + x4 . x1 . x2 =
a
d
3) x1 . x2 + x1 . x3 + x1 . x4 + x2 . x3 + x2 . x4 + x3. x4 =
a
e
4) x1 . x2 . x3 . x4 =
a

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

36

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Konsep
1.

Tentukan f(x) + g(x), f(x) g(x) dan f(x) g(x)


untuk soal-soal berikut.
a. f(x) = 5x3 + 2x 4 dan g(x) = 3x4 4x 7
b. f(x) = 6x4 2x3 + x + 5 dan g(x) = 3x4 + 5x3 +
2x2 8
c. f(x) = (2x 1)3 dan g(x) = (5x + 2)2
d. f(x) = (3x + 2)3 dan g(x) = (x 2) (x + 2)2
e. f(x) = (5 3x)3 dan g(x) = (x2 2x) (x2 + 2x)

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
2.

Hitunglah nilai suku banyak P(x) menggunakan


substitusi untuk soal-soal berikut ini.
a. P(x) = 5x5 3x3 x + 15 untuk x = 2
b. P(x) = 2x5 x4 + 3x2 2x + 10 untuk x = 2
c. P(x) = 3x7 5x4 2x3 + 3x 5 untuk x = 1
d. P(x) = 2x5 3x4 + 2x3 3x + 5 = untuk x = -

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
3.
Carilah bilangan p dan q agar (px3 5x2 22x + q)
habis dibagi oleh x2 4x 5 dengan menggunakan
cara Horner dan cara pembagian biasa.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

4.

Buktikan bahwa
a. p2n q2n habis dibagi oleh p + q
b. p2n + 1+ q2n + 1 habis dibagi oleh p + q.
Dalam hal ini n bilangan bulat positif.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Sebuah kotak terbuka akan dibuat dari selembar
5.
karton. Karton tersebut berbentuk persegipanjang
dan berukuran 6 5 inci (inci = 2,54 cm). Cara
membuat kotak ini adalah dengan memotong
sebuah persegi dari setiap sudutnya. Jika volume
kotak 14 inci3, berapa inci2 persegi yang harus
dipotong?

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
6.
Diketahui f(x) = (x + 1)(x 2)(x + 3).
Tentukanlah:
a. derajat sukunya,
b. koefisien-koefisien variabel,
c. suku tetapnya.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

37

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
7.

Tentukan nilai suku banyak x4 2x3 + x2 1 untuk


x = 1.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Tentukan hasil bagi dan sisa hasil bagi, jika suku
8.
banyak x3 3x2 + x 3 dibagi (x + 1) dengan cara
Horner.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
9.
Tentukanlah hasil bagi dari (2x3 x2 + 3x 9)
dibagi (2x + 1).
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
10. Tentukanlah nilai p jika f(x) = 2x3 + 5x2 4x + p
habis dibagi (x + 1).
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
11. Carilah sisanya, jika 2x4 3x2 x + 2 dibagi x2 x
2.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
12. Jika f(x) dibagi (x 1) sisanya 3 dan dibagi (x 2)
sisanya 4, maka tentukan sisanya jika f(x) dibagi
x2 3x + 2.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
13. Tentukanlah nilai p supaya (x + 1) faktor dari x4
5x3 + 2px2 + x + 1.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
14. Salah satu akar persamaan: 2x3 + 7x2 + bx 10 = 0
adalah 2. Tentukanlah:
a. nilai b,
b. akar-akar yang lain.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
15. Suku banyak f(x) = 2x5 + ax4 + 2x3 + x2 x 1
habis dibagi (x 1). Jika f(x) dibagi x2 x 2,
tentukan sisanya.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

38

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

Jika x3 12x + ka habis dibagi dengan (x 2)


maka ia juga habis dibagi dengan ....
a. (x 1)
b. (x + 1)
c. (x + 2)
d. (x 3)
e. (x + 4)

8.

Suku banyak f(x) habis dibagi oleh (x 1). Sisa


pembagian f(x) oleh (x 1)(x + 1) adalah ....
a. f(1)(1 x)
b. f(1)(1 + x)
c. f(1)(1 x)
d. f(1)(1 + x)
e. f(1)(1 + x)

2.

Hasil bagi dan sisa pembagian dari suku banyak


4x3 2x2+ x 1 dibagi oleh 2x2+ x+ 1 berturutturut adalah ....
a. (2x 2) dan (x + 1)
b. (2x + 2) dan (x 1)
c. (2x + 2) dan (x + 1)
d. (x + 2) dan (2x 1)
e. (x 2) dan (2x + 1)

9.

Diketahui f(x) = px3 + (2p 1) x2 2px + 3 dan


g(x) = 2px3 3px2 (p + 4)x p. Jika sisa
pembagian f(x) oleh (x + 1) sama dengan sisa
pembagian g(x) oleh (2x 1) maka nilai p adalah
....
a. 2/5
d. 4/5
b. 2/5
e. 3/5
c. 4/5

3.

Suku banyak f(x) dibagi oleh (x 3) bersisa 5 dan


dibagi oleh (x + 4) bersisa 23. Sisa dari
pembagian f(x) oleh (x 3) (x + 4) adalah ....
a. 3x 4
b. 4x + 17
c. 3x + 14
d. 5x 10
e. 4x 7

10.

Jika f(x) = 4x4 x3 x2 + x dibagi dengan (2x

4.

Jika f(x) = x3 x + 2 dan g(x) = 2x2 + x 1 maka


f(x) g(x) adalah ....
a. 2x5 + x4 + 3x3 3x2 + 3x 2
b. 2x5 + x4 3x3 + 3x2 + 3x 2
c. 2x5 + x4 3x3 3x2 + 3x + 2
d. 2x5 x4 3x3 + 3x2 3x + 2
e. 2x5 x4 + 3x3 3x2 + 3x 2

5.

Diketahui suku banyak 4x4 12x3 + 13x2 8x + a


dan 6x2 11x + 4. Jika suku banyak itu
mempunyai satu faktor yang sama maka bilangan
bulat a adalah...
d. 1
a. 2
b. 1
e. 2
c. 0

6.

Persamaan 2x3 + 3x2 + px + 8 = 0 mempunyai


sepasang akar yang berkebalikan. Nilai p = ....
a. 18
d. 6
b. 6
e. 18
c. 3

7.

Diketahui persamaan

+ 2 ) sisanya adalah ....


a.
b. 1
c.

d.
e. 2

11.

Suku banyak f(x) = x3 2x2 + px + 6 habis dibagi


(x 1). Jika dibagi dengan (x + 3)(x + 1) sisanya
adalah ....
a. 16x + 24
b. 16x 24
c. 24x + 16
d. 24x 16
e. 24x + 16

12.

Suatu suku banyak P(x) dibagi oleh (x2 1)


sisanya (12x 23) dan jika dibagi oleh (x 2)
sisanya 1. Sisa pembagian suku banyak P(x) oleh
(x2 3x + 2) adalah ....
a. 12x + 23
b. 12x 23
c. 23x + 12
d. 23x 12
e. 23x + 12

13.

Sisa bagi dari (4x4 + 3x3 x + 4) : (x2 + x 2)


adalah ....
a. 12x + 22
b. 12x 22
c. 12x + 22
d. 12x 22
e. 22x 12

Nilai A dan B berturut-turut adalah ....


a. 2 dan 3
b. 2 dan 3
c. 3 dan 2
d. 3 dan 2
e. 3 dan 2
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

39

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

Diketahui suku banyak f (x) = x3+ax2 + bx 6. Jika


suku banyak ini habis dibagi oleh (x 3) dan (x
2), maka sisa pembagian f (x) oleh x2 + 5x + 6
adalah ....
a. 60(x + 1)
b. 60(x + 1)
c. 60(x 1)
d. 60(x 1)
e. 60(1 x)
Diketahui P(x) = x3 + 3x2 + px + q. Jika P(x)
dibagi (x2 + 2x 3) sisanya 7x + 3, maka nilai p
dan q berturut-turut adalah ....
d. 6 dan 0
a. 3 dan 2
b. 3 dan 2
e. 6 dan 0
c. 2 dan 3
Jika suku banyak x4 3x2 + ax + b dibagi oleh x2
3x 4, akan memberikan sisa 2x + 5. Nilai a dan b
adalah ....
a. a = 35 dan b = 40
b. a = 35 dan b = 40
c. a = 35 dan b = 40
d. a = 40 dan b = 35
e. a = 40 dan b = 35
Banyak akar real dari persamaan x4 x 3x2 + 4x
4 = 0 adalah ....
a. 4
d. 1
e. 0
b. 3
c. 2
Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x + 2, sisanya adalah 3.
Jika f(x) dengan x2 4, sisanya adalah ....
a. x + 5
d. x + 2
e. x + 1
b. x + 4
c. x + 3
Jika f(x) dibagi oleh x 1 dan x + 1, sisanya
berturut-turut adalah 2 dan 3. Jika g(x) dibagi oleh
x 1 dan x + 1, sisanya berturut-turut adalah 1 dan
2. Jika f(x) = h(x) . g(x) dibagi oleh x2 1 maka
sisanya adalah ....
a. 4x + 2
d. 2x 4
e. 2x 4
b. 4x 2
c. 2x + 4
Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x 2, sisanya 24. Jika f(x)
dibagi dengan x + 5, sisanya 10. Jika f(x) dibagi
dengan x2 + 3x 10, sisanya adalah ....
d. 2x 20
a. x + 34
e. x + 14
b. x 34
c. 2x + 20
Nilai suku banyak 6x5 + 2x3 + 4x2 + 6 untuk x =
1 adalah ..
d. 4
a. 10
b. 2
e. 10
c. 2

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

22.

Jika nilai suku banyak 2x4 + mx3 8x + 3 untuk x


= 3 adalah 6, maka m adalah .
a. 5
d. 3
b. 3
e. 5
c. 2

23.

Suku banyak f(x) = x3 + 5x2 3x + 9 dibagi (x


2), maka hasil baginya adalah .
a. x2 7x + 11
b. x2 + 7x 11
c. 2x2 + 11x + 7
d. x2 + 7x + 11
e. 2x2 11x + 7

24.

Jika suku banyak f(x) = 5x4 3x3 7x2 + x 2


dibagi oleh (x2 2x + 3), maka sisanya adalah.
a. 22x 36
b. 22x + 36
c. 36x + 22
d. 22x + 36
e. 36x 22

25.

Jika f(x) = 2x3 7x2 + 11x 4 dibagi (2x 1),


maka sisanya adalah .
d. 0
a. 3
b. 2
e. 4
c. 1

26.

Jika x3 12x + k habis dibagi dengan (x 2),


maka bilangan tersebut juga habis dibagi dengan
.
d. x + 2
a. x + 1
b. x + 1
e. x + 4
c. x 3

27.

Jika suku banyak f(x) = 2x4 + ax3 3x2 + 5x + b


dibagi (x2 1) menghasilkan sisa (6x + 5) maka
nilai a. b = .
d. 3
a. 8
b. 6
e. 6
c. 1

28.

Jika (x + 1) merupakan salah satu faktor dari suku


banyak f(x) = 2x4 2x3 + px2 x 2, maka nilai p
adalah .
a. 3
d. 1
b. 2
e. 3
c. 1

29.

Suku banyak f(x) = 3x3 75x + 4 dibagi oleh (x +


k) dengan k > 0. Jika sisanya 4, maka nilai k
adalah ..
a. 5
d. 4
b. 0
e. 5
c. 3

40

Bab 5 Suku Banyak


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
30.

Jika suku banyak 2x2 x + 16 dibagi oleh (x a)


sisanya 12, maka nilai a adalah .
a. 2 atau 3
b. 3 atau 2
c. 2 atau 3/2
d. 2 atau 3/2
e. 2 atau 3

31.

Jika f(x) = 3x4 5x2 + kx + 12 habis dibagi dengan


(x + 2), maka nilai k adalah .
d. 40
a. 10
b. 20
e. 50
c. 30

32.

Jika f(x) dibagi dengan (x 2) sisanya 24,


sedangkan jika dibagi dengan (x + 5) sisanya 10.
Jika f(x) dibagi dengan x3 + 3x 10 sisanya adalah
..
a. x + 34
b. x 34
c. 2x 20
d. 2x + 20
e. x + 14

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

33.

Jika suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x 1) sisa 5 dan jika


dibagi dengan (x + 3) sisanya 7. Jika suku banyak
tersebut dibagi dengan (x2 + 2x 3), maka sisanya
..
a. x 5
b. x + 5
c. x + 4
d. x + 4
e. x + 5

34.

Suku banyak f(x) dibagi (x + 4) sisanya 11,


sedangkan jika dibagi (x 2) sisanya 1. Jika f(x)
dibagi (x 2)(x + 4) sisanya adalah .
d. 2x 3
a. 2x 3
b. 2x + 3
e. 3x + 2
c. 2x + 3

35.

Sebuah akar persamaan x3 + ax2 + ax + 1 = 0


adalah 2. Jumlah akar-akar persamaan itu
adalah..
a. 3
d. 2/3
b. 2
e. 3/2
c. 3/2

41

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
FUNGSI KOMPOSISI DAN FUNGSI INVERS
MATERI
Relasi adalah suatu aturan yang memasangkan anggota himpunan satu ke himpunan lain. Suatu relasi dari himpunan A ke
himpunan B adalah pemasangan atau perkawanan atau korespondensi dari anggota-anggota himpunan A ke anggotaanggota himpunan B.
Suatu relasi dari himpunan A ke himpunan B disebut fungsi dari A ke B jika setiap anggota A dipasangkan dengan tepat satu
anggota B.
Macam-Macam Fungsi
1) Fungsi konstan (fungsi tetap)
Suatu fungsi f : A B ditentukan dengan rumus f(x) disebut fungsi konstan apabila untuk setiap anggota domain
fungsi selalu berlaku f(x) = C, di mana C bilangan konstan.
2) Fungsi Linear
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi linear apabila fungsi itu ditentukan oleh f(x) = ax + b, di mana a 0, a dan b bilangan
konstan dan grafiknya berupa garis lurus.
3) Fungsi kuadrat
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi kuadrat apabila fungsi itu ditentukan oleh f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, di mana a 0 dan a, b,
dan c bilangan konstan dan grafiknya berupa parabola.
4) Fungsi identitas
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi identitas apabila setiap anggota domain fungsi berlaku f(x) = x atau setiap anggota
domain fungsi dipetakan pada dirinya sendiri.
5) Fungsi tangga (bertingkat)
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi tangga apabila grafik fungsi f(x) berbentuk interval-interval yang sejajar.
6) Fungsi modulus
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi modulus (mutlak) apabila fungsi ini memetakan setiap bilangan real pada domain
fungsi ke unsur harga mutlaknya.
7) Fungsi ganjil dan fungsi genap
Suatu fungsi f(x) disebut fungsi ganjil apabila berlaku f(x) = f(x) dan disebut fungsi genap apabila berlaku f(x) =
f(x). Jika f(x) f(x) maka fungsi ini tidak genap dan tidak ganjil.
Sifat Fungsi
1) Fungsi injektif (satu-satu)
Jika fungsi f : A B, setiap b B hanya mempunyai satu kawan saja di A, maka fungsi itu disebut fungsi satu-satu
atau injektif.

2)

Fungsi surjektif (onto)


Pada fungsi f : A B, setiap b B mempunyai kawan di A, maka f disebut fungsi surjektif atau onto.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

42

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
3)

Fungsi bijektif (korespondensi satu-satu)


Suatu fungsi yang bersifat injektif sekaligus surjektif disebut fungsi bijektif atau korespondensi satu-satu.

Aljabar Fungsi
(f + g)(x) = f(x) + g(x)
(f g)(x) = f(x) g(x)
(f .g)(x) = f(x).g(x)

f (x )
( x ) =
g (x )

Fungsi Komposisi
(g f)(x) = g(f(x))
(f g)(x) = f(g(x))
Bila f, g, dan h suatu fungsi, maka:
a. tidak berlaku sifat komutatif, yaitu f g g f;
b. jika I fungsi identitas berlaku : I f = f I = f;
c. berlaku sifat asosiatif, yaitu : f (g h) = (f g) h.
Fungsi Invers
Jika fungsi f = AB dinyatakan dengan pasangan terurut f = {(a, b) | a A dan b B} maka invers fungsi f adalah f-1 =
bA ditentukan oleh f-1 = {(b, a) | b B, dan a A}.
Untuk menentukan fungsi invers dari suatu fungsi dapat dilakukan dengan cara berikut ini.
a. Buatlah permisalan f(x) = y pada persamaan.
b. Persamaan tersebut disesuaikan dengan f(x) = y, sehingga ditemukan fungsi dalam y dan nyatakanlah x = f(y).
c. Gantilah y dengan x, sehingga f(y) = f 1(x).
Sifat Fungsi Invers
(g f)1(x) = (f 1 g 1)(x)
(f g)1(x) = (g 1 f 1)(x)

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

43

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Pemahaman Konsep
1.

Dari fungsi-fungsi berikut, tentukan f(2), f(1),


f(0), f(1), dan f(2). Kemudian, gambarkan
grafiknya. Jika daerah asalnya Df ={x|2 < x< 2,
x R}, tentukan daerah hasilnya.
a. f (x) = 3x 1
b. f (x) = 3 2x
c. f (x) = x 2
d. f (x) = 4 2x 2
e. f (x) = x2 3x+2
f. f (x) = x3 1

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
2.

Diketahui fungsi f (x) =

3x - 1
dan g (x) =
x2 +2

14 - 4 x . Tentukanlah:
a. (f + g) (2)
b.

f
(-3)
g

c. (f g) ( 2)
d. (f g) (10)
e. f 2(4)g(1)
f. g 2(7) : f (2)
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Tentukan f g h(x) dan h g f(x) dari fungsi3.
fungsi berikut ini.
a. f (x) = x 3, g(x) = 2x + 1, dan h(x) = x2 2
b. f (x) = 3x 1, g(x) = x2 + 1, dan
h(x) = x2 + 2x + 5
c. f (x) = x2 1, g(x) = x + 2, dan h(x) = x2 2
d.

f (x) =
h(x) =

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
4.

Jumlah mobil yang diproduksi suatu pabrik


selama 1 hari setelah t jam operasi adalah n(t) =
200t 10t2, 0 t < 10. Jika biaya produksi n
mobil (dalam dolar) adalah C(n) = 30.000 + 8.000
n, tentukan biaya C sebagai fungsi dari waktu.
Berapakah biaya memproduksi mobil selama 1
bulan?

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Dengan menggunakan sifat f 1 f (x) = x, tentukan
f 1 (x) untuk fungsi-fungsi berikut.
a. f (x) = 3x + 7
b. f (x) = (x + 2)2
c. f (x) = (x +2) (x 2)

5x 2
x 2 -2
x 2 -8
e. f (x) = 2
x +6
d. f (x) =

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

4 x - 8 , g(x) = x2, dan

x +1

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

44

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
9.
6.

Perhatikan relasi-relasi yang ditunjukkan dengan


diagram panah di bawah ini.

Tentukan fungsi invers dari fungsi di bawah ini.


a. f(x) = 3x + 10
b. f(x) = (x 3)2
c. f(x) = x2 4x + 4
d. f(x) =

a.
b.

Manakah yang merupakan fungsi?


Jika relasi merupakan fungsi, tentukanlah
domain, kodomain, dan rangenya.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
7.

Diketahui f(x) = x2 3x + 2 dan g(x) = x 1.


Tentukan:
a. (f + g)(x)
c. (f . g)(x)
b. (f g)(x)

f
d.
g

(x)

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
8.
Diketahui f : R R; g : R R dengan f(x) = 2x2
+ 1 dan g(x) = x + 2. Tentukan:
a. (g f)(x)
c. (g f)(1)
b. (f g)(x)
d. (f g)(2)
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

x -5
, x 1/6
6x + 1

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
10.

Diketahui f(x) = 2x 1 dan g(x) = 3x + 5.


Tentukan:
a. (f g)1 (x)
c. (f g)1 (1)
b. (g f)1 (x)
d. (g f)1 (2)

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

45

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

2.

Jika f(x) = x + 2 maka f(x2) + 3f(x) (f(x))2 sama


dengan ....
a. x + 4
d. x + 5
b. x + 4
e. x + 5
c. x + 2

x 2 + 1 dan
1
f g (x) =
x 2 - 4 x + 5 maka g(x 3)
x -2

8.

a. 4
b. 2
c. 0

4.

Jika f(x) = 3x2 2x maka f(x 2) 4f(2x 1) + f(2)


= ....
a. 45 x2 50x + 4
b. 45x2 + 50x 4
c. 45x2 + 50x + 4
d. 45x2 50x + 4
e. 45x2 + 50x + 4

5.

6.

Fungsi berikut ini yang dapat digolongkan ke


dalam fungsi satu-satu adalah ....
a. f(x) = k, k konstanta sebarang
b. f(x) = x + 9
c. f(x) = x2 9x
d. f(x) = x2 2x + 1
e. f(x) = x2 + 2x + 1
Jika f(x) = 2ax +

7.

Jika f(x + y) = f(x) + f(y), untuk semua bilangan


rasional x dan y serta f(1) = 10, maka f(2) adalah
....
a. 0
b. 5
c. 10
d. 20
e. tidak dapat ditentukan

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

d. 2
e. 4

Jika f(x) = 5 2x, g(x) = x2 25, dan h(x) =


g(f(x)) maka h1 (x) = ....

5
25
x+
2
4
5
25

b. 1 x +

2
4
a.

25
25
x+
4
4
25
5
1 x +
d.
4
4
c.

e.

25
25
x4
4

11.

Jika f = {(2, 4), (3, 5), (4, 1), (5, 2)


g = {(2, 3), (3, 3), (4, 2), (5, 4), (1, 1)}
maka f g = ....
a. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (4, 3), (5, 4)}
b. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (4, 3), (5, 5)}
c. {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 3), (5, 2)}
d. {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 4)}
e. {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 5)}

12.

Jika suatu fungsi ditentukan sebagai himpunan


pasangan berurut f = {(1, 3), (2, 5), (4, 2), (5, 0)}
maka f 1 = ....
a. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (2, 4), (5, 0)}
b. {(1, 3), (5, 2), (2, 4), (5, 0)}
c. {(1, 3), (2, 5), (2, 4), (5, 0)}
d. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (2, 4), (0, 5)}
e. {(3, 1), (5, 2), (4, 2), (5, 0)}

1
3
, g(x) = bx , dan C = 2a
2
x
x

+ b maka jumlah kedua fungsi tersebut adalah ....


a. ax
d. abx = 3/x
b. bx
e. ax = C
c. Cx

g(x)

10.

1
x2
1
e.
x +3

Jika h(x + 2) = x2 + 2x maka h(x) = ....


a. 2x + x2
d. x2 2x
2
b. 2x x
e. x2 2x
2
c. x + 2x

3- x
dan
3x - 5

Fungsi f: R R dengan f(x) = 4x + n


g: R R dengan g(x) = 3x 10
Jika f g (x) = g f(x) maka nilai n yang
memenuhi persamaan itu adalah ....
a. 15
d. 10
b. 10
e. 15
c. 5

d.

3.

9.

adalah ....

1
x -5
1
b.
x +1
1
c.
x -1

f(g(x))

x -1
maka nilai f(0) adalah ....
3x - 5

Jika f (x)=

a.

Diketahui

46

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
13.

Jika f = {(1, 3), (4, 5), (7, 2), (9, 4)}, g = {(1, 4),

18.

f
(6, 0), (7, 3), (9,12), (10, 6)}, dan h =
maka h
g

p
4
2p
b.
4
3p
c.
4

sama dengan ....

3
2
1
), (7, ), (9, )}
4
3
3
3
2
1
b. {(1, ), (7, - ), (9, )}
4
3
3
3
2
1
c. {(1,
), (7, - ), (9, - )}
4
3
3
3
2
1
d. {(1, - ), (7, ), (9, - )}
4
3
3
3
2
1
e. {(1, - ), (7,
), (9,
)}
4
3
3

15.

16.

17.

Fungsi berikut ini yang memiliki invers fungsi


adalah ....
a. y = x2 + 2x + 1
d. y = 5
b. y = x2 + 5x
e. y = 2x2 + 4x + 3
c. y = 2x + 3

20.

Jika f(x) = x + 1 dan g(x) =


(1) f f (x) = x + 2
(2) f g(x) =

Jika f (x) =

sx
rx
sx
b.
rx
sx
c.
rx
a.

+q
+p
-q
-p
+q
-p

px + q
, maka f 1 (x) = ....
rx + s
sx - q
d.
rx + p
sx - q
e.
p - rx

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

1
, x 0 maka
x

1
x +1

(3) f f 1(x) = x
(4) g f 1(x) = x
Pernyataan yang benar adalah ....
a. 1, 2, dan 3
d. 2, 3, dan 4
b. 1 dan 3
e. 1, 2, 3 dan 4
c. 2 dan 4
21.

Pernyataan-pernyataan berikut benar, kecuali ....


a. (f f 1)(x) = (f 1 f )(x)
b. (f 1 g1)(x) = (f g)1 (x)
c. jika f (x) = x + 1 maka f 1(x) = x 1
d. jika f (x) = 2x 1 maka f 1 (x) = (x + 1)
e. jika f (x) = x3 maka f 1 (x) = 3 x

d.

19.

Apabila g(x) = 3x + 1 dan g(f(x)) = 5x2 + x 3


maka f(x) = . . . .
a. 1/3 (x2 x 4)
b. 1/3 (x2 x + 4)
c. 1/3 (x2 x 2)
d. 1/3 (5x2 + x + 4)
e. 1/3 (5x2 + x 4)
Jika f(x) = 2x 3 dan g f(x) = 2x + 1 maka g(x) =
....
a. x 4
d. x 6
b. x + 4
e. 2x 1
c. 2x 3

p
8
3p
e.
8

a.

a. {(1,

14.

Diketahui f(x) = log x, g(x) = 2x , dan h(x) = sin


x, f g h(x) = 0, nilai x yang memenuhi adalah
....

22.

Jika f(x) = x dan g(x) = x2 + 1 maka (g f f)(x) =


....
a.

x -1

d.

x +1

b.

x +1

e.

x +1

c.

x +1

Diketahui f (x) = 2x + 5 dan g(x) =


Jika f g(a) = 5 maka a = ....
a. 2
d. 1
b. 1
e. 2
c. 0

x -1
x +4

23.

Fungsi berikut ini yang tidak memiliki fungsi


invers adalah ....
a. y = 5x2 + 7
d. y = 5log x
3
b. y = x + 4
e. y = 2x + 10
c. y = 10 150x

24.

Jika f ( x ) = 2x 3, dengan x R dan f 1 adalah


fungsi invers dari f (x) maka kedua kurva f (x) dan
f 1(x) akan berpotongan pada titik ....
a. (1, 3)
d. (3, 3)
b. (1, 3)
e. (3, 3)
c. (3, 3)

47

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
25.

26.

Jika f : x 52x maka f 1 adalah ....


a. 5log 2x
d. y = xm
5
b. log x
e. 2log 5x
c. 2x log 5
Invers dari y =
adalah ....

m
x
x
b. y =
m
a. y =

33.

maka (f g)(2) = .
a. 32
b. 38
c. 41
d. 43
e. 46

x
dengan m konstanta sebarang
m
d. y = x2

Jika diketahui f(x) = x2 2x + 1, maka f1(4)


adalah
a. 3
b. 1
c. 0
d. 1
e. 3

35.

Jika diketahui g(x) = x 1 dan (f g)(x) = 2x2 4x


+ 3, maka fungsi f(x) = .
a. x 2
d. x2 2x
b. x + 2
e. x2 + 2x
c. x2 + 2

36.

Jika f : R R dan g : R R dengan f(x) = x2 dan


g(x) = 3x + 1, maka f(g(2)) = .
a. 13
b. 25
c. 37
d. 49
e. 81

37.

Jika f(x) = x2 dan (f g)(x) = x2 2x + 1, maka g(3)


adalah .
a. 2
b. 4
c. 6
d. 7
e. 9

38.

Jika f(x) =

e. y = x + m

28.

29.

30.

Diketahui f = {(3, 1), (4, 2), (5, 3), (6, 8)} maka f
1
(3) adalah ....
a. 1
d. 6
b. 5
e. 8
c. 4
Jika f(x) = 8x dan g(x) = 3x2 + 4 maka f 1(g(x)) =
....
a. 8log (3x2 + 4)
d. 8log 3x2 + 4
8
2
b. log (3x 4)
e. log (3x2 + 4)
c. 8log 3x2 4
Diketahui f(x) = 15x dan h(x) = x3 + 4 untuk setiap
x bilangan real, x 0 maka f 1(h(x2) 4) = ....
a. 15log (x5 + 2)
d. 15log x6
15
5
b. log (x 4)
e. 15log x5
15
3
c. log (x + 4)

1
Jika y = f (x) = x + 3, z = f (y) = y+ 2, w = f
3
(z) = z + 1
maka fungsi komposisi dari x ke w adalah ....

1
(x + 42)
24
1
b.
(2x + 7)
24
1
(3x + 21)
c.
24
a.

31.

32.

1
(4x + 16)
24
1
e.
(6x + 18)
12
d.

Bila f(x) = 2x3 6x, maka f(x + 1) = .


a. x3 6x2 3
d. x3 + x 3
3
2
b. 2x 6x 4
e. x2 x 3
3
2
c. 2x 6x 4
Diketahui f(x) = 3x 6 dan g(x) = 2x + a. Bila (f
g)(x) = (g f)(x) maka a = .
a. 5
b. 1
c. 1
d. 5
e. 6

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

2x
,
x -3

34.

c. y = mx
27.

Bila f(x) = 3x2 2 dan g(x) =

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

x -1
x
x +1
x
x
x -1
x
x +1
1
x

x
maka f1(x) adalah .
x -1

48

Bab 6 Fungsi Komposisi


Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
39.

Misalkan f(x) = x + 2 untuk x > 0 dan g(x) = 15/x


untuk x > 0. Dengan demikian (f1g1)(x) = 1
untuk x = .
a. 1
b. 3
c. 5
d. 8
e. 10

40.

Jika f1(x) =

x -1
3- x
dan g1(x) =
,
5
2

maka (f g)1(6) = .
a. 1
b. 2
c. 6
d. 1/6
e. 1/10

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

49

Bab 7 Limit
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
LIMIT
Limit dapat didefinisikan sebagai berikut:

Untuk menyelesaikan lim f ( x ) , maka dapat dilakukan

lim f ( x ) = L

dengan cara yang lebih cepat dengan menggunakan


rumus sebagai berikut.
1. Jika f(a) = C, maka nilai lim f ( x ) = f(a) = C

x a

x a

artinya jika x mendekati a (tetapi x a ) maka f(x)


mendekati nilai L.
Sifat-Sifat Limit Fungsi
Apabila k suatu konstanta, f dan g merupakan fungsifungsi yang mempunyai limit untuk x a, a R maka
berlaku:
a. lim k = k
x a

b.

x a

2.
3.
4.

sederhanakan atau ubahlah lebih dahulu bentuk f(x)


hingga menjadi bentuk (1), (2), atau (3).

lim f ( x ) = f (a)
x a

c. lim k . f ( x ) = k . lim f ( x )
x a

C
C
, maka nilai lim f ( x ) =
=
x a
0
0
0
0
Jika f(a) =
=0
, maka nilai lim f ( x ) =
x

a
C
C
0
, maka nilai lim f ( x ) , maka
Jika f(a) =
x a
0
Jika f(a) =

Limit Fungsi Trigonometri

x a

d. lim{ f ( x ) g ( x )} = lim f ( x ) lim g ( x )


e. lim{ f ( x ).g ( x )} = lim f ( x ). lim g ( x )

x
ax
= 1 lim
=1
x 0 sin x
x 0 sin ax

f. lim ( f ( x ) ) = lim ( f ( x ) )

lim

sin x
sin ax
= 1 lim
=1
x

0
x
ax

lim

ax
x
=1
= 1 lim
x

0
tan ax
tan x

lim

tan ax
tan x
=1
= 1 lim

0
x
ax
x

x a

x a

x a

x a

x a

x a

lim

x a

x a

Limit fungsi yang berbentuk

x 0

lim
x a

f (x )
g (x )

dapat

diselesaikan dengan cara membagi bagian pembilang f(x)


dan bagian penyebut g(x) dengan xn, n adalah pangkat
tertinggi dari f(x) atau g(x) untuk setiap n bilangan
positip dan a bilangan real, maka :

lim

a
=0
xn

Nilai dari lim

1.

Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) lebih besar daripada


x

f (x )
=
g (x )

Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) sama dengan derajat


penyebut g(x), maka nilai lim

3.

x 0

f (x )
adalah sebagai berikut.
g (x )

derajat penyebut g(x), maka nilai lim


2.

x 0

f (x )
= real.
g (x )

Jika derajat dari pembilang f(x) lebih kecil daripada


derajat penyebut g(x), maka nilai lim

f (x )
= 0.
g (x )

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

50

Bab 7 Limit
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Pemahaman Konsep
1.

Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.

x + x +3
x 2 -5
x x +5
lim x
x 2 - 3

4.

Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.

a.
b.
c.

a.

lim

b.

lim x 2 + 3 x - x
x

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Hitunglah nilai limit berikut ini.
2.
a.
b.
c.

x -3
x 2 x 2 + 9
x 2 + x -5
lim 2
x 1 x - x + 4
3x + 2
lim
x -2 x + 2

lim

c.
d.

2 tan 3 y
sin 2 y
1 - cos y
lim
y 0
y2
cos 2 x
lim
x 45 cos x - sin x
1 + cos 2 x
lim
1
cos x
x p

lim
y 0

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Sebuah benda ditembakkan vertikal ke atas. Jika
persamaan gerak dari benda itu dinyatakan S = f(t)
= 5t2 + 40t maka kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu
dalam waktu tepat t1 detik dinyatakan oleh
V(t1) = lim

Dt 0

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
3.

Hitunglah limit lim


h 0

f (x + h ) - f (x )
untuk f(x)
h

berikut ini.
a. f(x) = 3x
b. f(x) = x2
c. f(x) = 2x2 3

f (t 1 + Dt ) - f (t 1 )
Dt

Hitunglah
a. kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu dalam waktu
tepat 2 detik, dan
b. kecepatan sesaat dari benda itu dalam waktu.
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

51

Bab 7 Limit
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

x 2 + 2x
= ....
x -2 x - 2
lim

a. 0
b.
c. 2
2.

d. 4
e.

x 1

a. 0

d. a + b

b.

e.

5.

x 0

f (2 + h ) - f (2)
adalah
h

6 - x + 11
2

lim
x 3

a. 0
b. 3
c. 6

= ....

x + 2x + 4

d. 7
e. 8

x2 -x -2
= ....
x -1 x 2 + 4 x + 3
lim

d.
e. 3/2

sin 3 x
= ....
x 0 tan 4 x

lim

d.
e. 4/3

1 - cos 3x
= ....
x 0
x2

lim

15.

a. 2
d. 1
b. 1
e. 2
c. 0
Jika lim f ( x ) = -3 dan lim g ( x ) = 4 maka

( x - 5)

6x - 5

lim

14.

lim (4 x - 3) - 16 x 2 - 3x + 7 adalah ....

x 5

d. 5/2
e. 7/2

a.
b. 4/3
c.

d. 12
e.

a. 12/11
b. -11/12
c. 22/8
8.

12.

13.

x 2 -9
= ....
lim
x 3 x - 3

lim

5x 2 - 1
= ....
x 3 2 x 2 - x + 5

lim

a. 3/2
b. 2/3
c.

a. 12/11
b. 11/12
c. 0
d. 11
e. 22/8
7.

d. 3
e. 2

a. 3
b. 4
c. 6

d. 3
e. 4

a. 3
b. 6
c. 9
6.

11.

a +b
2

Jika f(x) = 2x x2, lim


....
a. 1
b. 2
c. 2

x 2

x 2 - 8 x + 15
= ....
3- x

a. 2/5
b. 3/5
c. 1

d. 1
e. tidak ada

c. a b
4.

10.

lim x 2 + x (2a + 2b ) + 4ab - x adalah ....


x

lim
a. 6
b. 4
c. 5

x 10 - 1
adalah ....
x -1

lim
a. 1
b.
c. 0

3.

9.

x 2

x 2

3 f (x ) - 2x -1
= ....
lim
x 3
2g (x )
a. 1
b.
c. 1/2

adalah ....
d. 0
e. 11

( x - 5)( x + 3 )
adalah ....
x - 3
d. 12
e.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

16.

d.
e. 5/6

Diketahui f (x) =
jika x < 3
2x+1
3x
jika 3
maka lim f ( x ) = ....
x 1

a. 2
b. 1
c. 1

d. 2
e. 3

52

Bab 7 Limit
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
17.

sin 8 x
= ....
x 0
x

lim
a. 8
b. 4
c. 2

18.

d. 2
e. 4

lim
x 0

a. 2
b. 1
c. 0
19.

lim
x 0

sin x
= ....
x2

d.
e. 2

1 - cos x
= ....
x

a. 2
b. 1
c. 0
20.

d. 1
e. 2

Nilai lim
x 5

a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
21.

26.

Nilai lim

x 2

a. 3
b. 1
c. 0

x -4
adalah .
3- x
d. 1/3
e. 1/3

x 3

a. 6
b. 4
c. 4
27.

d. 2
e. 6

x 2 - x -6
adalah .
x +2

Nilai lim
x 2

a. 5
b. 2
c. 1
28.

29.

d. 5
e. 2

2x + 3
adalah .
x 2 x - 1

Nilai lim
a. 2
b. 1
c. 1

x 2 - 9 adalah .
d. 5
e. 6

x 2 -9
adalah .
x +3

Nilai lim

d. 0
e. 3

Nilai lim

x 8 3

a. 12
b. 10
c. 6
30.

d. 8
e. 4

Jika lim f ( x ) = 3 dan lim g ( x ) = -5, dan


x 0

x 0

lim h ( x ) =

1
2

adalah .
a.
b. 2
c. 8

d. 4
e. 16

x 0

22.

2x 2 - 2
Nilai lim
= .
x 1 x - 1
a. 0
b. 1
c. 2

23.

a. 2
b. 1
c. 0
24.

2x -1
adalah .
x x - 1

31.

d. 3/2
e. 2

6 - 4x 4
adalah .
x 2 + x 4

Nilai lim
a. 6
b. 4
c. 3

25.

d. 4
e. 6

Nilai lim

32.

x 2 + 2 x - x 2 + x adalah .

a. 3/2
b. 1/2
c.

d. 1
e. 3/2

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

x 2 -8

lim

(2 f ( x ) + g ( x ) )2

x 0

2g (x )

x 2 - 2x

d. 8
e.

Nilai lim
x 2

a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
33.

maka

= .
Nilai lim
+
x 2
2 x - 4
x -2
a. 3
b. 5
c. 9

d. 4
e. 6

Nilai lim

x -8
adalah .
x -2

3- x 2 +5

= .

d. 6
e. 7

Nilai lim
x 0

a. 2
b. 1
c. 0

4- x 2

4x
= .
1 + 2x - 1 - 2x
d. 1
e. 2

53

Bab 7 Limit
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA

34.

x - 2x - 1
= .
x -1

Nilai lim
x 1

a. 1
b.
c.
35.

3 sin 5 x
= .
x 0 sin 3 x

Nilai lim
a. 5/3
b. 5/2
c. 4

36.

d. 1
e. 0

d. 3
e. 5

1 - cos x
= .
x 0 x sin x

Nilai lim
a. 2/3
b. 1/2
c. 0

37.

d. 1/3
e. 1

Nilai lim
x 0

a. 1/4
b. 1/2
c. 3/2
38.

d. 1
e. 2

Nilai lim
x 0

a.
b. 1
c. 4
39.

1 - cos 2 x
= .
x2

d. 2
e. 6

Nilai lim

1
x p
2

a. 2
b. 1
c. 1

tan x - sin x
= .
x3

1 - sin x
= .....
1
x- p
2
d. 0
e. 2

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

54

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
TURUNAN FUNGSI DAN APLIKASINYA
Turunan fungsi f di x yang ditulis dengan notasi f (x)

f (x + h ) - f (x )
f (x) = lim
h 0
h
jika f(x) = axn, maka f (x) = anxn 1
Untuk u dan v masing-masing fungsi x, u' turunan dari u
dan v' turunan dari v dan k bilangan konstan maka
berlaku sebagai berikut.
y = u v, maka y' = u' v'
y = k u, maka y' = k u'
y = u v, maka y' = u'v + uv'
y=

u ' v - uv '
u
, maka y' =
v2
v

Turunan Fungsi Trigonometri


1. Jika y = sin x, maka y' = cos x
2. Jika y = cos x, maka y' = sin x
3. Jika y = tan x, maka y' = sec2 x
4. Jika y = cot x, maka y' = cosec2 x
5. Jika y = sin U, maka y' = U' cos U
6. Jika y = sinn U, maka y' = n sinn 1 U cos U'
7. Jika y = sec x, maka y' = sec x tan x
8. Jika y = cosec x, maka y' = cosec x cot x
Persamaan Garis Singgung pada Kurva
Persamaan garis singgung pada kurva di titik (x1, y1)
dengan gradien m di mana m = f (x) adalah :
y y1 = m(x x1)
Fungsi f(x) dikatakan naik jika f (x) > 0, dan fungsi f(x)
dikatakan turun jika f (x) < 0.
Fungsi f(x) dikatakan stasioner jika f (x) = 0

Dari suatu lintasan s = f(t), maka berlaku:

ds
dt
d 2 s dv
percepatan = a = 2 =
dt
dt

kecepatan = v =

Teorema L'Hopital
Penggunaan turunan untuk menghitung bentuk-bentuk
tak tentu limit fungsi dikenal sebagai Teorema L'Hopital.
Misal f(x) dan g(x) adalah fungsi-fungsi yang
diferensiabel.
Jika g 0 untuk setiap x a dan jika lim
x a

f (x )
g (x )

atau
pada x = a maka:
0

f ' (x )
f (x )
f ' (x )
lim
= lim
, dengan catatan lim
x a g ( x )
x a g ' ( x )
x a g ' ( x )

mempunyai bentuk

ada
Apabila lim
x a

f ' (x )
masih mempunyai bentuk tak tentu.
g ' (x )

Diteruskan dengan menggunakan turunan kedua

lim
x a

f ' (x )
f ' ' (x )
= ... dan seterusnya.
= lim
g ' ( x ) x a g ' ' ( x )

Sehingga diperoleh nilai limitnya.

Jenis titik stasioner ada 3 yaitu:


a. titik balik maksimum,
b. titik balik minimum, dan
c. titik belok horizontal.
Untuk menggambar grafik y = f(x) dapat dilakukan
dengan cara sebagai berikut.
a. Menentukan titik-titik potong grafik fungsi dengan
sumbu-sumbu koordinat.
b. Menentukan titik-titik stasioner dan jenisnya.
c. Menentukan titik-titik bantu (menentukan nilai y
untuk x besar positif dan untuk x besar negatif).
Turunan kedua dari suatu fungsi y = f(x) adalah turunan
dari turunan pertama dan diberi lambang:
y'' = f (x) =

d 2y d 2 f
= 2
dx 2
dx

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

55

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA

1.

Gunakan konsep limit untuk menentukan turunan


fungsi-fungsi berikut.
a. f(x) = sin 2x
b. f(x) = cos (13x)
c. f(x) = tan x
d. f(x) = 2x4 7
e. f(x) = 5x3 5x
f. f(x) = 2

x 2x

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
2.
Sebuah peluru ditembakkan vertikal ke atas
dengan kecepatan awal 10 m/detik. Kedudukan
peluru setelah t detik memenuhi persamaan h(t) =
60t 7t dengan h(t) adalah tinggi peluru yang
diukur dalam meter.
a. Tentukan kecepatan peluru pada saat 3,5 detik.
b. Kapan peluru berhenti?
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
3.

1
1

x x + x - . Buktikan
x
x

4
5x + 3

Diketahui f(x) =
bahwa f (x) =

2 x5

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
4.

a. f(x) = 5 + 8x 2x2
b. f(x) = 2x2 8x + 9
c. f(x) = 9 + 3x 4x2
d. f(x) = x3 18x2 + 10x 11
e. f(x) = 10 12x + 6x2 x3
f. f(x) = x4 24x2 + 10x 5
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
5.
Sebuah kotak tanpa tutup, alasnya berbentuk
persegi dengan sisi x cm, volumenya 32 cm3. Jika
kotak tersebut terbuat dari karton,
a. tunjukkan bahwa luas karton yang diperlukan
untuk membuat kotak itu L(x) = x2 +
b.

128
x

tentukan ukuran kotak agar karton yang


digunakan sesedikit mungkin.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
Tentukan turunan pertama dari fungsi berikut.
6.
a. y = (4x2 + 5x) (2x2 6x + 1)

4
1
- 4 (3x3 + 27)
2
x
x

b. y =

c. f(x) = (x2 + 8)12


d. f(x) =

x 2 - 2x + 3

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Tentukan interval yang membuat fungsi-fungsi


berikut merupakan fungsi naik atau fungsi turun.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

56

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
7.

Tentukan turunan pertama dari fungsi-fungsi


trigonometri berikut.
a. f(x) = cos (x2 + 1)
b. f(x) = 6 cosec x
c. f(x) =

cos x
1 + sin x

d. f(x) = x2 sec x

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
8.
Carilah persamaan garis singgung pada kurva y =
x2 5x + 7 yang tegak lurus garis x + 3y = 9.

10.

Suatu persegi panjang diketahui keliling = (2x +


24) cm dan lebar = (8 x) cm. Agar luasnya
maksimum, hitunglah panjang, lebar, dan luas
persegi panjang.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
9.

Tentukan bilangan cacah yang jumlahnya 16 agar


hasil kali salah satu dengan kuadrat bilangan
lainnya menjadi maksimum.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

57

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
SOAL
1.

5x
maka f '(2) = ....
1+ x

Jika f(x) =
a.
b. 5/6
c.

2.

1
sin x
. Nilai f(
p )
12
sin x + cos x

Diketahuif(x)=

b. 3x2

4.

(x

Turunan pertama fungsi f(x) = cos5 (4x 2) adalah


....
a. 5 cos4 (4x 2) sin (4x 2)
b. 5 cos4 (4x 2) sin (4x 2)
c. 20 cos4 (4x 2) sin (4x 2)
d. 10 cos3 (4x 2) sin (8x 2)
e. 10 cos3 (4x 2) sin (8x 2)
Pada daerah asal 0 < x < 2, grafik fungsi y = x3
2x2 + 1 bersifat ....
a. selalu naik
b. selalu turun
c. naik, lalu turun
d. turun, lalu naik
e. turun naik berulang-ulang

8.

-1

x 2 -1

(x

-1
3x + 1

c. x2 +

(x

d. x2

(x

e. 3x2

(x

Titik

7.

d. 3/2
e. 3

d 2
x
x - 2
= ....
dx
x -1
x 2 +1
2

a. 3x +

Turunan pertama f(x) = (2x 1) cos (3x + 1)


adalah ....
a. (2x 1) sin (3x + 1) + 2cos (3x + 1)
b. (2x 1) cos (3x + 1) 2 sin (3x + 1)
c. 2 sin(3x + 1) + 2(6x 3) cos (3x + 1)
d. 2 cos (3x + 1) + (2x 1) sin (3x + 1)
e. 2 cos(3x + 1) (6x 3) sin (3x + 1)

d. 7/9
e. 5/9

adalah ....
a. 1/3
b. 2/3
d. 1
3.

6.

9.

-1
3x - 1
2

-1
3x + 1
+1

d. 64
e. 80

balik

maksimum

kurva

10.

1 2
x - 2 x 2 + 3 x adalah ....
3

a. (3 , 36)
b. (1 , 5

d. (3 , 18)

1
)
3

Ditentukan f(x) =

e. (3 , 0)
b. 2x

2
dan f "(x) adalah turunan
1- x

kedua dari f(x). Nilai dari f "(2) adalah ....

3
25
5
b.
25
6
c.
29
a.

4
27
6
e.
27
d.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

c.
11.

Diketahui luas lingkaran merupakan fungsi dari


kelilingnya. Jika keliling sebuah lingkaran adalah
x, laju perubahan luas lingkaran terhadap
kelilingnya adalah ....
a. x

1
c. (1 , 1 )
3
5.

Luas semua sisi balok 96 cm2. Jika alasnya


berbentuk persegi, paling besar balok itu dapat
dibuat dengan volume ... cm3.
a. 0
b. 54
c. 64

x
p
2x
e.
p
d.

x
2p

Turunan pertama fungsi f(x) = cos3 (5 4x) adalah


....
a. 12 cos2 (5 4x) sin (5 4x)
b. 12 cos (5 4x) sin (5 4x)
c. 12 sin2 (5 4x) sin (5 4x)
d. 6 sin (5 4x) sin (10 8x)
e. 6 cos (5 4x) sin (10 8x)

58

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
12.

13.

14.

Nilai maksimum dari f(x) = x3 6x2 + 9x pada


interval 1 x 3 adalah ....
a. 16
d. 1
b. 4
e. 0
c. 3

17.

19.

p
) = ....
2

a. 2
b. 1
c. 0
d. 1
e. 2

Nilai maksimum dari f(x) = 2x3 6x2 48x dalam


interval 3 < x < 4 adalah ....
a. 160
d. 99
b. 155
e. 11
c. 131

Jika diketahui f(x) = 3x3 2x2 5x + 8, nilai dari f


(2) adalah .
a. 13
d. 33
b. 21
e. 49
c. 23

22.

Turunan dari f(x) =

Turunan pertama dari f(x) =

( x + 2)
(1 - 3x )2

untuk x =

d. 0,024
e. 0,24

Turunan dari y = (1 x)2 (2x + 3) adalah ....


a. (1 x) (3x + 2)
b. (x 1) (3x + 2)
c. 2(1 + x) (3x + 2)
d. 2(x 1) (3x + 2)
e. 2(1 x) (3x + 2)
f(x)

1 3
x - 3 x 2 + 5 x - 10
3

turun

dalam

Kurva y = x3 6x2 + 9x + 1 turun pada interval ....


a. x 1 atau x 3
b. 2 x 1 atau 3 x 6
c. 1 < x < 3
d. 1 x 3
e. 1 x 1
Nilai minimum relatif f(x) =
adalah ....
a. 5
b. 2

-3
x x
-3
b.
2x x
-3
c.
4x x
a.

interval ....
a. 5 < x < 1
b. x < 1
c. x < 1
d. 1 < x < 5
e. x < 1 atau x > 5
18.

'(

sin x + cos x
dan sin x 0 maka f
sin x

21.

3 adalah ....
a. 0,000024
b. 0,00024
c. 0,0024
16.

Jika f(x) =

f(x) = x3 4x2 + 4x + 6 naik pada interval ....


a. 2 < x < 2/3
b. 2/3 < x < 2
c. x < 2 atau x > 2/3
d. x < 2/3 atau x > 2
e. x < 2/3 atau x > 2

15.

20.

c. 1/3
d. 1/3
e. 4

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

adalah f (x) = .

2 x
d.

x x
6
e.
x x

23.

Diketahui fungsi h(x) = x2 + 3x, maka h(i + t)


h(t) adalah .
a. 2i + 3
d. t2 + 3t
b. 2t + 4
e. t2 + 5t
c. 5t2

24.

Rumus untuk f (x) jika f(x) = x x2 adalah .


a. 1 x
d. x2 x3
b. 1 2x
e. x 2x2
3
c. 1 2x

25.

Fungsi f(x) = x3 6x2 + 9x + 2 turun untuk .


a. 2 < x < 6
d. 0 < x < 2
b. 1 < x < 4
e. 1 < x < 2
e. 1 < x < 3

26.

Grafik dari f(x) = x3 x2 12x + 10 naik untuk


interval .
a. 3 < x < 2
b. x < 2 atau x > 3
c. 2 < x < 3
d. x < 3 atau x > 2
e. x < 2 atau x > 3

27.

Grafik fungsi f(x) = x (6 x)2 akan naik dalam


interval .
a. x < 0 atau x > 6 d. x > 6
b. 0 < x < 6
e. x < 6
c. x < 2 atau x > 6

1 2
x - x 2 - 3x + 4
3

2
3

59

Bab 8 Turunan
Matematika Kelas 11 SMA
28.

Fungsi f yang dirumuskan dengan f(x) = x3 6x2 +


9x + 2 turun pada interval .
a. 1 < x < 2
d. 1 < x < 0
b. 2 < x < 1
e. 1 < x < 4
c. 1 < x < 3

29.

Titik-titik stasioner dari kurva y = x3 3x2 9x +


10 adalah .
a. (1, 15) dan (3, 17)
b. (1, 1) dan (3, 17)
c. (1, 15) dan (3, 17)
d. (3, 17) dan (2, 8)
e. (1, 1) dan (3, 17)

36.

Fungsi f(x) yang ditentukan oleh f(x) = (x3 1)2


dalam interval 1 < x < 1 mempunyai nilai
minimum dan maksimum berturut-turut adalah .
a. 4 dan 0
d. 0 dan 2
b. 1 dan 2
e. 0 dan 4
c. 2 dan 4

37.

Fungsi f(x) yang ditentukan oleh f(x) = x3 + ax2 +


9x 8 mempunyai nilai stasioner untuk x = 1.
Nilai a adalah .
a. 6
d. 2
b. 4
e. 4
c. 2

30.

Persamaan garis singgung kurva y = x2 4x di


titik yang absisnya 1 adalah .
a. x y 2 = 0
d. x + 2y + 1 = 0
b. x + y + 2 = 0
e. 2x 2y + 1 = 0
c. 2x + y + 1 = 0

38.

Nilai maksimum dari y = x3 3x + 2, pada interval


2 < x < 2 adalah .
a. 6
d. 3
b. 5
e. 2
c. 4

31.

Persamaan garis singgung kurva y = x2 4 yang


tegak lurus garis x 2y + 4 = 0 adalah .
a. 2x + y + 5 = 0
d. x + y + 2 = 0
b. x + 2y + 5 = 0 e. 2x y 5 = 0
c. x 2y 5 = 0

39.

Jumlah dua bilangan x dan y adalah 96. Jika x3y


maksimum maka nilai x adalah .
a. 30
d. 20
b. 25
e. 15
c. 24

32.

Turunan dari f(x) = 2 sin 5x adalah f (x) = .


a. 2 cos 5x
d. 5 cos 5x
b. 10 cos 5x
e. 2 cos 5x
c. 10 cos 5x

40.

33.

Jika f(x) = sin2 x, maka nilai x yang memenuhi f


(x) = adalah .
a.
d. /6
b. /3
e. /12
c. /4

Diketahui keliling suatu persegi panjang (2x + 20)


cm dan lebarnya (8 x) cm. Agar luas persegi
panjang maksimum maka panjangnya adalah .
a. 3 cm
c. 4 cm
b. 3 cm
d. 9 cm
c. 10 cm

34.

Jika f(x) = 2 sin x + cos x, maka f (/2 ) = .


a. 1
d. 2
b. 2
e. 0
c. 1

35.

Jika y = cos 3/x, maka dy/dx = .


a. 3 sin

3
x

2
3
sin
3
x
3
3
c. 2 sin
x
x
b.

3
3
sin
2
x
x
2
3
e. sin
3
x
d.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

60

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

UNIT 1
SPEAKING
In your everyday life you often find people requesting
many things from you. You might agree or refuse other
peoples requests. Therefore, you should know how to
grant requests. Do you know how to do it very well?
Granting Request
In the dialogue between Ayu and Palupi you find the
following expressions:
Ayu
: Will you tell me about it?
: Sure, I will.
Palupi
Ayu
: Lets try to make lepat sometimes.
Palupi
: OK.
Sure, I will and OK are expressions to grant
a request.
Here are other expressions that you can use:
Alright.
Certainly.
Right away.
Of course.
Asking for opinion
What do you think of ?
What are your views?
What is your opinion?
Is it right what Ive done?
What about ?
How about
Giving opinion
Im convinced that .
I reckon .
I consider that ....
According to the expert, I .
In my opinion, .
I think .
Expressing satisfaction
Im satisfied with .
Im satisfied at .
Im glad with what youve done.
Its really satisfying.
Everything was satisfying.
Expression dissatisfaction
Im not satisfied with .
It isnt very nice.
Its really not good enough.
Im dissatisfied by .
Its dissatisfying.
Less Formal
Oh no.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Task
With a partner make dialogues based on the following
situations. Use the expressions you have learnt.
You are embarrassed to tell your problem to your
1.
parents. On the other hand, your friend has got a
good experience with the same problem.
2.
Your friend achieved or gained what he/she had
done well before, but you didn't although you had
done as well as he/she did.
Task
Complete the following dialogues with appropriate
expressions and act them out.
Dialogue 1
Mrs Naning and her husband are talking about their son,
Budi in the living room.
Mrs Naning : Budi's teacher told me that Budi had
been absent for 3 days without
information 1 ? Frankly, I am
embarrassed and confused.
: 2 we should ask him then.
Husband
Mrs Naning : Yeah. I am with you. But don't be
angry with him. Just ask him and why
he didn't go to school for 3 days and
where he went.
: Okay then.
Husband
Dialogue 2
Mrs Vira Kolopaking, an English teacher is happy when
her students passed the national examination. The
principal invited her to his office congratulate on her.
Principal
: Good morning, Mrs Vira. Please have
a seat.
Mrs Vira
: Good morning, Sir. Thank you.
: I actually want to say
Principal
"Congratulations" for your serious
effort. Our students got satisfying
marks in English.
: Thank you. Err I am really 3 with
Mrs Vira
what they have done. They answered
40 questions well. So that none failed
in their English exams. What about
another subject?
: Mm.... Five students failed on their
Principal
mathematics test. I am worried. Their
parents will express 4 because of their
children's failure. Probably they will
not trust our school anymore. But
according to the mathematics teacher,
the students never followed the
enrichment programmed at school
seriously. They were often absent.

61

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Mrs Vira

: I think that is the risk. They 5 with

what they have done.


UNIT 2
Reading

A report usually talks about something concrete or which


can be observed such as animals, plants, planets, and
natural disasters.
Report
The social purpose of information reports is presenting
information about something. They generally describe an
entire class of things, whether natural or made:
mammals, the planets, rocks, plants, computers,
countries of origin, transportation, and so on.
Schematic structure :
General classification (general information)
Description
(how they look, where they live, what they eat, how they
move, reproduce)
The common grammatical patterns of an information
report include:
use of general nouns, eg hunting dogs, rather than
particular nouns, eg our dog;
use of relating verbs to describe features, eg
Molecules are tiny particles;
some use of action verbs when describing behavior,
eg Emus cannot fly;
use of timeless present tense to indicate usualness,
eg Tropical cyclones always begin over the sea;
use of technical terms, eg Isobars are lines drawn on
a weather map;
use of paragraphs with topic sentences to organize
bundles of information; repeated naming of the topic
as the beginning focus of the clause.
Text
Mangrove
A mangrove is a tropical marine tree.
Mangroves have special aerial roots and salt-filtering tap
roots which enable them to thrive in brackish water.
Brackish water is salty but not as salty as sea water.
Mangrove trees are commonly planted and found in
coastal areas. Mangroves can serve as walls of protection
for natural disaster in coastal area like tsunami.
According to BBC News, healthy mangrove forests had
helped save lives in the Asia disaster tsunami and people
tended to respect these natural barriers even more,
especially after the tsunami.
There are several species of mangrove tree
found all over the world. Some prefer more salinity,
while others like to be very-close to a large fresh water
source such as river. Some prefer areas that are sheltered
from waves. Some species have their roots covered with
sea water every day during high tide. Other species grow
on dry land but are still part of the ecosystem. The Times
of India reported that rare species of mangrove had been
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

found and was also known as the looking-glass tree,


probably because the leaves are silver-coated.
Mangroves need to keep their trunk and leave
above the surface of the water. Yet they also need to be
firmly attached to the ground so they are not moved by
waves.
Any part of root that appears above the water
flows oxygen to the plant under water surface. as the soil
begin to build up, these roots procedure additional roots
that become embedded in the soil.
Questions!
1. what is the text above!
2. what is the main idea in 1 paragraph!
3. where did we get mangrove tree?
4. how was the condition to plant the mangrove tree?
5. write the Indonesian word :
a. coastal area
b. sheltered
c. probably
d. appear
e. embedded
An Elephant
An elephant is the largest and strongest of all
animals. It is a strange looking animal which it has thick
legs, huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small
tail, little eyes, long white tusks and above all, elephant
has a long nose, the trunk. An elephant is commonly
seen in a zoo, it has hard found in it natural habitat.
The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature. This
trunk has various usages. The elephant draws up water
by its trunk and can squirt the water all over its body like
a shower bath. The elephant's trunk also lifts leaves and
put them into its mouth. In fact, the trunk serves the
elephant as long arm and hand. An elephant looks very
clumsy and heavy and yet an elephant can move very
quickly.
The elephant is very intelligent animal. Its
intelligence combined with its great strength makes an
elephant a very useful servant to man. Elephant can be
trained to serve in various ways such as carry heavy
loads, hunt for tigers and even fight. An elephant is
really a smart animal.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. What is elephant have?
3. Mention the great strength of elephant when helps
the man
4. What tenses use in the text above
5. What is the purpose of the text above?

62

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

Human body energy


Human body is actually a living machine and is
like all other machines. This living machine needs fuel to
supply it with energy. The fuel is provided by the food
which we eat. However do we know how much we need
to stay healthy?
The energy value of food is usually measured in
calories. A calorie is the amount of heat which is
required to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water by 1
degree C. The number of calories which people need per
day varies. It depends on the activity which the people
are involved in. For example; people will need more
calories for standing than for sitting, people need more
for running than for walking, etc.
The energy which is provided by food is in the form of
three kinds of chemical substances. They are
carbohydrate, protein and fat. Carbohydrate provides 8.8
calories per gram (cal/gm) of energy, protein 4.0 cal/gm
and fat 8.0 cal/gm. Each food contains different
proportion of these substances. These three chemical
substances are all important for body staying healthy.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. What is the purpose of the text above?
3. What is a calorie?
4. How much calories which people need in a day?
5. Mention the kinds of energy that provided by food?
Types of Volcanic Eruptions
Volcanic eruptions have caused some of the
worst disasters in the world. They can wipe out entire
cities and kill thousands of people. The name of volcano
comes from Roman term. It derives from VULCAN
which is the name of Roman fire god. Romans believed
that Vulcan lived on a volcanic Italian coast. Romans
called the island VULCANO.
According to scientists, volcanic eruptions are
divided in to four basic groups. They are commonly
known as Hawaiian, Strombolian, Vulcanian and
Peleean. The term of Hawaiian eruptions are named after
the volcanoes in Hawaii. These volcanic eruptions are
the least violent type. They produce highly fluid lava
which flows quietly. This gradually builds up a shield
volcano.
Strombolian eruptions are named after
Stromboli. These result from the constant release of gas
from the magma. As the gas escapes, it produces tephra
that piles up, turning into a cinder cone. Strombolian
eruptions happen when sticky magma plugs the central
vent. This makes the magma tic gas build up pressure
until it blasts. The magma is turned into volcanic dust
and bombs.
Vulcanian eruption which comes from the
ancient Roman belief, are more violent than the
strombolian eruption. Vulcanian eruption happens and
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

brings magma which is more viscous. Vulcanian


explosions are usually larger and noisier than the
Strombolian eruptions.
Paleean eruptions are famous as the most
violent kind of volcanic eruptions. The name of paleean
comes from the eruption of Mount Pelee, Martinique in
1902. It killed almost 38 thousands people. A Peleean
eruption occurs when the magmatic gas build up
tremendous pressure. This causes violent explosions with
glowing clouds of hot ash and dust.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. What is the purpose of the text above!
3. What is the caused of volcanic eruptions!
4. Mention the volcanic eruption according to scientist!
5. When did the strombolian eruption happen?
Komodo dragon
Do you know what the largest lizard is? This
lizard is called komodo. It lives in the scrub and
woodland of a few Indonesian islands. Komodo dragon
is the world's heaviest lizard, weighing 150 pounds or
more. The largest Komodo ever measured was more than
10 feet (3 meters) long and weighed 366 pounds (166 kg)
but the average size of komodo in the wild is about 8 feet
(2.5 meters) long and 200 pounds (91 kg)
Komodo has gray scaly skin, a pointed snout,
powerful limbs and a muscular tail. They use their keen
sense of smell to locate decaying animal remains from
several miles away. They also hunt other lizards as well
as large mammals and are sometimes cannibalistic.
The Komodo dragon's teeth are almost
completely covered by its gums. When it feeds, the gums
bleed, creating an ideal culture for virulent bacteria. The
bacteria that live in the Komodo dragon's saliva causes
septicemia, or blood poisoning, in its victims. A dragon
will bite its prey, then follow it until the animal is too
weak to carry on.
1. What is the text above?
2. What is the purpose of the text above?
3. What is the largest lizard?
4. What is the main idea of third paragraph?
5. Write the Indonesia word:
a. woodland
b. measured
c. scaly skin
d. decaying
e. victims

63

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

Heart
The heart is the most important part of the body.
It is the center of life. However, the heart is only as big
as a closed hand. The heart is a muscle and it beats about
seventy times per minute through trout a persons life.
The heart pumps blood from your heart to all
parts of your body. The heart is made up of four
chambers or small rooms. The top chamber are called
the right and left auricles and the bottoms chambers are
the right and left ventricles.
When blood enters the heart. It is in dark
reddish color because it contains carbon dioxide. The
blood enters the right auricle and then the right ventricle.
When the heart contracts, it forces the blood to the lungs
where the blood receives oxygen. It then goes to the left
auricle. The heart contracts again, and the blood goes to
the left ventricle and is then forced out into the body.
The blood gathers carbon dioxide and returns to the
heart, and the process begins again
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. Why the heart is important part of the body?
3. Why did the blood dark when enters the heart?
4. What is the purpose of the text above?
5. Write the Indonesian word:
a. auricle
b. ventricle
c. chamber
d. muscle
e. lungs
Task
Thanksgiving Day
Thanksgiving or Thanksgiving Day is a
celebration of harvest, thankfulness for peace, and the
attempt of Native Americans. It is celebrated in late
autumn. In the past, Thanksgiving was celebrated for
their rich harvest in New England. In North America,
however, it was originally held to thank God for their
survival in the new land which was not easy for them.
However, in Canada, it had been celebrated as in New
England. Thanksgiving now is celebrated in United
States of America and in Canada.
Thanksgiving festivals are held every fourth
Thursday of November in the U.S and on the second
Monday of October in Canada. It is usually celebrated in
four to five days in the North America and for three days
in Canada. It is celebrated through families and friends
gathering to eat and give good luck. Turkey is the main
dish in the thanksgiving dinner.
Thanksgiving parades are also usually held. In
Thanksgiving homes are decorated with wreaths, fresh
and dried flowers. Lamps are lighted to brighten the
environment. Tables are decorated with best china and
antique silver dishes to mark the occasion
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Questions
1. What is the Thanksgiving Day?
2. Where is it celebrated?
3. When is it celebrated in Canada?
4. How long does the celebration last in the USA?
5. How is it celebrated?
Task
Read the following report on Sydney. Then, complete the
chart with the information from the report. Find the
meanings of the following words based on the context.
You may use your dictionary.
: .
bay(kb)
: .
coast (kb)
: .
colony(kb)
: .
harbor (kb)
metropolitan (kb) : .
: .
settlement(kb)
: .
site(kb)
: .
skyscraper(kb)
: .
state capital(kb)
Sydney the Metropolitan City
Sydney is the most populous city in Australia,
with a metropolitan area population around 4.12 million.
It is the state capital of New South Wales and is the site
of the first European colony in Australia. The city is
Australias largest financial centre. Sydney is located on
Australias south-east coast. The city is built around Port
Jackson, which includes Sydney Harbor, leading to the
citys nickname, the Harbor City.
This city is a major international tourist
destination famous for its beaches and twin landmarks:
the Sydney Opera House and the Harbor Bridge. The
metropolitan area is surrounded by national parks, and
contains many bays, rivers and inlets.
Sydney also has many shopping centre and
retail outlets throughout the city. The Queen Victoria
Building on George Street also contains many shops.
Many of the large regional centers around the
metropolitan area also contain large shopping
complexes. Sydney has several museums. The biggest
are the Australian Museum (natural history and
anthropology), The Power house Museum (science,
technology and design), the Art Gallery of New South
Wales, the Museum of Contemporary Art and the
Australian National Maritime Museum.
Sydneys Central Business District (CBD)
extends southwards for about 3 kilometers (1.25 mi)
from Sydney Cove. It is the point of the first European
settlement in the area at the southern end of the bridge
known as The Rocks. It is densely concentrated with
skyscrapers and other buildings including historic
sandstone buildings such as the Sydney Town Hall and
Queen Victoria Building are combined by several parks
such as Wynyard and Hyde Park.

64

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

Task
Washington DC
Washington is home to numerous national
landmarks and is one of the most popular tourist
destinations in the United States. The National Mall is a
large, open park area in the center of the city featuring
many monuments to American leaders; it also serves to
connect the White House and the United States Capitol
buildings. Located prominently in the center of the Mall
is the Washington Monument. Other notable points of
interest near the Mall include the Jefferson Memorial,
Lincoln Memorial, Franklin Delano Roosevelt
Memorial, National World War II Memorial, Korean
War Veterans. Other points of interest in the District
include Arena Stage, Chinatown, Basilica of the National
Shrine of the Immaculate Conception, the Ukrainian
Catholic National Shrine of the Holy Family (across the
street from the Basilica Shrine), and more. Washington,
D.C. is the capital of the United States.
The city and the district are located on the
banks of the Potomac River and bordered by the states of
Virginia (to the west) and Maryland (to the north, east
and south). The city was planned and developed in the
late 18th century to serve as the permanent national
capital. It is a center of American
history and culture, Washington is a popular destination
for tourists, the site of numerous national landmarks and
monuments, the worlds largest museum complex (the
Smithsonian
Institution),
galleries,
universities,
cathedrals, performing arts centers and institutions, and
native music scenes.
The Library of Congress and the National
Archives house thousands of documents covering every
period in American history. Some of the more notable
documents in the National Archives include the
Declaration of Independence, Constitution and Bill of
Rights.

The camel carries its own built-in food supply on its


back in the form of a called dromedary, which has one
hump, and (2) Bactrian camel, which has two humps.
Task
Read and understand the following text.
A kangaroo is an animal found only in
Australia, although it has a smaller relative, called a
wallaby, which lives on the Australian island of
Tasmania and also in New Guinea. Kangaroos eat grass
and plants. They have short front legs, but very long, and
very strong back legs and a tail. These are used for
sitting up and for jumping. Kangaroos have been known
to make forward jumps of over eight meters, and leap
across fences more than three meters high. They can also
run at speeds of over 45 kilometers per hour. The largest
kangaroos are the Great Grey Kangaroo and the Red
Kangaroo. Adult grow to a length of 1.60 meters and
weigh over 90 kilos. Kangaroos are marsupials. This
means that the female kangaroo has an external pouch on
the front of her body. A baby kangaroo is very tiny when
it is born, and it crawls at once into this pouch where it
spends its first five months of life.
Answer the questions based on the text
1.
Are kangaroos and wallabies indigenous animals
of Australia?
2.
What does the word "these" in paragraph 2 refer
to?
What do people call the largest kangaroos?
3.
4.
Where do you find the pouch of the female
kangaroo?
5.
What does the word "it" in sentence ... it crawls at
once refer to?
6.
Can you find the sentence considered the
definition of a kangaroo? State it.
7.
Which sentences tell you about the description of
the kangaroo's appearance?

Questions
1. Where is Washington D.C. located?
2. When was it built?
3. What is the city well known for?
4. What is the National Mall?
5. Where is the White House located?
6. Where is the largest museum complex located?
Task
Retell the following report about camel in your own
words. Use the pictures if necessary.
The camel is a large, strong desert animal.
Camels can travel great distances across hot, dry deserts
with little food or water. They walk easily on soft sand
and carry people and heavy hump. The hump is a large
lump of fat providing energy if food is hard to find.
There are two chief kinds of camels: (1) the Arabian
camel also loads to places that have no roads. Camels
also serve the people of the desert in many other ways.
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

65

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

Task
Read the text and answer the questions.
What Is Thunder and Lightning?
Lightning is a sudden, violent flash of
electricity between a cloud and the ground, or from cloud
to cloud. A lightning fl ash, or bolt, can be several miles
long. It is so hot, with an average temperature of 34,000
Centigrade that the air around it suddenly expands with a
loud blast. This is the thunder we hear.
Lightning occurs in hot, wet storms. Moist air
is driven up to a great height. It forms a type of cloud
called cumulonimbus. When the cloud rises high enough,
the moisture freezes and ice crystals and snow flakes are
formed. These begin to fall, turning to rain on the way
down.
This rain meets more moist air rising, and it is
the friction between them which produces static
electricity. When a cloud is fully charged with this
electricity, it discharges it as a lightning flash.
Answer the questions based on the text
1. What is meant by lightning?
2. When do lightning usually happen?
3. What does the word "this" in the last sentence of
paragraph 1 refers to?
4. What does the word "it" in paragraph 2 refers to?

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

66

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 3
Giving Advice
I suggest that you....
She advises me to do the best.
You should be patient.
Everyone should not....
Why dont you...?
Giving warning
You must not break the rules.
Please, dont....
I warn you not to....
Dont do that.
Dont....
Task
Read the following dialogues. Underline the expressions
used.
Dialogue 1
Danu is in Mrs Dewi's room. She is giving advice to
Danu.
Mrs. Hutabarat : Danu, Mrs. Etty told me that you
didn't attend her lesson six times. Is
that right?
: Yes, Mam.
Danu
Mrs. Hutabarat : Why didn't you study with her
properly? She is a qualified teacher
here. Many students like her very
much because she is also a patient
teacher.
Danu
: Actually I like her lessons. But the
way she explains is so fast that I
cannot follow the lesson.
Mrs. Hutabarat : You should ask her to explain the
lesson more slowly.
Danu
: But I'm ashamed to tell her.
Mrs Hutabarat : Alright, I'll accompany you to talk to
her.
: Thank you, Ma'am.
Danu
Mrs Hutabarat : It's alright.
: Ma'am, I promise to study hard
Danu
especially in her subject.
Mrs Hutabarat : That's my student.
Dialogue 2
A man is stopped by a policewoman because he violated
a traffic regulation.
Policewoman : Good morning, Sir. May I see your
driving licence?
: Good morning. Here you are.
A man
Policewoman : You just broke a traffic regulation on
Siliwangi Street.
: Did I ride my motorbike too fast?
A man
Policewoman : No. But you didn't read the traffic sign
when turning right. You must not enter
this street before 10 a.m.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Oh, I'm so sorry. I didn't see it, because


I am in a hurry.
Policewoman : Okay. Go ahead with your motorbike.
But you should sign the traffic ticket.
Then your driving license must be left
here.
: Alright Ma'am. I'm sorry for my fault.
A man
It won't happen again.
A man

Answer the questions based on the two dialogues


above.
1. Why should Danu meet Mrs. Hutabarat in her room?
2. What did Mrs. Hutabarat say when giving a
suggestion to Danu?
3. What did Mrs. Hutabarat mean by saying you should
not do that?
4. Why did the policewoman stop the man?
5. What did the policewoman say to warn the man?
6. Why must the man sign the traffic ticket?
Complete the following dialogues by choosing the right
expressions given in the box. Practice them with your
partner.
a. Don't do too much training.
b. Why don't you go with your father?
c. She advised me to study hard.
d. Don't meet Mr. Rudi now.
e. Don't forget to give him my regards.
f. He is in the admonition of God.
g. You should study hard.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Ajeng
: I'm very sorry, Sir. I came late.
Mr. Siregar : Okay. But . He has been
here since 7.
Meylan
: He cannot be
disturbed. He is very busy.
Robert
: Alright. I'll meet him at noon.
Doctor
: No problem. Just take enough rest.

Patient
: I will. Thank you, Doc.
Aisyah
: Mom, tomorrow I'll have a test.
Please pray for me always.
Mother
: Okay. But .
Lidya
: What should I do when meeting
Mr. Cahyo at his office?
Father
: Yeah.
Arum
: What did mother say to you?
Roni
: ..because she didn't
want me to fail.
Lia
: Excuse me, why does the rich man
often get problems?
Budi
: I think that..

67

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Unit 4
Reading
An analytical exposition that proposes or suggests
something.
It consists of:
Opinion / proposal of something; and
Reasons behind the proposal or argument.
Sometimes what has been discussed is also
expressed again in the end of the text.
This type of text has the purpose of persuading the reader
with its argument. It also explains how and why the
argument is proposed.
The common grammatical patterns in exposition include:
General nouns, eg ears, zoos;
Abstract nouns, eg policy, government;
Technical words, eg species of animals;
Relating verbs, eg it is important ;
Action verbs, eg we must save ;
Thinking verbs, eg many people believe ;
Modal verbs, eg we must preserve ;
Modal adverbs, eg certainly we must try ;
Connectives, eg firstly, secondly ;
Evaluative language, eg important, significant,
valuable.
Task
Read the text below and find the meaning of the
following words. Then, find three points listed below in
the test.
: ....
Avoid (kkt)
: ....
Backlog (kb)
: ....
Boost (kkt)
Complexion (kb) : ....
Encourage (kkt) : ....
: ....
Feasible (ks)
Fumbling (kki) : ....
Gathering (kb) : ....
Subsidize (kkt) : ....
Traffic jam (kb) : ....
Things that you need to identify from the text:
1. The proposal or the argument that is proposed in the
text.
2. The reasons behind the argument.
3. The summary of what is being proposed
Public Transportation should be Free
If we can agree that government has some role
to play in our lives, then lets at least make it a positive
one. Consider the benefits of free, fully-subsidized
public transportation. First, it will motivate more people
to leave their cars at home. Think of the reduction in
pollution and traffic jam and insurance costs due to
accidents. Greener cities, safer cities, more livable cities.
More room for parks and trees. Think of the money well
all save by consuming less gas, spending less frequently
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

on car repairs, and so on. That money will stay in our


wallets and we could then turn around and give the
economy a boost by spending it on other consumer
goods or services. More jobs. Secondly, we must
consider the health benefits. Well all walk a little more.
This will reduce visits to doctors offices and hospitals
because well be healthier. Well have improved blood
pressure, lower stress and possibly a better complexion.
In addition, free transportation will encourage us to
enjoy the company of our friends and family. It will
become much more feasible to safely drink another glass
of wine at the restaurant or have that extra beer at the
family gathering. Well avoid the worry of getting
behind the wheel with a blood-alcohol level thats above
the legal limit.
Fewer accidents, fewer tragedies, lower costs of
policing and reduced court backlogs. The increased
public expense in transportation should pay off in the
form of reduced health care costs and a safer society.
Then, think about some of the other social benefits:
imagine how much well learn from each other when we
share rides instead of sitting in isolation in our cars.
Talking to the neighbors might come back into fashion.
More people will meet and talk and maybe even help
each other. Having someone else drive us will also give
us more time for reading books and newspapers. So, park
your car and use it for your dream vacation. No more
fumbling for change, just hop on and off the streetcar or
bus wherever and whenever you like. What a great idea,
especially for those who live in crowded, polluted cities.
It will renew life on our streets. So I cant agree more
with this proposition. Lets go for it!
Task
Read aloud the following text.
The Importance of Rainforests
Rainforests are one of the most complicated
environments on Earth. They are recognized worldwide
as containing the richest source of plants and animals
and are believed to contain nearly three-quarters of all
the varieties of life on Earth. This is remarkable because
rainforests cover only about six per cent of the Earth's
land surface. Rainforest are the oldest major ecosystem,
having survived climate changes for more than one
million years. They provide habitats for more species of
plants, animals, insects and birds than any other
environment found on our planet. Scientists estimate that
between 60 and 90 per cent of all species of life are to be
found in rain forests. Unfortunately, the widespread
gradually releasing the water over time into streams and
rivers. This helps to control soil erosion and flooding.
Rainforests are vital to the Earth in helping to recycle
carbon and oxygen. Carbon dioxide (CO2) is the gas put

68

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
into the air globally by humans, mainly by the burning of
fossil fuels (for example in cars and factories).
Rainforests are able to remove carbon dioxide
from the air and return oxygen in its place. This is why
our global rainforests are often called the Earth's lungs'.
Rainforests are major producers of the Earth's oxygen. In
fact, scientists believe that nearly 50 per cent of the
Earth's oxygen is produced by destruction of many of the
world's rainforests has caused a significant decline in the
number of plant and animal species on Earth.
Rainforests influence both our local and global
climates. For example, between 50 and 80 per cent of the
moisture in the air above rainforests comes from the
rainforest's trees. If large areas of these lush rainforests
are cleared, the average rainfall in the area will drop.
Eventually, the area's climate will get hotter and drier.
This process could convert rainforests into a sparse
grassland or desert. Rainforests are also able to absorb
over 90 per cent of the rainfall in their leaves and
mosses. By doing this, they are able to slow down water
run-off by rainforest in the Amazon region alone. Nearly
40 per cent of the world's carbon is contained in the trees
of the rainforests. As rainforests are cut down and
burned, carbon dioxide is released into the Earth's
atmosphere. Eventually, as this gas builds up the
atmosphere, leading to what scientists call the enhanced
greenhouse effect. To sum up, the role of the rainforest is
essential for human life. It creates equilibrium in our
environment and its resources are significant for human
beings survival.
Decide in which paragraph you can find the following
information.
1.
The economic purposes rainforests are used for
The percentage of the world's food supplies which
2.
originate in rainforests areas
Fruits originating from rainforests
3.
4.
Activities that people do in rainforests
5.
Sickness and diseases which are treated with
medicines from the rainforests
6.
Industrial products that originate from the
rainforests
7.
Daily products which are produced from plants
growing in rain forest areas
8.
The area of rainforests which are being destroyed
each year for economic purposes
Task
The following text consists of five paragraphs, but they
are not in correct order. Arrange them into a good text.
The global average air temperature near the
1.
Earth's surface rose 0.74 0.18 C (1.33 0.32
F) during the last century. The Intergovernmental
Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) concludes "most
of the observed increase in globally averaged
temperatures since the mid-twentieth century is
very likely due to the observed increase in
anthropogenic greenhouse gas concentrations via
the greenhouse effect. Natural phenomena such as
solar variation combined with volcanoes probably
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

2.

3.

4.

5.

had a small warming effect from pre-industrial


times to 1950 and a small cooling effect from
1950 onward. These basic conclusions have been
endorsed by at least thirty scientific societies and
academies of science, including all of the national
academies of science of the major industrialized
countries. While individual scientists have voiced
disagreement with some findings of the IPCC, the
overwhelming majority of scientists working on
climate change agree with the IPCC's main
conclusions.
Increasing global temperature will cause sea
levels to rise, and is expected to increase the
intensity of extreme weather events and to change
the amount and pattern of precipitation. Other
effects of global warming include changes in
agricultural yields, trade routes, glacier retreat,
species extinction and increases in the ranges of
disease vectors.
Global warming is the increase in the average
temperature of the Earth's near-surface air and
oceans in recent decades and its projected
continuation.
Remaining scientific uncertainties include the
amount of warming expected in the future, and
how warming and related changes will vary from
region to region around the globe. Most national
governments have signed and ratified the Kyoto
Protocol aimed at reducing greenhouse gas
emissions, but there is ongoing political and
public debate worldwide regarding what, if any,
action should be taken to reduce or reverse future
warming or to adapt to its expected consequences.
Climate model projections summarized by the
IPCC indicate that average global surface
temperature will likely rise a further 1.1 to 6.4 C
(2.0 to 11.5 F) during the twenty-first century.
The range of values results from the use of
differing scenarios of future greenhouse gas
emissions as well as models with differing climate
sensitivity. Although most studies focus on the
period up to 2100, warming and sea level rise are
expected to continue for more than a thousand
years even if greenhouse gas levels are stabilized.
The delay in reaching equilibrium is a result of the
large heat capacity of the oceans.

Task
Answer the following questions based on the paragraphs
you have just arranged.
1. What is a suitable title for the text?
2. What is the topic of the text?
3. What is the main idea of each paragraph?
4. What is the conclusion of the text?

69

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Task
Study the text and the explanation. Access to Clean
Water:
A Problem for Indonesia

Elaborate on the following main ideas as an analytical


exposition text. Work with a partner.
1. Types of Pollution
2. Air Pollution
3. Water Pollution
4. Soil Pollution

Access to clean water is one of Indonesia's


biggest problem. According to the Millennium
Development Goals (MDGs) Report 2007, published by
the National Development Planning Board, piped water
is accessible to 30.8 per cent of households in the
country's cities and 9 per cent in its villages. Such figures
show the limitations of the municipality' water service
provider, PDAM. Lack of investment in clean water is
one reason
PDAM gives for its limited outreach. Based on
a government statement, to meet the MDGs target by
2015, Indonesia needs Rp 43 trillion (US$4.6 billion) in
clean water funding. The government currently provides
Rp500 billion. In order to close the funding gap, the
government expects private investment in drinking water
infrastructure. The need for clean water funding is
something that cannot be covered by private investment.
In Indonesia, most PDAM utilities have small scales of
economy and are therefore unattractive to investors.
There is no evidence to suggest private
investors will improve the efficiency and effectiveness of
water services, whereas the government has a duty to do
so. Increasing public funding for clean water
infrastructure is the most rational approach for Indonesia.
This effort should begin with an analysis of the needs of
locals. This should be done through a democratic and
participatory process.
There are resources and mechanisms the
government could employ to increase clean water
funding, such as state and local budgets, grants,
government bonds and community-public partnership. In
order to use a grant system, the government should
improve its proposal management and clearly focus on
real needs in order to widen clean water services.
PDAM could use existing funds more
efficiently. if it could reduce leakages from 40 per cent
to 20 percent, it would have more disposable funds to
invest in infrastructure. PDAM should use cost recovery
principles, as long as costs are not passed on to
consumers. Cost recovery principles should also be
supported by a proper subsidy mechanism. Bond
investing is a traditional lending instrument for public
services. The mechanism needs conditions, such as
strong capital structure at local level.
A few of mechanisms in place now do help the
poor access clean water at affordable prices. The most
important thing is to make sure the mechanisms run
properly and that the needs of people at the local level
are met through appropriate funding.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

70

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 5
Speaking
You are invited to be an MC. This is the script that you
will read. Study the following script. Perform in front of
the class.
Good afternoon! My name is Andi Soraya and
I'm a sophomore here at SMU Tunas Bangsa. I want to
welcome you to the first of a three-day English for You
programmed sponsored by First English Course. Our
speaker for this day is Helvy Nadia. Helvy earned a
scholar degree in English Literature from Padjadjaran
University. A syndicated columnist, she is a member of
an outstanding writing society in Indonesia and is the
award-winning author of some best selling books. She
has spoken to thousands of students in Indonesia. She
has appeared on television talk shows across Indonesia.
Today Helvy will be speaking on "How to Write a Good
Book". Let's give Helvy a warm welcome to SMU Tunas
Bangsa.
Task
Study what an MC should and should not do. Then,
perform in front of the class as an MC.
You are the stage setter.
1.
2.
Create an inviting environment.
3.
Be really interested in the speaker and subject.
Unless the speaker is a celebrity, use his or her
4.
name several times.
When you make an introduction, speak to the
5.
audience, not to the person being introduced.
Do not upstage or over praise.
6.
7.
Welcome the speaker with a handshake, nod,
smile, or slight touch on the shoulder.
8.
Lead the applause.

Task
Practice the following MC script in front of the class.
Good afternoon, Ladies and Gentlemen. Our
session now will deal with the topic "The Importance of
Home Education for Children" to be presented by Dr.
Nina Bisono, M.Psi from Tunas Ceria NGO. Now I'd
like to call upon Dr. Nina Bisono, M.Psi to proceed to
the stage to present her paper. Ladies and Gentlemen,
Mrs. Bisono is the director of Tunas Ceria. It is a nongovernmental organization concerned about children
education. She has written several books in the same
field. She has also involved in a number of seminars
dealing with education for children. I'd now like to invite
Mrs. Bisono to present her main points in her paper
within 30 minutes. Afterwards, we'll spend the rest of the
time for questions and answers.
Mrs. Bisono, please.
Now we still have twenty minutes for our session
and I like to invite questions and comments on what has
been presented by Mrs. Bisono. Please mention your
name and institution first.
Ladies and Gentlemen.
We are running out of time. I'd like to extend my
appreciation and thanks to Mrs. Bisono for her lucid
presentation. She deserves a big applause, then. Thank
you.

Task
As your friend performs as an MC in front of the class,
make an assessment of his/her performance. Use the
following check list.
1.
He/she is a good stage setter.
He/she is able to create an inviting environment.
2.
3.
He/she seems to be interested in the speaker and
the subject.
4.
He/she mentions the name of the speaker several
times.
When he/she makes an introduction, he/she speaks
5.
to the audience, not to the speaker.
He/she welcomes the speaker with a handshake,
6.
nod, smile, or slight touch on the shoulder.
7.
He/she leads the applause.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

71

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Task
Read aloud the following script of an MC.

Study the following expressions for opening, introducing


the event and speaker, and closing a ceremony.

Good evening. Ladies and Gentlemen, a warm


welcome to you all to this reception organized by Cross
Cultural Organization (CCO). A quick word about
tonight's program: we shall begin with a talk by our
honorable speaker, Professor Wahid Hidayat, from
Jakarta. This will be followed by a short questionand
answer session, where you will be free to exchange ideas
with the professor. At about 8 o'clock tonight when the
talk concludes, the reception will resume, and we have
arranged refreshments outside for you. Since the
professor is catching his flight home tonight, much as we
would like to have him here longer with us, we have to
make sure that he can be allowed to leave the venue by
8:30. As you may be well aware, this reception has been
organized to mark the closing of an inhouse seminar
organized by CCO on cross cultural study. This seminar
actually started last week and today is the last day.
We are much honored to have invited Professor
Wahid Hidayat of International University, to say a few
words to us. Mr. Hidayat please.

Opening
Good afternoon. My name is....
Good evening, Ladies and Gentlemen.
Good evening, the distinguished guest, Ladies and
Gentlemen.

Answer the following questions based on the script


1. When was the reception held?
2. Who organized the reception?
3. Who was the speaker at the reception?
4. Where was the speaker from?
5. Mention two main programmed at the reception.
6. When will the talk end?
7. How long was the seminar?
8. What was the speaker going to do when the MC
invited him?
Task
Re-arrange the following parts of an MC script.
On behalf of the committee members, we'd like to
1.
appreciate and thank dr. Luqman Dault for his
informative presentation. He deserves a big
applause, then. Thank you.
There's still 15 minutes left. Then, I'd like to invite
2.
questions and comments from the floor.
Our session now is going to discuss the topic
3.
"Young Generation, Healthy Generation" to be
presented by dr. Luqman Dault.
4.
Dr. Luqman Dault is a young doctor that gives big
attention on teenage health. He has a number of
research and surveys in the related fi eld.
Now, I'd like to invite Mr. Dault to present his
5.
main points in his paper within 45 minutes and
afterwards we'll spend 15 minutes for questions
and answers session. Mr Dault, please.
I'd now like to call upon your Excellency, dr.
6.
Luqman Dault to proceed to the stage, please.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Introducing the event


Welcome to this event.
I want to welcome you to....
It is greatest pleasure to welcome you....
Introducing the speaker
Our speaker for this day is....
It's our pleasure to have ... here with us.
Mr. / Mrs. ... will talk about....
Closing
We have had a fascinating talk....
Thank you for your participation.
Ladies and gentlemen, it's the end of this reception.
Thank you....
Task
Read the following text and then discuss the meanings of
the following words according to the context. Then,
answer the questions.
Attendant
Conjunction
Punitive (ks)
Refractory
Undergo (kkt)
Withdrawal (kb)
The Report of the New York Academy of
Medicine agrees with the objective of stopping drug
addiction and with the efforts at rehabilitation. It
disapproves of the punitive approach and the
fantastically brutal punishment. It proposes a more
humane program as follows: 1. there should be a
changed attitude toward the addict. He is a sick person,
not a criminal. 2. the most effective way to get rid of
drug addiction is to take the profit out of illegal drug
traffic. The addict should be able to get his drugs at low
cost under Federal control in conjunction with efforts to
have him undergo withdrawal. 3. There should be
medical supervision of existing addicts with strong
efforts toward their rehabilitation. This would involve
persuasion of the addict to go through treatment and
rehabilitation, evaluation of the methods of treatment,
and supervision of addicts who were unwilling or
stubborn to treatment. 4. There should be no reduction in
the efforts toward the elimination of the supply of illegal
drugs. Every effort should be made to arrest drug
peddlers, wholesalers, and importers. While the addict
should be considered as a sick person and treated
appropriately, the nonaddicting trafficker should feel the

72

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
full punishment of the law. 5. By means of all
educational media, radios, televisions, the press, lectures,
books, and classrooms, there should be a concentrated
effort to inform the public of the dangers attendant on the
use of narcotic drugs. 6. Such a program would provide
enough data relating to the number of addicts, the origin
of individual usage, the number under treatment, the
outcome of various forms of treatment, the number
known to be unwilling to treatment, and similar
information which is not now available. Such
information would form a solid basis for better control,
better rehabilitation, and better knowledge concerning
the effect of narcotic addiction.
Questions
1. What is the text about?
2. What are the proposals or suggestions stated in the
text?
3. What is the best title for the text?
Task
Read the following text; find the meaning of the
following words. Then, summarize the text, but be sure
to include the suggestion, reason behind the suggestion,
and the conclusion.

Most addicts are too far gone to worry about


whether they reuse a needle or not, and many do not care
about their chances of catching an infectious disease.
In the early 1980s, insulin and allergy syringes
could be bought in any drug store without a prescription,
so addicts had no problem obtaining needles if they had
the money.
Even though they did not need a prescription,
they still continued to reuse needles and share with
others. Consequently, it is still helping lead to the AIDS
epidemic. In the early 1990s, states started requiring that
syringes be kept behind the counter in drugstores and
requiring prescriptions for syringes were needed. This
was a way to cut down on illegal drug use and reusing of
needles. This was also an effort to stop the further
epidemic of aids. It has not worked either, but the answer
to the drug problem and the spread of diseases through
used needles is not to equip addicts tools with which to
continue their illegal activities.
We must spend the money that the needle
exchange program would cost in other areas to help stop
the use of drugs altogether.

Needle (kb)
Encourage (kkt)
Elderly (ks)
Disabled (kb)
Syringes (kb)
Prescription (kb)
Obtain (kkt)
Cut down (kkt)
A needle exchange program would only
encourage more people to use drugs, in my opinion, and
many would still share needles or reuse needles even if
there was a program.
Giving needles out for addicts to prevent the
spread of disease, will only encourage them and others to
do drugs more often. Furthermore, it may even
encourage people who have never tried certain types of
drugs, to try them because now they will get their
needles for free. Do we really want to encourage this
type of behavior?
I wouldnt think so.
Moreover, by giving needles to addicts, we are
also taking away from other programs that are already
low on funding. The money for needle exchange would
take away from Medicare programs that are there to help
the elderly and disabled. There have already been
enough Medicare cuts without the extra cuts this would
bring about.
Then you also have the problem of some who
will not use the needles and will keep reusing the needles
they already have.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

73

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 6
Read the following and then retell it in your own
words.
Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves
Ali Baba was such a poor man that he had only
one shoe for his two feet. Even the mice in his house
were hungry. One day, his wife said, "We have no food
in the house. No rice. No potatoes. Go and collect leaves
in the forest so that I can make a soup."
Ali was a lazy man. He looked for leaves for
about ten minutes and then he climbed a tree to sleep. He
was afraid of wolves. When he woke up, he was
surprised to see forty thieves on forty horses. They
stopped in front of a big rock.
"Open Sesame!" shouted the leader.
A door on the rock opened. The thieves carried
sacks full of gold into the cave.
When they had finished, the leader shouted.
"Close Sesame!" and the door closed. As soon
as the thieves had disappeared Ali Baba jumped down
from the tree, said, "Open Sesame" and went into the
cave. There were shelves all around the walls. The
shelves were full of sacks.
And the sacks were full of gold. Ali took a sack
home with him.
Unfortunately, one of the thieves saw Ali's footprints on
the sand. He followed them to Ali's home. He took out
his knife and made a cross on the door.
"Now I shall know which house it is," he said.
He rode off to get the other thieves. But Ali had
seen the thief.
He and his wife took brooms and swept away
the footprints. Then he made crosses on every door at the
street. When the forty thieves arrived they had their
knives between their teeth. But they couldn't find either
Ali or the gold. And Ali and his wife lived happily ever
after.

Task
Find the synonyms and antonyms of the words by
choosing the words provided in the box. Copy the table
in your workbook.
a. day reek
g. trickery
h. descend
b. reluctance
i. certainty
c. honesty
j. keep silent
d. paradise
k. hell
e. climb
f. shout
l. sunset

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Word
1. Ascend
2. Dawn
3. Heaven
4. Hesitation
5. Call out
6. Deception

Synonym
..
..
..
..
..
..

Antonym
.
.
.
.
.
.

Task
Read and understand the following text.
Why Does the Cock Eat the Millipede?
Long ago the cock had a pair of beautiful horns
on his head. But at that time there was a dragon who was
prevented from ascending into heaven because he lacked
a pair of horns. And so he offered the millipede as a
guarantor, and borrowed the horns from the cock! When
the millipede came for the horns, he said to the cock:
"When you want your horns back, you must call out at
dawn: 'Give me back my horns!' and they will be
returned to you at once. You need have no occasion to be
concerned in the least." The kind cock knew how
difficult it was to ascend to heaven, so, reassured by the
good security the millipede offered, he loaned his horns
without hesitation, just twisting them right off his head.
He also thought to himself that when the dragon returned
form his visit to heaven, they could sit down and have a
good conversation; he would ask the dragon to tell him
how things were in heaven, and if it really was beautiful
there, as he had always heard. If it was true, he might
consider going there himself someday, he thought. So,
next morning at daybreak (for the dragon's visit was
scheduled to be brief), the cock called out loudly: "Give
me back my horns!" But, even though he repeated this
demand ten times over, there was no sign at all of either
the dragon or the horns. Worried, the cock promptly
went off to complain to the millipede, who soothed him,
saying: "If the dragon has not returned the horns this
morning, then he will certainly do so tomorrow. At the
very latest, the day after that. Just learn to be a little
patient and your horns will soon be back on your head,
just as before." The cock did wait several days, but
although he called out every morning at sunrise: "Give
me back my horns!" They never did reappear. The cock
was extremely annoyed at this deception and loss, as you
can well imagine, therefore he ordered all the members
of his family to eat millipedes on sight. Even so, the cock
has not yet given up hope of getting his horns returned.
He ordered his descendants always to call out at the
break of day: "Give me back my horns!" He still hopes
that the dragon may hear him!

74

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Answer the questions
1. Why didn't the cock have horns on his head?
2. Why did the cock loan his horns without hesitation?
3. What was a pair of cock's beautiful horns asked for?
4. Why did the cock give his horns to the millipede?
5. What should the cock call out if he wanted the horns
back?
6. Did the cock stop hoping to get his horns back?
7. Were the horns returned to the cock?
Task
Analyze the following narrative text carefully.
Determine the orientation, complication and resolution.
Do it individually.
Miss Mole Catches a Ghost
Quite often Miss Mole would look after the
young ones who lived in the woodland, when their
parents went out in the evening. "I just love babysitting," sighed Miss Mole, as she gazed at the little
animals, "you're all such darlings!" "But we're not
babies," grumbled the field mice twins, "we're almost
grown up!" "Well you'll always be babies to me,"
giggled Miss Mole, as she gave them all a great big hug.
But one evening when Miss Mole was baby-sitting,
something very strange happened ... All the little animals
had walked over to Miss Mole's house just before dark.
They were laughing and joking and making lots
of noise as they went along. All of a sudden one of the
rabbits heard a strange sound. Then one or two of the
little animals saw something move near the top of the
trees. "What was that?" gasped a baby badger as he
grabbed one of the squirrels. Then, as the wind rustled
the leaves on the tree ... they all saw it ... as spooky white
thing flying through the branches! "It's a ghost!"
screamed a small hedgehog. And everyone ran as fast as
they could and landed on a heap at Miss Mole's front
door.
"Whatever is wrong?" cried Miss Mole as she
opened her door, and in fell all the little animals. "We've
seen a ghost!" sobbed the rabbit. "It's chased us all the
way through the wood, and now it's up in that tree!" Miss
Mole put on her extra strong glasses and took a good
look. "Goodness me," she gasped, "there it is!" Right
then and there, brave Miss Mole reached for her longest
broom and pulled something out of the branches above.
"Here's your ghost," laughed Miss Mole. "It's a plastic
bag. I lost it on my way back from the woodland
supermarket!" All the little animals breathed a big sigh
of relief as Miss Mole took them inside and closed the
door. "Gather round and I'll tell you a story," she said
kindly. "As long as it's not a ghost story," whispered the
baby badger.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Task
Find the verbs in the form of the past tense in the
following story.
Teddy Bear Time
When a visitor to Bear borough last year forgot
to put on her watch, she asked some local bears the time
and she got some strange answers.
"Half past three," the bear, who sells fruit and vegetables
said, glancing up at the Town Hall clock.
"A quarter to nine," the bear in the bakery
replied, looking at the clock high on the church. "Nine
minutes after five," the bear who sells ice cream on the
corner of the main street said, peering at the clock in
front of the train station.
You have probably guessed that all the clocks in
Bear borough were wrong. That was because old Mr.
Minim, the only clock mender in town, had become a
little shaky on his legs. Although fit "Excuse me,
Jumble," said Mr. Minim, tapping him lightly on the toe
with his walking stick. "Could you lift a grown-up bear,
like me, for example?"
In seconds, Mr. Minim found himself dangling above the
crowd, yet he felt as safe as if he was standing on firm
ground and well in every other way, he simply could not
face climbing up a ladder to mend clocks high up.
As you can imagine, the clocks really were a
problem. The trains were never on time, and the
shopkeepers didn't know when to open their shops.
Then, one day, Bear borough had two very
special visitors. They were bears called Alfred and his
friend Jumble-who was an elephant! Now most bears in
Bear borough had never seen an elephant before, so they
all gathered round. And the elephant, pleased to show off
his size and strength, wrapped his trunk around each of
the little bears in turn and lifted them up high, squealing
with excitement. And that is why, if you visit
Bear borough these days, all the clocks are
exactly right, for Jumble visits every twelve months, and
Mr Minim always says that's the highlight of his year!
Task
Read the following text.
The Jealous Crow
Far, far away there was a grove of shady mango
trees. On one of the green trees there lived a cuckoo and
a crow. They were quite alike in appearance. Both the
birds were black. Only the crow was a little bigger.
The cuckoo would lay all her eggs in the crow's nest. For
quite sometime they lived as good friends. The cuckoo
had a sweet voice and often she would fill the grove with
her sweet melody.
One day, a traveler passed by. Night fell and
there was darkness all around. The traveler was tired. So
he decided to spend the night under the huge mango tree
on which the crow and the cuckoo lived.

75

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
The night was exceedingly pleasant. Full moon
was shedding her lone luster in the sky. The eerie
surrounding made the cuckoo feel supremely happy.
She kept singing the whole night long and the
passerby was simply captivated by cuckoo's sweet song.
Night passed. The day dawned. It was now the crow's
turn to caw. His voice was so harsh to the ears that the
traveler soon left the place. When the crow saw the
traveler leave the place, in disgust he felt jealous of the
sweet-voiced bird. When the cuckoo had gone away in
search of food the crow went to the nest in desperation
and breaking all the eggs, he threw them down.
The cuckoo, finding all her eggs smashed, was
mad with grief. She went to the crow and said, "Oh
brother, we had always lived like friends. What made
you break all my eggs?"
"Well sister, as you sang, the unknown traveler
stayed the whole night. When I started cawing he left the
place. I felt insulted and broke all your eggs. Now let us
both go to the traveler and ask him why he did so." So,
both the birds flew and flew till they spotted the traveler.
When the crow asked him, he replied, "I was carried
away by the cuckoo's enchanting voice but your voice
was intolerably harsh. So, I left the place. But both of
you have been old friends, so you should always live in
harmony. You should not feel jealous of your friend."
These words of the passerby pacified both cuckoo and
the crow. After that day they lived peacefully. The just
and kind words of a traveler destroyed the ill feeling of
jealousy in the crow just as a sprinkling of a little cold
water settles the boiling milk.
Find the synonyms or meanings of these words in
dictionary.
1. Grove
2. Huge
3. Exceedingly
4. Shedding
5. Supremely
6. Captivated
7. Harsh
8. Grief
9. Enchanting
10. Pacified
Task
Find some moral values you get from the story above
Task
Write the main ideas of the following text.
The Magic Moneybag
Long ago there was a young couple who lived
in a small thatched hut in a gully. They were so poor that
every day they had to cut two bundles of firewood and
carry them to market on their backs. One day, the young
couple came back from the mountain carrying the
firewood. They put one bundle in the courtyard and
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

planned to sell it at the market the next day to buy rice.


The other bundle they kept in the kitchen for their own
use. When they woke up the following morning, the
bundle in the courtyard had mysteriously disappeared.
There was nothing to do but to sell the bundle which
they had kept for themselves.
That same day, they cut another two bundles of
firewood as usual. They put one bundle in the courtyard
for market and kept the other bundle for their own use.
But the following morning, the bundle in the courtyard
had vanished again. The same thing happened on the
third and fourth day as well, and the husband began to
think there was something strange going on.
On the fifth day, he made a hollow in the bundle of
firewood in the courtyard and hid himself inside it. From
the outside it looked just the same as before. At midnight
an enormous rope descended from the sky, attached
It self to the bundle and lifted it up the
woodcutter was beside himself with joy, "I'd like that
moneybag, the one full of precious things. Give me that
round, bulging one." He chose the biggest one and took
it down. Just at this moment, the white haired old man
came in and, with a stern expression on his face, said to
the young man, "You cannot take that one. I'll give you
an empty one. Every day you can take one tail of silver
out of it, and no more."
The woodcutter reluctantly agreed. He took the
empty moneybag and, clinging onto the enormous rope,
he was lowered to the ground. Once home, he gave the
moneybag to his wife and told her the whole story. She
was most excited. In the daytime they went as usual to
cut firewood. But from then on, whenever they returned
home after dark, they would close the door and open the
moneybag. Instantly, a lump of silver would roll jingling
out.
When they weighed it on the palm of their hand,
they found it to be exactly one tail. Every day one tail of
silver and no more came rolling out of the bag. The wife
saved them up one by one. Time went slowly by. One
day the husband suggested, "Let's buy an ox. "The wife
didn't agree. A few days later, the husband suggested
again, "How about buying a few acres of land?"
His wife didn't agree with that either. A few more days
elapsed, and the wife herself proposed, "Let's build a
little thatched cottage."
The husband was itching to spend all the money
they had saved and said, "Since we have so much money
in hand, why don't we build a big brick house?" into the
sky, with the woodcutter still inside it.
On his arrival in heaven, he saw a kindly
looking, white-haired old man coming in his direction.
The old man untied the bundle and when he found the
man inside it, he asked, "Other people only cut one
bundle of firewood a day. Why do you cut two?"
The woodcutter made a bow and replied, "We
are penniless. That's why my wife and I cut two bundles
of firewood a day. One bundle is for our own use and the
other we carry to the market. With it we can buy rice to
make porridge."

76

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
The old man chuckled and said to the
woodcutter in a warm-hearted tone of voice, "I've known
for a long time that you are a decent couple and lead a
hardworking life. I shall give you a piece of treasure.
Take it back with you and it will provide you with your
livelihood."
As soon as he had finished speaking, there came
seven fairies who led the young man into a magnificent
palace. Its golden eaves and gleaming roof tiles shone so
brightly that the moment he entered, he could no longer
open his eyes. Inside the palace there were many kinds
of rare objects on display that he had never seen before.
Moneybags of all shapes and sizes hung in one room.
The fairies asked him, "Which one do you like
best? Choose whichever you please, and take it home."
The wife could not dissuade her husband and
reluctantly went along with his idea. The husband spent
the money on bricks, tiles and timber and on hiring
carpenters and masons. From that time on, neither of
them went into the mountain to cut firewood any more.
The day came when their pile of silver was almost
exhausted, but the new house was still unfinished. It had
long been in the back of the husband's mind to ask the
moneybag to produce more silver. So without his wife's
knowledge, he opened the bag for a second time that day.
Instantly, another lump of snow white silver rolled
jingling out of the bag onto the ground. He opened it a
third time and received a third lump.
He thought to himself, "If I go on like this, I can
get the house finished in no time!" He quite forgot the
old man's warning. But when he opened the bag for the
fourth time, it was absolutely empty.
This time not a scrap of silver came out of it. It
was just an old cloth bag. When he turned to look at his
unfinished brick house, that was gone as well. There
before him was his old thatched hut. The woodcutter felt
very sad. His wife came over and consoled him, "We
can't depend on the magic moneybag from heaven. Let's
go back to the mountain to cut firewood as we did
before. That's a more dependable way of earning a
living."
From that day on, the young couple once again
went up to the mountain to cut firewood and led their
old, hardworking life.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Answer the following questions.


How did the couple earn money?
1.
2.
Where did the bundle of firewood apparently
disappear?
Whom did the husband meet in heaven?
3.
4.
Which bag did the husband choose?
Why did the husband disagree to build a little
5.
thatched cottage?
Why was the moneybag empty when the husband
6.
opened the bag for the fourth time?
Can you describe the characteristics of the wife
7.
and the husband? State the textual evidence to
support your answer.
What are the moral values you get from the story?
8.

77

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 7
Reading
Spoof
Social function : to share with others a real story of
which the ending is funny to amuse the audience or
readers.
Generic structure:
the opening of the story which sets the
Orientation :
scene.
Events
:
the details of the events in the story.
:
the funny or unpredictable ending of
Twist
the story.
Text

Why would a 118-year-old guy want to get married?"


The old-timer answers, "Who says he wanted to?"
Questions
What does the old man go to the doctor for?
1.
2.
Why is the old man in good shape?
Is the health of the old man's dad still in good
3.
condition? How do you know?
4.
What does the word it in the clause "I am sure it
helps" refer to?
5.
What is the meaning of the sentence "Who says he
wanted to?"?
6.
Do you think that the old man is telling a lie?

Horseman In The Sky


Task
Carter Druse was born in Virginia. He was a
southerner. When the United States was divided by a
terrible civil war, Carter decided to join the Union Army
of the north.
He told his father about his decision to join
the north army. His father looked deep into his son's
eyes. "Carter, No matter what happens, be sure you
always do what you think is your duty."
One sunny afternoon, Carter was sent to
guard. It was his duty to be sure that no enemy soldier
spied on. Suddenly, he saw a man on horseback standing
on the huge rocky cliff. He held a gun in his right hand,
and the horse's reins in the other. Unavoidably, Carter
pointed his gun. Carter was calm as he pulled the trigger.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. Where did he was born?
3. What did the carter say to his father?
4. What did the carter see in one sunny morning?
5. What we learn from the story above?
Read the following texts. Then answer the questions.
An 80-year-old man goes to a doctor for a
checkup. The doctor is amazed at his shape. "To what do
you attribute your remarkably good health?" "I am a
turkey hunter and that's why I'm in good shape. Get up
before daylight, chase turkeys up and down the
mountains." The doctor says, "Well, I'm sure it helps, but
there have to be genetic factors. How old was your dad
when he died?" "Who says my dad's dead?" "You're 80
years old and your dad's alive? How old is he?" "Dad's
100. In fact, he turkey hunted with me this morning."
"What about your dad's dad how old was he when he
died?" "Who says my granddad's dead?" "You're 80
years old and your grandfather's still living? How old is
he?" "118." "I suppose you're going to tell me he went
turkey hunting this morning?" "No. He got married." The
doctor looks at the man in amazement. "Got married?

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

We brought our newborn son, Adam, to the


pediatrician for his first check up. As he finished, the
doctor told us, "You have a cute baby." Smiling, I said,
"I bet you say that to all new parents." "No," he replied,
"Just to those whose babies really are good-looking." "So
what do you say to the others?" I asked. "He looks just
like you."
Questions
1. What was the baby taken to the pediatrician for?
2. Was the baby the first child of the family?
3. Was the baby really cute?
4. Did the pediatrician tell the truth about the baby?
5. What did the pediatrician mean by saying "He looks
just like you." to the new parents?
Task
Read the following text carefully.
Because my husband, John, tends to snore, I
rarely get more than a couple of hours sleep each night.
When he awakens refreshed in the morning, he's always
astonished to find that he has been the cause of another
sleepless night for me. One night John had severe allergy
symptoms, so he took some medication before he went to
bed. To my surprise, he fell into a deep sleep, allowing
me to nod off comfortably too. I awoke to find him
shaking me. "What's the matter?" I asked, trying not to
sound irritable. "Are you in pain?" "No," he said, "but
the drugs have worn off, and I can't sleep." I stared at
him in exhausted disbelief. "What do you want me to do
about it?" I said through clenched teeth. "Oh, nothing,"
he replied. "I just wanted you to know."
Answer the following questions.
1. Why is the wife not able to sleep more than two
hours every day?
2. What is the meaning of sleepless?
3. Who is I in the text?
4. What does he in line 3 refer to?

78

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Is John really sick?


What did John take before he slept?
What happened after he took medicine?
Why did John wake up his wife?
Was his wife annoyed by him?
How did John answer his wife's question?

Task
Read the following spoof text and then determine the
orientation, events and twist.
On a recent vacation at a resort with my inlaws, we planned to spend an afternoon at the pool with
our kids. We wanted to bring our own drinks, but were
unsure of the hotel's policy. My brother-in-law called the
front desk, and assuming everyone was familiar with the
brand of ice chest he had, asked if it was all right if he
brought a Playmate to the pool. After a pause the clerk
asked, "Does she have her own towel?".
Task
Answer the following questions based on the text
1. Who writes the text?
2. Where did the story take place?
3. When did the writer spend their holiday?
4. Where did the writer and their children spend their
afternoon?
5. What was "Playmate" meant by the brother-in-law?
6. Why did the clerk ask the writer's brother "Does she
have her own towel"?
7. What is the funny thing of the story?
Task
Here are four kinds of text and their names. Match the
words provided in the box to the following texts.
a. news item
b. report
c. descriptive
d. spoof
Text 1
The police are looking for a woman who stole a diamond
necklace from Dayton's jewellery store. According to the
store manager, the woman is approximately five feet tall,
very thin, light-skinned, and about 60 years old. She has
short, straight grey hair and, wears glasses. Her most
distinguishing mark is the dimple in her chin. When she
was last seen, she was wearing heavy blue eye make-up
and large, silver hoop earrings. She had on a short black
coat and black pants.

written?" The reply from one student was immediate:


"How about on the board?"
Text 3
The blue whale may be the largest animal that ever lived.
But it is no match for humans. Tens of thousands of blue
whales were killed in the early 1900's. They are now
protected, and there are about 5,000 of them in the
world. These fussy eaters feed mainly on tiny shrimplike creatures called krill, which they find in their
summer homes near the North and South Poles. They eat
about four tons of food a day. When winter sets in, the
whales head for warmer water, and go on a diet. That is
also the time when they mate.
Text 4
Pssst! Want to Buy a Fake Ferrari?
ROME: Italians are used to buying bogus Gucci bags or
Rolex watches to look stylish but police found a new
height of craftsmanship and cunning when they broke up
a ring selling fake Ferrari cars for a fraction of the real
price. Police accused 15 people of building the blood red
sports cars and selling them to car fanatics on a budget,
most of whom knew they were buying a counterfeit
classic. Car body workers who police called "very able"
cobbled together mostly fakes parts and a few original
components.
They used body parts from other makes of automobiles,
such as chassis, roofs, hoods, trunks and doors. The body
parts were modified to look like Ferrari classics such as
the 328 Gtb, which went out of production in the late
1980s. Some of the cars sold for about 20,000 euros,
about a tenth of the going price for some versions.
Task
Work in pairs; try to analysis the structure of this spoof
text.
We were listening to a lecture on psychic phenomena in
our Comparative Religions course. Our instructor told us
about a woman who contacted police working on a
missing persons case. "She gave them eerily detailed
instructions on where to find the body," the instructor
said. "In fact, the detectives did find the body just as she
pondered the question; a sheriff's officer taking the class
raised his hand and replied, "A suspect." had described.
Now, what would you call this type of person?" While
the rest of us.

Text 2
Our English professor handed out the mid-term quiz. The
task was to identify several passages extracted from
material we had studied and name the respective authors.
However, it is unclear where the answers were to be
written. One student raised his hand and asked for
clarification on this point. So the professor asked the
entire class, "Where would you like the answers to be
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

79

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 9
Expressing of fulfilling request
Yes, of course.
By all means.
Yes, why not....
Sure, you can....
Expression of relive
Its a relief to know that....
Thank God for....
Im glad it was done.
Thank goodness!

Mrs. Rosma
Mrs. Dewi
Mrs. Rosma
Mrs. Dewi
Mrs. Rosma
Mrs. Dewi
Mrs. Rosma
Mr. Adi

Expression of pain
I am suffering from a relapse.
I have toothache.
I feel sick / I feel ill.
Im sick.
Ouch!
Expression of pleasure
It is really delightful./I am delighted.
Its really a great pleasure.
I am pleased.
Thats great.
Thats wonderful.

Mrs. Rosma
Mrs. Dewi
Mrs. Rosma
Mrs. Dewi
Mr. Adi
Mrs. Rosma
Mr. Adi

Task 1
Complete the following dialogue using expressions
provided in the box and act it out.
a. By all means
b. I am glad it was done
c. Don't mention it
d. We are excited
e. I had a gastric problem
f. I am happy you made a quick recovery
g. It's a relief to hear that
h. That's wonderful
i. I am suffering from a relapse
j. That's great
Mrs. Dewi and Mr. Adi are visiting Mrs. Rosma at the
hospital.
Here is the conversation.
: Hi, how are you today?
Mrs. Dewi
Mrs. Rosma
: I am better now.
Mrs. Dewi
: 1 ..
Mrs. Rosma
: Thank you for coming. Who did you
come here with?
: Mr. Adi. There he is.
Mrs. Dewi
: Hi, Mr. Adi.
Mrs. Rosma
: Hi, 2
Mr. Adi
Mrs. Rosma
: Thanks a lot for coming. But could
you give my regards to your friends.
Tell them that I'll get better soon.
Mr. Adi
: 3 I'll do it. Mrs.
Rosma, our friends actually want to
see you but they are very busy.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Mrs. Dewi

: Oh, I see. Never mind. By the way,


is Mrs. Neni already got better?
: Yes, she has joined with us.
: Err. 4 She is fine.
: Mrs. Rosma, I actually want to know
what you suffer from?
: 5 . Because I ate hot
food.
: So, 6 ..
: That's right. How about you, Mr.
Adi?
: I didn't get sick anymore after
stopping drinking ice and eating hot
food.
: 7 .. Okay. I'll do what
you have done.
: Err ... excuse me. Here is something
from our friends.
: Thank you so much.
: 8 ..
: Mrs. Rosma, let me tell you that our
school is the best in our region.
: 9 .
So, what we have done is not
useless, is it?
: Sure. Now,
10..
because we can see you are well.
: Hmm..., I think you need more rest,
so let me return home. What about
you Mr. Adi?
: I do too. See you again, Mrs. Rosma.
: Thank you. See you again.

Mr. Adi
Mrs. Rosma
Task
Read the following dialogues and then answer the
questions.
Dialogue 1
: Mom, may I ask you something?
Krisna
Mother
: Yes, of course. What's wrong with you?
: I need a lot of money to buy a text book.
Krisna
Mother
: Okay. I'll give it to you if it is important
for you.
Krisna
: Thank you, Mom.
1. Does Krishnas mother fulfill Krishnas request?
How do you know?
2. Why does mother not refuse Krishnas request?

Dialogue 2
: Den, you look pale today. What's wrong
Yenny
with you?
: I am suffering from a relapse.
Denni
Yenny
: What do you suffer from?
Denni
: I've had diarrhea since last night. I
couldn't sleep well.
Yenny
: I'm sorry to hear that.
1. Why did Denni look pale?
2. What did Yenny say when she heard that Denni had
diarrhea?

80

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
UNIT 10
Hortatory Exposition
Hortatory Exposition
Social function: to persuade the reader or listener that
Something should or should not be the case.
Generic structure:
Thesis : announcement of issue concern
Argument: reasons for concern, leading to
recommendation
Recommendation: statement of what ought to or ought
not to happen
Task
Read the following text.
Helping Children Discover Their Own Identity
Children of today's advanced world are different
from those in the past. With easy access to modern
technology, children of today are able to learn everything
they encounter in their life, including world-class
information. In terms of knowledge of the world, one
must admit, they seem to surpass children brought up in
the era when techno logical equipment was still
traditional. The rapid growth of children's cognitive,
physical and social adaptations is an indication of how
they can be easily shaped by the modern vicinity.
This is a critical period when children are
beginning to try to discover their own true identity.
Parental guidance is necessary to assist them in leading
to the correct path. To do this, intervention, however, is
not always mandatory if parents are upbeat that their
offspring can handle the conundrum they are facing on
their own. Self-reliance, in any occasion, needs to be
stressed. What parents need to do is to respect the
changes going on within their child's world, and respond
appropriately to their changing needs. Here a close
monitoring rather than control taking is essential.
This may sound like ideal advice; yet not all
parents may agree with this. A parent who was raised in
a democratic family atmosphere will certainly pass
down the freedom he/she had enjoyed during childhood
to his / her offspring. On the other hand, those who were
brought up in a conservative and authoritative family
will inculcate traditional values to their children,
restricting them by tightly abiding to what the parents
believe to be the correct norms. Clearly, a parent's family
back-ground will, exert a considerable influence in
helping his/her children to learn both formally and
informally. It is more likely that parents will consistently
follow the mind-set they adopted from their father or
mother if they think that it is beneficial. Today's parents,
how ever, need to be aware that not all values and norms
that their parents implanted in them during their
childhood are compatible with modern reality.
Things have changed consider ably, and parents
should take this into account. It might, for example, be
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

felt less relevant to impose traditional control over their


children's conduct about what they need to do to attain
academic achievement. However, most parents still cling
to this, acting as if they are omni science and know
perfectly what is best for their children. In guiding
children in search of true identity, it is important for
today's parents to listen and accommodate all feedback
from their children.
Though it seems too difficult for some
conservative parents to implement this, it is essential to a
child's development into an emotionally mature adult.
Parents also should not exercise too much authority so as
to overprotect their children to develop their potential to
the fullest. Parental intervention, if it is done in an
improper manner, can do more harm than good. If not in
accord with children's interests, parents' excessive
intervention is seen by children as something that
inhibits rather than facilitates their academic excursions.
Parents may probably not realize that their children
simply want them to stay in the background and to
provide whatever support and resources they need to
venture out into the world.
This does not imply that intervention is not
necessary. At the very young age when the influence of a
peer group is extremely powerful, parents need to
intervene by setting a strong measure to help their
children resist the pressure to behave in ways that do not
meet family standards. The best way parents can aid their
children is by successfully discovering their true identity
and growing up to be an emotionally mature adult is to
take a flexible approach. Parents need not always rigidly
follow and impose certain norms and values, which are
imbued with their family tradition during their
childhood, on their children. Understanding children
from the way they see the reality is surely a far more
rewarding experience.
Answer these questions based on the text.
1. What is the issue of the text?
2. What is the writer's recommendation for the parents?
3. What are the writer's views on parental guidance for
children?
4. What tenses mostly use in the text above?
5. What does the word they in las paragraph and the
last sentence?
Task
Parents Need to Analyze International Schools
What impressed me about my friends was their
determination for their children to have, what they
described as, "the best possible education that will give
them good prospects for their future careers". What
seemed sad and disappointing was that they had
concluded that this "best possible education" could not
be accommodated and provided by the Indonesian

81

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
schooling system. It is quite amazing how many
international schools are available in Jakarta now. With
recent terrorist attacks and threats on Jakarta, many in
the expatriate community have in fact been leaving
Indonesia and yet there are still many inter national
schools that, one would have assumed, are designated
and targeted more exclusively to serve the expatriate
community. But times have changed and international
schools are no longer there to exclusively serve the
international community. More and more Indonesians
are choosing international schools for their children's
education. But, of course, these are the relative few in
Indonesia today because after all international schools do
not come cheap.
My friend ultimately settled on an international
school with a more fully developed campus site and a
depth of curriculum and teaching staff that impressed
them. Of course, this was an even more expensive
proposition for them but they are fortunate to be able to
afford the extra expense and of course look to it as a way
of setting their minds at ease that they have made the
right choice.
This, though, is the key conundrum for any and
all parents. What is really the right choice of school for
our children? In some quarters, mainly in the worlds of
sales and commerce, the phrase "reassuringly expensive"
is used to express the idea that the more you pay, the
more likely you are to get something good. Sometimes
parents have the attitude that the school knows best and
so they practically handover their child and the child's
education to the school and the school system.
This is not right though because so much of a
child's education is naturally, or really should However,
no matter what school a parent chooses to send his or her
children to, care needs to be taken to assess the type and
quality of education that is being offered.
When it comes to international schools this is
probably doubly important because there is a great
expense that can be incurred to parents who are choosing
an "international" education for their child. But we
should take care when we think or hear of that
"international" label. Many parents quickly and easily
enter into the belief that the label "international" is an
instant ticket to quality education and better and
international education in the future at the ages of
college life. But this is not always the case.
There are many "international" institutes and
educators highly capable as providers of what might be
considered a superior education. But at the same time
there are those institutes that do not necessarily live up to
such standards and they offer an educational "service"
that is neither worthy of the nametag "international" or
the accompanying higher, if not extortionate, school fees.
Be, evolving from the home.
Parents that just handover the educational
responsibility to the school are really failing. But also
they may be failing and blinding themselves to the
reality of what is really happening in school.
International schools offer an option for education for the
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

more financially secure of Jakarta. But the


"international" labeling of a school should not blind the
parents and reduce their analysis of what they are paying
for. For the greater part better quality education should
be at hand but only scrutiny and continuous checking
will guarantee this.
People have obviously been very frustrated with
the state of education in Jakarta and beyond and so this
has led to a greater consideration of an international
setting for children's education. But that setting should
not be accepted on face value alone; the customer must
check and the buyer must beware.
Read the text again. Then answer these questions.
1. Does the writer's friend think much about her
children's education?
2. What made the writer impressed with his/her friend?
3. And what makes the writer sad and disappointed?
4. Are there many international schools in Jakarta?
5. Who is the target of international school firstly?
6. Do international schools charge high fees?
7. Is it easy to find a quality international school
according to the text?
8. What is the meaning of the phrase "reassuringly
expensive"?
9. What should parents consider when choosing an
international school for their children?
10. Where should education naturally evolve?
In pairs, find what the following words refer to.
1. they (paragraph 1, line 3)
2. it (paragraph 4)
3. we (paragraph 5)
4. this (paragraph 5)
5. them (paragraph 6)
Task
Answer the questions by choosing the best answer.
Students' First Days in
School Need to Be Made Constructive
In the past days and weeks schools across
Indonesia have been opening up their doors again to
receive students entering the new school year. Naturally
enough, this has been a time of many trials and
tribulations as existing students join new classrooms and
new students try to find their way around a new school.
Such times would be difficult enough for even
adults. In adult life we need time to adapt to new settings
and find our footing and direction to settle in and come
to terms with what lies ahead. This kind of experience,
difficult enough in adulthood, can prove extremely
challenging for the, as yet, still young and forming hearts
and minds of school-age children.
During the first days back at school great
opportunities exist to try to develop a sense of
community that will help students settle in and have a
firm foundation on which to build their studies during

82

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
the coming year. There are almost constant complaints
that there is too much to study for school students and
yet time is, every year, wasted on negative and useless
orientation day pranks and fooling around. Surely, when
time pressures are of such a concern and teachers
complain that they have too much to teach from the
curriculum, the first days of school would be a great time
to help students prepare for the challenges ahead.
Constructive teambuilding and guidance towards much
needed study skills would serve these students far better
than nonsense tasks and ridicule.
Schools should design these days carefully and
not let them be so negligently and dangerously wasted.
The benefits of good early learning experiences can be
considerable and the duty that schools should exercise to
consider a child's psychological welfare really have to
leave little room in the first days of school for such waste
and ridiculousness.
1.

The main idea of paragraph 3 is.


a. The needs of constructive teambuilding and
guidance.
b. Complaint of the use of time officer days.
c. Teachers' complaint.
d. Pressure of time.

2.

The word in paragraph 3 which has the meaning


mischievous trick is .
a. complaint
b. orientation
c. pressure
d. prang

3.

The synonyms of the word settle (paragraph 3) are


as follows, except
a. inhabit
b. steady
c. reside
d. set.

4.

Which of these statements is not true according to


the text?
a. First day is the time for trials and tribulation.
b. Schools all over Indonesia had opened
registration many days before the first day.
c. A sense of community can be developed during
the first days back to school.
d. Constructive team-building and guidance for
students are better than meaningless tasks and
ridicule.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Online job
Online jobs are selected in part-time
employment for many, and some have taken more
seriously. A growing number of people are willing to
take a job online. Working online has its advantages if
we manage effectively. Why not?
It offers flexibility and convenience that no
other job can give. We can work from home with
minimal investment and get a good income. The idea of
adding weight to our pocket and makes life easier and
comfortable is the most reassuring.
The reason behind this great opportunity is that
every day there are new companies to join. Every day
and every minute men are seeking information about
everything under the sky of the Internet.
As we know, the Internet is the answer to every
question, web sites need to update each section and also
add reports on developments that have recently joined.
Therefore, it is an expansive space for articles.
There are a number of jobs we can work online.
Some of them which strongly recommended are writing,
marketing, stock trading, and online education. However
we should be very careful because scamming
opportunities are always there.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. What is the purpose of the text above?
3. What is the schematic structure of the text above?
4. What tenses mostly use in the text above!
5. What is the main idea of paragraph 1!
6. According to the text what is Internet!
7. What is the advantage of online job!
Task
Let's Make Campaign Of Reading
Reading habit is poor among Indonesians
because most people havent realized the importance of
reading. Reading is important to transform knowledge
and technology. By reading, one knows the world. He or
she will understand what he doesnt see by himself or
herself. The lines of the paragraphs in an article contain
pieces of knowledge. The knowledge is needed to
improve the quality of humans life. Technology
transformation from other country can only be done by
reading a lot various sources of literature.
Valuable books in libraries and bookstores
mean nothing if they are not read. Realizing the
importance of reading will make someone motivated to
read. When we know that something is very important
because it can give us valuable information, we will try
to get or do the thing. For example, a businessman who
always follows latest information or news, will know
what to do in his/ her business. He will make a good
decision to make a transaction. Most people in all
developed countries have realized the importance or
reading and they have good reading habits. In bus and

83

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
train stations, vehicles, waiting rooms, parks, people like
reading.
They enjoy reading which gives them valuable
knowledge and inspiration. A good understanding
toward the importance of reading can be achieved by
well organized and effective campaign. To plant an
understanding in a generations minds is not an easy job.
It needs a hard work from all components of the nation,
especially the government. A serious campaign which is
organized by the central and local government can help
common people wake up and stand to face the real
competition.
The campaign can be done through various
kinds of mass media such as TV, radio, booklets,
bulletins, newspapers, magazines. It can also be
conducted by teachers, parents and all people who care.
Therefore, a nation-wide effective campaign of the
importance of reading by all components of the nation
should be done, facilitated by the government, to face the
tighter competition. The world has forced globalization.
Those people with little knowledge will be left behind.
To speed up the better change in this country, a good
reading habit is really important.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

What is the text above!


Why reading habit is poor among Indonesian?
What is the advantage for reading habit?
What is the knowledge?
What is the conclusion of the text above!

Task
Watch your Kids While Watching TV
Television becomes one of the most important
devices which takes place in almost houses. It can unite
all members of the family as well as separate them.
However, is it important to know what your kids are
watching? The answer is, of course, absolutely "Yes"
and that should be done by all parents. Television can
expose things you have tried to protect the children from,
especially violence, pornography, consumerism and so
on.
Recently, a study demonstrated that spending
too much time on watching TV during the day or at
bedtime often cause bed-time disruption, stress, and
short sleep duration.
Another research found that there is a
significant relationship between the amount of time spent
for watching television during adolescence and early
adulthood, and the possibility of being aggressive.
Meanwhile, many studies have identified a
relationship between kids who watch TV a lot and being
inactive and overweight.
Considering some facts mentioning above,
protect your children with the following tips:
Limit television viewing to one-two hours each day
Do not allow your children to have a TV set in their
own bedrooms

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Review the rating of TV shows which your children


watch
Watch television with your children and discuss
what is happening in the show

Questions
1. What is the text above!
2. What is the main idea of 1paragraph?
3. How is the advantages watching television for kids?
4. Mention some kinds of tip, how to protect our
childrenwith the following tips!
5. What is the word it the 1 paragraph refer to.
More dust bins is cleaner
To improve comfort and cleanliness at the
school, there should be an increasing number of dust
bins.
When we look at classroom, school corridors
and schoolyard, there papers, mineral water cops, straws,
and napkin everywhere. The condition of unseemliness
really hinders learning and teaching environment. They
can be filled out with water coming from the rain. This
can be placed for mosquito to spread out.
Anyway I notice that most of the students have
responsibilities for their school environment. They put
their litter on the proper place but some of them are not
diligent enough to find the dust bins. The numbers of the
dust bins in the school are not enough. More dust bins
should be put beside each step, outside of the classrooms
and some along of the corridors. Probably one dust bin
should be in every ten meters. So when students want to
throw away their litters, they can find the dust bins
easily.
When school is equipped with sufficient dust
bins, students do not have problem of discomfort any
more. So provide more dust bins and school will
be very clean and become a very nice place to study.
Questions
1. What is the text about?
2. Does one dustbin enough for big school?
3. How was that one dustbin not enough for big
school?
4. What is the conclusion of the text above?
5. Write Indonesia meaning and memorizing:
a. comfort
b .napkin
c .environment
d. sufficient

84

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Gesang should hold a national hero status
"Those who don't learn from history are
condemed to repeat it" and "A great nation is one which
fully appreciates its heroes." say popular English
aphorism and national adage. Then, proposing an
important person who has taken a role in our nation
history is important. I think Gesang should be a national
hero.
Who have never heard Bengawan Solo song? I doubt it if
there is. This keroncong song has been a part of national
voices. Gesang is a senior composer whose songs gained
fame all the way to Japan. He has received a number of
awards in art and everyone will admit that his art talent
was dedicated to this nation.
Government has declared the other great
composer; WR. Suratman and Ismail Marzuki as national
Heroes. Gesang might not be compared to others, but in
my opinion, Gesang is as great as them. All of them are
maestros. Due to his keroncong music maestro, Gesang
has taken a role in building our national identity.
It is obvious that government should name
Gesang National Hero. We should not delay and wait
for, in case, our neighbor countries or other international
communities go a head to recognize him and grant an
award for what he deserves.
Questions
1. What is the text above?
2. What is the main idea of the text above?
3. Who is Gesang?
4. Who is the other great composer beside Gesang?
5. What is the word him refer to( last paragraph)

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

85

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Soal Latihan 1
Text 1
Read this text, then answer questions 1 to 5.
Yesterday Irfan went to Lampung. He wanted to
visit his sister. On the ferry he met Mr. Lukman who
used to be a captain of the ship. He used the chance to
know more about a ship and its captain, here is their
conversation.
: Could you tell me a bit about the
Irfan
captains job ?
Mr. Lukman : The captain is in command of the ship,
and he is responsible for every one on
board. On the ships bridge he talks in
to a speaking tuber or a microphone to
give orders to his men, such as deck
officers and the chief engineer. Deck
officers take turns standing on the
ships bridge. From the bridge they
steer the ship, watch the sea. They also
check instruments and chart.
: And how docs a ship leave the harbour
Irfan
?
Mr. Lukman : A boat called tug boat pulls the ship
from the shore to the open sea. After
that the captain orders : full speed a
head. In the engine room the chief
engineer and his men speed up the
engines. They make sure that the
engine work right.
Irfan
: And how to know information ?
Mr. Lukman : There are radio men in the ship. They
keep in touch with people on land by
sending and receiving messages. There
are also telephone operators. They take
care of telephone calls from cabin to
cabin on the ship. The operators can
connect calls from the ship to for away
parts of the world.
1.

Who did Irfan talk with on the ferry ?


a. an ex-captain of the ship
b. the captain of the ship
c. the captain of the ferry
d. the deck officers
e. the radio men

2.

The deck officers do the following things, except


..
a. watching the sea and the sky
b. checking the instrument
c. checking the chart
d. pulling the ship away
e. steering the ship

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

3.

Full speed ahead, is the captains order directed


to ..
a. his chief engineers
b. his deck officers
c. his operators
d. his tug boats

4.

Which is not true according to the text ?


a. certain passangers may steer the ship
b. deck officers take turn watching the ship
c. the chief engineer speed up the engines
d. telephone operators can connect calls from parts
of the world
e. people on the ship can municate with people on
land

5.

The text shows us that Irfan ..


a. is interested in ship
b. wants to be a captain
c. knows Mr. Lukman before
d. has known very much about ship
e. fell boring during his traveling

Text 2
This text is for questions 6 to 12.
Once up on a time, the is reclites were at war with
the philistines. The leader of the philistines was a giant
named goliath, who was three metres tall. A spear was
slong across his shoulders and a heavy sword hung from
a belt around his waist. Goliath challenged the israclites
to send a leader to fight with him. if he can kill me, we
shall be your slaves, he boasted.
But if I kill him, then you shald be our slaves.
No one except a young shepherd boy dared
volunteer to fight goliath. The shepherd boys name was
David. He was armed with only a shing.
When goliath saw David, he laughed, what?are
you the only one they can send to fight with me ? why, I
will tear you apart and feed you the birds ! Then he
charged at David with his sword. Calmly, David took a
stone, put it on his hing and took careful ain at the
giants eyes.
The stone struck goliath and he fell to the ground.
David freed his people from the terror of goliath.
7.

What is the writers purpose of writing this kind


of text ? To ..
a. entertain the readers
b. tell a story of giant
c. inform an event in the past
d. tell the terror of the leader of the philistines
e. report the war between the is raclites and
philistine

86

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
8.

What is the type of the text ?


a. report
b. narrative
c. description
d. procedure
e. recount

13.

What is the function of sterile outher structures ?


a. they have special scents
b. they attract insencts or birds
c. they protect ovary and staments
d. they contain sexual-reproduction
e. they help the process of fertilization

9.

Who dared to fight the leader of the philistines ?


a. a giant
b. goliath
c. David
d. a have
e. people

14.

What are the male organs of refroduction ..


a. petals
b. sepals
c. pistils
d. staments
e. ovary

10.

What did David use to defeat the leader of the


philistines ?
a. a spear
b. a sward
c. a shing
d. a stone
e. a belt

15.

Why do sterile outer structures attract insect or


bird ? To ..
a. protect them
b. vary in structures
c. give their scent
d. help the process of fertilization
e. provide some plowers with special

11.

But if I kill him, then you shall be our slaves.


The word you refers to ..
a. David
b. the volunteers
c. the philistines
d. the Israelites
e. a shepperd boy

16.

What is the aim of the text a bove ? To ..


a. give information about plowers
b. explain the pracess of pertilization
c. describe the parts of a seed plant
d. expose the reproduction structures of plowers
e. report how plowers attract insects or birds

17.
12.

David took goliaths sword and slew him with


it. Slew means ..
a. cut
b. tore
c. struct
d. fought
e. killed

What is meant by the female reproductive organs


?
a. petals
b. sepals
c. staments
d. seeds
e. pistils

Text 3
This text is for questions 13 to 17.
Flowers are the parts of a seed plant that contain
the organs concerned with sexual reproduction, including
ovary and stamens. These reproduction structures are
usually associated with sterile outher structures that
protect them and attact insects or birds who help the
process of fertilization. Some flowers have special scents
which can attract insects to come.
Flowers basically have four parts : petals, sepals,
stamens and pistils. Most petals are in bright colour, or
sometimes green, as green as sepals. Stamens are the
male reproductive organs, which arise within the petals.
They vary in number, from one to hundreds per flower.
Pistils are the female organs of reproduction, they vary in
structures.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 4
Read this text carefully. This text is for questions 18 to
24.
Blaksands is a large seaside town. Half of the
town lies to the morth of the river black and the other
half lies to the south. It is only a few kilometres to the
nearest highway and just ten minutes drive from the city
of harstone.
Situated near the beach are lots of brightly painted
hotels, some of them are very old. Many big name
department stores, as well smaller shops that sell
souvenirs and gifts, are found on the main street just out
side the town ceilre. The heart of town is accupied by
older houses and many histoucal buildings. In recent
years, some new housing estates have been develoved to
the south of the town.
These are lats of things to do at black sould. There
is a harbour with boats for fishing and cruises. There are
two beaches which are popular for various wiler events
and whole year round swimming. A cinema, a swimming
pool, a bowling alley as well as a fairground are located

87

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
withim the cown. Two parks and several playgrounds are
also easily accessible from the cown centre and outlying
housing estates.
18.

What is the type of the text ?


a. recount
b. narrative
c. descriptive
d. news item
e. analytical exposition

19.

What is the text about ?


a. department stores
b. river black
c. the city of harstone
d. blacksands
e. harbours

20.

What does paragraph 3 mainly describe ?


a. fishing
b. cruises
c. activities
d. bowling
e. swimming

21.

What can be found on the main street just outside


the town centre ?
a. smaller shops that sell souvenirs and gifts
b. many big name department stores
c. rots of brightly painted hotels
d. many historical buildings
e. some new housing estates

22.

23.

24.

What are close to the beach ?


a. bright hotels
b. bowling alleys
c. swimming pools
d. department stores
e. historical buildings
Which of the following is TRUE according to the
text ?
a. blacksands is a big town
b. souvenirs can be bought in suburbs
c. hotel near the beach are painted black
d. tourists can only swim in the beach during
summer
e. it takes more than ten minutes to drive from
harstone to blacksands
Two parks and several playgrounds are also
easily accessible from the town centre and .. (
P3 ). accessible can be replaced by ..
a. seen
b. shown
c. identipied
d. entered
e. presented

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 5
Read this taxt carefully and complete it using the sintable
words
Irrigation is any activity which (25) .. to the
efforts to obtain water for the farm land. For this purpose
people may (26) .. reservoir or a man made lake, use
water pump and build dams and ditches. The ditches (27)
.. to lead water from the resources to the farm land and
drain off the excess water which is not (28) .. by the
crop.
25.

a. relate
b. relates
c. related
d. relating
e. is related

26.

a. make
b. makes
c. made
d. making
e. be made

27.

a. use
b. uses
c. using
d. is used
e. are used

28.

a. use
b. used
c. uses
d. using
e. to use

Text 6
This text is for question 29 to complete the letter with
suitable words !
Tuesday evening
March 8, 2008
Dear Olga,
It is a (29) .. to read your letter and to know about the
music program at your university. Ill be (30) .. to go
with you. My bus (31) .. be at your school at 4 oclock
on Saturday. If you dont mind, Id like you .. me at
the bus station. See you on Saturday.
Maritha
29.

a. happy
b. regret
c. nice
d. pleasure
e. pleased

88

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
30.

a. sad
b. sorry
c. happy
d. happily
e. worred

31.

a. can
b. will
c. should
d. must

32.

a. met
b. meet
c. meets
d. meeting
e. to meet

33.

Dicky : may I can to your house at 7 tonight ?


Anne : .. I will be going somewhere with my
friend at that time.
a. yes, thats all right
b. yes, indeed
c. lm afraid not
d. not at all
e. why not

34.

35.

Lisa : Do you mind turning on the fan for


me ?
Mita : ..
a. no, thank you
b. yes, I do
c. ld love to
d. not at all
e. yes, please
Rudi :
Beni :

Yoyo : What would you do if you got


Rp. 1000.000 ?
Diky : I .. a bicycle.
a. bought
b. will buy
c. had bought
d. would buy
e. would have bought

38.

Lina : which one is your mother ?


Tata : the woman .. the red hot over there is my
mother.
a. in
b. with
c. use
d. wear
e. by

39.

where are you going ?


He asked me where ..
a. I am going
b. I was going
c. Am I going
d. was I going
e. you are going

40.

The parents ask their doughter .. her marriage.


a. delay
b. delays
c. delayed
d. to delay
e. will delay

41.

The furnisure .. when we arrived.


a. sold
b. is sold
c. is being sold
d. had been sold
e. has been sold

42.

Mr. Billy was .. that he forgot his lunch.


a. busy
b. so busy
c. too busy
d. such busy
e. enough busy

43.

Mr. Maman said, my aunt was seriously ill.


Mr. Maman said that his aunt ..
a. was seriously ill
b. is seriously ill
c. would be seriously ill
d. to be seriously ill
e. had been seriously ill

Do you think it is wrong to hunt


animals for sport, Ben ?
I .. strongly. Besides its cruel, it
will make them vanished.
I think you are right, Beni.

Rudi :
a. agree
b. disagree
c. dont agree
d. dont think so
e. am afraid its wrong
36.

37.

If you want to see me tomorrow, dont come at 10


oclock. I .. at that time.
a. teach
b. tought
c. will teach
d. would teach
e. will be teaching

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

89

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
44.

The Indonesian independence .. by president


Soekarno on August 17, 1945.
a. proclains
b. proclained
c. is praclained
d. is praclaining
e. was praclained

45.

Intan : SMA 77 obliges its students to wear


Moslem dress every Friday.
Joko : Ill go along with that
The underlined sentence expresses ..
a. denial
b. warning
c. pleasure
d. certainly
e. agreement

46.

Adi : Sony, lets go to Linas party.


Sony : if I had time, I would go there.
From the dialogue we know that ..
a. Sony goes to Linas party
b. Adi goes to Lonas party
c. Sony doesnt go to Linas party
d. Sony came to Linas party
e. Sony will come to Linas party

47.

Nadia
Lia

50.

Rani
: maam, excuseme you.
Mrs. Nadia
: its ok. What is it ?
a. for interrupting
b. to interrupt
c. interrupting
d. interrupted
e. interrupt

: when did you get this cassette ?


: yesterday. When I .. home, a boy
asked me to give it to you.

a. walk
b. walked
c. walking
d. was walking
e. has been walking
48.

Choose the most normal position order of the


adjectives to complete the sentence below.
mather bought a set of furnisure.
a. wooden Jepara beautiful carving
b. beautiful carving wooden Jepara
c. carving beautiful Jepara wooden
d. beautiful wooden carving Jepara
e. beautiful Jepara carving wooden

49.

If a person want to .. in running a business, he


must have the full support of his employees.
a. success
b. succedd
c. successful
d. succeeded
e. successfully

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

90

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal 2
Read the following information carefully!
Every year thousands of people die, due to
wheather related problems. This has been a particular
problem in Europe over the last few years. It can happen
in both winter and in summer. Lets examine the causes
for a moment.
The year 2003 was a time of extreme cold in the
winter. Extreme, that is by European standards. In
Britain alone, the number of people who died from coldrelated illnesses was described as shameful. Nearly
twenty-five thousand people died from illnesses such as
strokes, heart attacks, bronchitis, flu and pneumonia.
Each of these deaths were though to have been caused by
the cold weather. A campaign called The cold can kill
was launched to give people advice on how to survive
the effects of t he cold wheather and freezing
temperatures.
In the summer of t he same year, around twentythree thousand people died in Europe due to the sizzling
temperatures. France was particulary badly hit, with
nearly fifteen thousand death which were related to the
sweltering heat. In Britain, the number of heat-related
death was much lower than the number of winter deaths.
Even so, with temperatures reaching 38oC, the
government issued advice to people on how to protect
their health. This advice warned that it only took two
consecituve days of high temperatures to have significant
effects on peoples health. It said that people who
became overheated and dehydrated ran the risk of
irreversible damage to the body or even death.
(Adapted from news@nature.com)
1.

What is the type of the text?


Report
Narration
Exposition
Description
News item

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.

What is the organization of the text?


a. Orientation-events-evaluation
b. Orientation-complication-resolution
c. Thesis-arguments-reiteration
d. Thesis-events-complication- resolution
e. Abstract- orientation-events- resolution

3.

What is the communicative purpose of the text?


a. To persuade the readers to do something
b. To tell the readers about certain events
c. To inform the readers about the danger of cold
d. To share an amusing incident with the readers
e. To state a point of view or arguments about the
problems caused by the weather

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

4.

The text mainly discussed about___ .


a. the effects of cold weather
b. cold weather causes many illnesses
c. people died due to the cold weather
d. the problems arouse during cold weather time
e. the Europeans against the cold weather

5.

From the text above we can infer that the number of


people died due to the weather in Europe is___ than
that of in the France.
a. lower
b. higher
c. the same
d. fewer
e. less

6.

Every year thousands of people die, due to


wheather related problems
From the sentence above we can conclude that___
a. weather can spread illnesses
b. its better to avoid the weather
c. many people died because of the weather
d. we have to be careful with the weather
e. winter and summer are dangerous weather

Number 7 8
If youre finding it too hot , take my advice and
have lots of cold showers. And remember, only mad
dogs and Englishmen go out in the midday sun! said
the British people.
7.

The statement above give us a/an ___ .


a. greeting
b. sympathy
c. prohibition
d. suggestion
e. expectation

8.

From the statement above, we may conclude that to


against the hot weather ___ .
a. we may go out in the midday sun
b. we should have lots of cold showers
c. we shouldnt go out with a crazy dog
d. we should keep some advices
e. we had better not take the shower

9.

Lita
Dewi

: Whats Hanas husband like?


: Well, hes tall and still very young. He
has a white skin.
Lita
: Is he handsome?
Dewi : Yes, he is not only handsome but also a
very good Balinese dancer.
From the dialogue above we may conclude that
Hanas husband is ___ .
a. a tall young handsome man
b. a handsome white tall dancer
c. tall young handsome Balinese dancer

91

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
d.
e.

a handsome young tall white man


a handsome tall young Balinese dancer

c.
d.
e.

because
in spite of
although

10. To face the rainy season, most of the victims of the

earthquake in Jogjakarta and Central Java has


built__ .
a. a small simple Javanese bamboo house
b. a simple Javanese bamboo house small
c. a Javanese small simple bamboo house
d. a small simple bamboo Javanese house
e. a house of simple small Javanese bamboo
11. X

Y
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Excuse me, sir!


___, the parking lot is over there.
: Oh, I am sorry. I dont know about it.
you may park
you ought to park
you dont have to park
you are supposed to park
you are not allowed to park

12. Asih

Fina
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Id like to go on a sight seing this


afternoon. What about you, Fina? Will
you accompany me?
: ___, what time shall we start?

Yes, sure
Sorry I cant
See you later
It doesnt matter
Im sorry to hear that

13. Sunu

: Desi is let again.


Subur : He is never on time.
___ she ought to wake earlier

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

I hope
I think
I dont care
I dislike
I disagree that

14. Dewi

: Do you know the man talking to Mr Dars?


: Yes, he is my employer ___ promote me
to be a new branch manager.
who
whom
whose
which
from which

16. Their houses were ruined by earthquake and so were

all their possessions. They ___ in poverly ever since.


are living
were living
lives
have lived
had been living

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

17. Desi

: Excuse me. Do you think the bus will


leave on time?
Lisa : Yes, I am sure it will.
The underlined utterance expresses ___ .
a. plan
b. pleasure
c. certainty
d. disappointed
e. possibility

18. Yoga

: Hi, Ryan. I havent seen you a long time


where have you been?
Ryan : Ive been to Jakarta. Ive got a job. Ive
been working for a logging company.
Yoga : Really? ___ .
a. You are very good
b. thats all right
c. Im sorry to hear that
d. Im glad to hear that
e. Oh my God

19. John

: Why do you look so sad?


: Didnt you hear the news ___ that the
volcanic eruption had killed more than 2
hundreds people in my village?
John : Oh, I am sorry to hear that.
a. to be informed
b. informs
c. informed
d. informing
e. to inform
Nina

Supri
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

20. She felt very exhausted and almost giving up.

The underlined words have similar meaning to___ .


a. difficult
b. hungry
c. thirsty
d. tired
e. wild

15. Sina

: You look delighted with your new


profession.
Dars : Youre right. My family and I are more
contented with this job as an academic
coordinator, ___ I earn less than my
previous occupation.
a. when
b. since

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

92

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal 3
Once upon a time, a rabbit wanted to cross a river
but e could not swim. He had an idea. He saw a boss of
crocodile swimming in the river. The rabbit asked the
boss of crocodile, How many crocodiles are there in the
river? The boss of crocodile answered, We are twenty
here. Where are they? the rabbit asked for the second
time. What is it for? the boss of crocodile asked.
All of you are good, nice, gentle and kind, so I
want to make a line in order. Later I will know how kind
you are, said the rabbit. Then, the boss of the crocodile
called all his friends and asked them to make a line in
order from one side to the other side of the river. Just
then, the rabbit started to count while jumping from one
crocodile to another; onetwothree.four.until
twenty, and finally, he thanked all crocodiles because he
had crossed the river.
1.

The story mainly tells us about .


a. twenty crocodiles
b. the boss of the crocodile
c. a rabbit and twenty crocodiles
d. a rabbit and the boss of crocodile
e. the boss of the crocodile and all his friends

2.

We know from the first paragraph that the rabbit


actually wanted .
a. to cross the river
b. to swim across the river
c. to meet the boss of crocodile
d. to know where the crocodiles are
e. to know the number of crocodiles there

3.

All of you are good, nice, gentle, and kind


(Paragraph 2)
The underlined word is synonymous with .
a. wild
b. diligent
c. cheerful
d. easygoing
e. honorable

A fox fell into a well and couldnt get out. By and


by a thirsty goat came along. Seeing the fox in the well it
asked if the water was good. Good, said the fox Its
the best water Ive tasted in all my life. Come down and
try it yourself.
The goat was thirsty so he got into the well. When
he had drunk enough, he looked around but there was no
way to get out. Then the fox said, I have a good idea.
You stand on your hind legs and put your forelegs
against the side of the well. Then Ill climb on your back,
from there. Ill step on your horns, and I can get out. And
when Im out, Ill help you out of the well.
The goat did as he was asked and the fox got on
his back and climbed out of the well. Then he coolly
walked away. The goat called out loudly after him and
reminded him of his promise to help him out. The fox
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

merely turned to him and said; If you only had thought


carefully about getting out, you wouldnt have jumped
into the well.
The goat felt very sad. He called out loudly. An
old man walking nearby heard him and put a plank into
the well. The goat got out and thanked the old man.
4.

The text tells the story of .


a. a fox
b. a goat
c. a fox and a goat
d. an old man and the fox
e. the goat and an old man

5.

Paragraph 2 mainly tells .


a. how the fox helped the goat
b. why the fox got into the well
c. how the fox got out of the well
d. the foxs idea how to get out of the well
e. how both the goat and the fox got out of the
well

6.

The goat did as he was asked. (Paragraph 3)


What does the above sentence mean?
a. The goat drank enough and locked around.
b. The goat came down to the well and drank.
c. The goat called out loudly after the fox got out.
d. The goat waited someone who might help him.
e. The goat stood on his hind legs and put his
forelegs against the side of the well.

The Police thought that two burglars started the


robbery at 151 Pattimura street on Sunday afternoon.
The burglars broke into the students room while they
were going to a football game. They never thought that
while they were away, burglars would break into their
boarding house.
7.

What happened to the students room on Sunday


afternoon?
a. The police broke it.
b. The police ruined it.
c. Burglars broke into it.
d. Two burglars broke it.
e. The students started to ruin it.

8.

The burglars broke into the room when the students


.
a. were at a party
b. were talking a rest
c. were playing football
d. were at a football game
e. were watching football on TV

93

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
9.

The burglars broke into the students room .


The underlined phrase means .
a. broke forcefully
b. entered by force
c. put into pieces
d. easily entered
e. came into

10. The students seem to think that .


a. they had locked their room
b. their boarding house was not safe
c. their boarding house was in a safe area
d. thieves would easily break into their room
e. there would be a robbery in their boarding
house
The elephant is the largest and strongest of all
animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs,
huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail,
little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long
nose, the trunk.
The trunk is the elephants peculiar feature, and it
has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its
trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower
bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth.
In fact the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and
hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet
it can move very quickly.
The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its
intelligent combined with its great strength makes it a
very useful servant to man and it can be trained to serve
in various ways such as carry heavy loads, hunt for tigers
and even fight.
11. The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that .
a. elephants are strong
b. elephants can lift logs
c. elephants are servants
d. elephants are very useful
e. elephants must be trained
12. Which of the following is NOT part of the elephant
described in the first paragraph?
a. It looks strange.
b. It is heavy.
c. It is wild.
d. It has a trunk.
e. It has a small tail.
13. It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the trunk
to do the following, EXCEPT.
a. to eat
b. to push
c. to drink
d. to carry things
e. to squirt water over the body

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

14. The trunk is the elephant a peculiar feature .


(Paragraph 2)
The underlined word is close in meaning to .
a. large
b. strange
c. tough
d. smooth
e. long
15. Nola : Do you know the boy sitting next to the
man with the red polka dot shirt?
Neli : He is Denis .father is a tycoon.
Nola : Oh, I see.
a. who
b. whom
c. whose
d. which
e. where
16. Ferdi : Do you see the large field over there?
Hasan : Yes, what is it for?
Ferdi : Thats the land .is provided for the
elephants to live.
a. who
b. whom
c. where
d. which
e. whose
: I finally could buy the Chevrolet that I
17. Bobby
had dreamed of for years.
Withney : Oh, congratulations. Is it the one
.you showed me yesterday?
a. whom
b. where
c. who
d. which
e. whose
18. Read the following sentences. They are not in a
good order.
1. Enter the 14 digits.
2. How to charge your cell phone card.
3. Dial 222 C or OK.
4. Press 1 to get the charge option.
5. The amount of the voucher will be
automatically added onto your card.
6. First scratch the black area.
7. To check the remaining pulse credit dial *222#.
The right arrangement of the sentences above is .
a. 1 7 3 4 6 2 5
b. 2 6 3 4 1 5 7
c. 3 4 5 7 6 1 2
d. 5 3 7 6 4 2 1
e. 6 4 1 7 5 2 3

94

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
19. X
Y

: Hi I am Agung. Nice to meet you.


: My name is Juli. Nice to meet you, too.
a. This is my friend, Agung.
b. Allow me to introduce myself
c. Let me introduce you to my friend
d. What do you do?
e. How are you doing?

20. Retno
Andri
Retno
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: I called Joko last night.


: What?
: I said I .Joko last night.
have called
had called
would call
had to call
called

21. Iwan has gotten three promotions at this


company a year ago.
a. since he started working
b. when he has started working
c. before he had started working
d. until he is starting working
e. after he was starting working
22. Oy
Ani

: I forgot to bring my dictionary.?


: Sure, here it is.
a. Could you lend me yours, please
b. This dictionary is yours, isnt it
c. Is your dictionary new
d. Could I lend you
e. How about you

23. Lusi

: Have you heard that Mr. Yayan passed


away last night?
Ranto : Really? I dont believe it. Yesterday I
met him at the wedding party of my
neighbor.
Lusi
: Yeah, he had a heart attack last night.
Ranto : Oh, Im really sorry to hear that.
The underlined expression expresses .
a. ability
b. surprise
c. certainty
d. possibility
e. sympathy

24. Rangga

: My friend will hold a mask party next


week. Will you join us?
Dion
: Sounds interesting! But I have an
appointment with my boss.
From the dialogue we know that Dion .
a. will join Rangga
b. wont join Rangga
c. likes to go to the party
d. promises to go to the party
e. is not interested in going to the party

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

25. Totty

: Dad, can I use your car? I want to borrow


Aris camera.
Daddy : ? I need the car to go to the barber.
a. Why dont you use your motor cycle
b. Why dont you lend Fuads
c. Is Aris camera a good one
d. Does Ari have a camera
e. Does Ari want the car

26. Jack : Did Jane call you?


Bob : What?
Jack : I wanted to know if .
a. you had called Jane.
b. Jane called you.
c. you called Jane.
d. you have called Jane.
e. Jane had called you.
27. Anto :
Ani :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

You look very busy with your work?


Sure. If you dont mind. How kind you are.
Can you do me a favour
Can I help you
Would you like to help me
Do you like to help me
Are you tired

28. Andri : May I use your car to Rinas house, Dad?


Father : Of course. Be careful.
From the underlined words we may conclude that
Andri asks for . to his father to use his car.
a. permission
b. agreement
c. possibility
d. suggestion
e. advice
29. Father
: When will you harvest your crops?
Adi
: Next week.
: I hope you will have a bumper crop.
Father
The underlined sentence expresses.
a. desire
b. permission
c. certainly
d. expectation
e. sympathy
30. Ridwan
: Im afraid my parents rice fields
were damaged by the flood.
Pak Yusuf : Oh, Im sorry to hear that.
The underlined words express.
a. sorry
b. apology
c. sympathy
d. intolerance
e. complaint

95

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
31. X

36. Tony

32. Lisa
Wita
Lisa

37. Dinda

: Good morning, Madam. Anything I can do


for you?
Y : Yes, please. I need a T-shirt size 15.
The dialogue likely occurs.
a. at home
b. at a store
c. at a tailor
d. at a school
e. at the office
: What is your plan for the holiday?
: I have no idea.
: What about having a picnic to Lake
Toba, Wita?
Wita
: Id love to, but I have to attend a
seminar.
What are the speakers talking about?
a. Going to Witas house.
b. Attending a seminar.
c. Going to Lake Toba.
d. Spending their time.
e. Planning to spend a holiday.

33. Galih

: Dody, may I borrow your mobile


phone?
I want to call my girlfriend.
Dody
: I am afraid not. I am charging the
battery.
The underlined utterance expresses .
a. giving information
b. asking for explanation
c. giving a permission
d. refusing a permission
e. asking for information

: The Indonesian Olympics contingent had


just arrived from Athens. They brought
one gold medal, one silver and two
bronze medals.
Daddy : Yeah, we have to be proud of them.
The underlined sentence is used to express .
a. apology
b. pleasure
c. pride
d. certainty
e. satisfaction

Tina
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
38. A :
B:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

How was the result of your test?


I am really.I got a good score.
disappointed
appreciated
excited
satisfied
dedicated

39. Agus
Rini
Budi
a.
b.

34. Mom
Nindy
Ninin
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Girls, make up your beds!


: What did mom say to you just now?
: She asked usour beds.
make up
made up
to make up
making up
should make up

35. Budi : Good morning, Rina. Did you see Susi?


Rina : Yes, I did. She to Mr. Yusuf when I
entered the office just now.
a. talks
b. talked
c. has talked
d. would talk
e. was talking

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Tina, .take this document to the


Accounting. Department?
: Yes, certainly. Im free now.
cant you please
is it possible for you to
may I tell you to
can I tell you to
should I ask you to

c.
d.
e.
40. Andi
Sari
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Send me a postcard of Borobudur, Budi.


: What did Agus say to you, Budi?
: .
She told me to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
I told her to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
He told me to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
He told you to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
I told him to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
: Which book do you look for?
: I look for ..
Which book I buy?
A book which I brought yesterday
Which book did you buy yesterday?
A book which it is about dream
Which book do you ask me, Andi?

96

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Read the text carefully
This text is for questions number 1-5!

2.

Why the man got so angry and tried to kill the


Parrot?
a. because the parrot could not say even one
word
b. because the parrot could say Catano
c. because the parrot hate the man
d. because the parrot could say every word
except Catano
e. because the parrot is stupid

3.

What is Catano?
a. the name of the Parrot
b. the name of the man
c. the name of the place where the parrot was
born
d. the name of the place where the man was
born
e. the name of the chicken house

4.

The first paragraph of the text above is called


.. part
a. resolution
b. orientation
c. reorientation
d. complication
e. reiteration

5.

Although he tried hard to teach,. (Paragraph


3). The word he refers to.
a. the man
b. the parrot
c. Catano
d. the Chicken
e. the Chicken house

The Smartest Parrot


Once upon time, a man had a wonderful parrot.
There was no other parrot like it. The parrot could say
every word, except one word. The parrot would not say
the name of the place where it was born. The name of the
place was Catano.
The man felt excited having the smartest parrot
but he could not understand why the parrot would not
say Catano. The man tried to teach the bird to say Catano
however the bird kept not saying the word.
At the first, the man was very nice to the bird but
then he got very angry. You stupid bird! pointed the
man to the parrot. Why cant you say the word? Say
Catano! Or I will kill you the man said angrily.
Although he tried hard to teach, the parrot would not say
it. Then the man got so angry and shouted to the bird
over and over; Say Catano or Ill kill you. The bird
kept not to say the word of Catano.
One day, after he had been trying so many times
to make the bird say Catano, the man really got very
angry. He could not bear it. He picked the parrot and
threw it into the chicken house. There were four old
chickens for next dinner You are as stupid as the
chickens. Just stay with them Said the man angrily.
Then he continued to humble; You know, I will cut the
chicken for my meal. Next it will be your turn, I will eat
you too, stupid parrot. After that he left the chicken
house.
The next day, the man came back to the chicken
house. He opened the door and was very surprised. He
could not believe what he saw at the chicken house.
There were three death chickens on the floor. At the
moment, the parrot was standing proudly and screaming
at the last old chicken; Say Catano or Ill kill you.
1.

From the text above, we know that the social


function of the text is
a. to persuade
b. to describe
c. to explain
d. to entertain
e. to advertise

Text 2
This text is for questions number 6-10!
Conventionally, students need book, pen, eraser,
drawing book, ruler and such other stuff. Additionally, in
this multimedia era, students need more to reach their
progressive development. Students need mobile
keyboards to record every presented subject easily. Of
course it will need more cost but it will deserve for its
function.
First, modern schools tend to apply fast
transferring knowledge because the school needs to catch
the target of curriculum. Every subject will tend to be
given in demonstrative method. Consequently students
need extra media cover the subject. Since there is a
laptop on every students desk, this method will help
student to get better understanding.
Secondly, finding an appropriate laptop is not
difficult as it was. Recently there is an online shop which

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

97

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
provides comprehensive information. The best is that the
shop has service of online shopping. The students just
need to brows that online shop, decide which computer
or laptop they need, and then complete the transaction.
After that the laptop will be delivered to the students'
houses. That is really easy and save time and money.
From all of that, having mobile computer is
absolutely useful for students who want to catch the best
result for their study. Buying laptop online is advisable
because it will cut the price. This online way is
recommended since online shop also provides several
laptop types. Students just need to decide which type
they really need.
6.

7.

What is the main idea of the third paragraph?


a. the laptop will be delivered to the students'
houses
b. finding an appropriate laptop is easy
c. there is an online shop which provides
comprehensive information
d. the students just need to brows online shop
e. buying laptop in online shop is difficult
Which of the following is NOT TRUE based on
the text above?
a. students need laptop to reach their
progressive development
b. there is an online shop which provides
comprehensive information
c. finding an appropriate laptop is difficult
mobile computer
online is
d. buying
recommended
e. students can buy laptop at online shop

8.

The word advisable in the last paragraph has the


same meaning with ..
a. recommended
b. important
c. cheap
d. difficult
e. easy

9.

What is the appropriate title for the text above?


a. students have been in multimedia era
b. students need to have laptop
c. online shop is the best way to buy laptop
d. buying laptop in online shop is not difficult
e. the importance of having laptop

10.

What is the genre of the text above?


a. narrative
b. report
c. hortatory exposition
d. analytical exposition
e. descriptive

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 3
This text is for questions number 11-15!
An elephant is the largest and strongest of all
animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs,
huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail,
little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long
nose, the trunk.
The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature, and it
has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its
trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower
bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth.
In fact, the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and
hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet
it can move very quickly.
The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its
intelligence combined with its great strength makes it a
very useful servant to men and it can be trained to serve
in various ways such as carrying heavy loads, hunting for
tigers and even fighting.
11.

The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that

a. elephants are strong


b. elephants can lift logs
c. elephants are servants
d. elephants are very useful
e. elephants must be trained

12.

Which of the following is NOT part of the


elephant described in the first paragraph?
a. It looks strange
b. It is heavy
c. It is wild
d. It has a trunk
e. It has a small tail

13.

It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the


trunk to do the following, EXCEPT ..
a. to eat
b. to push
c. to drink
d. to carry things
e. to squirt water over the body

14.

What is the communicative purpose of the text


above?
a. To inform the readers about the
characteristics of an elephant
b. To persuade the readers to protect elephants
c. To make the readers realize the existence of
elephants
d. To tell the readers about the advantages of an
elephant
e. To give arguments about the benefits of an
elephant

98

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
15.

The trunk is the elephant's peculiar feature ...


(Paragraph 2)
The underlined word is close in meaning to
a. large
b. strange
c. tough
d. smooth
e. long

Text 4
This text is for questions number 16-20!
Germinating Petunia Seeds
Follow these instructions to germinate petunia seeds.
You will need:
a packet of petunia seeds
a seed tray or small pots
loamy friable soil or potting mix
water
fertilizer.
Steps:
1. Fill seed tray with soil.
2. Incorporate fertilizer into soil.
3. Scatter seeds on the surface of the soil.
4. Cover seeds with a 3 mm layer of soil. Press firmly.
5. Spray water to moisten the seed bed.
6. Place seed tray in warm, sunny position (at least 25
deg. C).
Keep soil moist by watering gently while seeds are
germinating. Seeds will germinate in approximately 10 14 days.
16.

17.

What is the purpose of this text?


a. To inform the readers about the materials
needed to germinate petunia seeds
b. To describe the characteristics of petunia
seeds
c. To tell the readers the function of petunia
seeds
d. To tell the readers why we should germinate
petunia seeds
e. To tell the readers how to germinate petunia
seeds

a.

19. Follow these instructions to germinate petunia seeds.


The underlined word means .
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

b. grow

c. fertilize

d. increase

e.

20. Cover seeds with a 3 mm layer of soil. Press firmly.


The underlined word has similar meaning with to
a.
fairly hard
quite gently
b.
rather quickly
c.
softly
d.
e.
slowly
Text 5
This text is for questions number 21-22!
NOW
OPEN
On 20th May 2009
Fashion Outlet
Neptune
Jl. Kiara Asri Raya No. 36 Bandung
21. What is the function of the text ?
To inform readers that there was a new outlet
a.
opened.
To persuade readers that the outlet should be
b.
opened.
c.
To retell the events of the outlet opening
ceremony.
d.
To present two points of view about a new outlet.
To explain the processes of the outlet opening.
e.
22. How long has the outlet been opening?
a.
2 months b. 3 months
c. 4 months
months e. 6 months

d. 5

Text 6
This text is for questions number 23-25!
Metros 10th Anniversary
Sale is now on!!
Up to 70% discount
Free gift for the first 100 shoppers
TODAY ONLY

How many materials do you need to germinate


petunia seeds?
b. 5
c. 6
d. 7
e. 8
a. 4

18. What should you do after putting the soil on the pot?
Mix the soil with the fertilizer
a.
b.
Scatter the seeds on the surface of the soil
c.
Press the soil firmly
Put the pot in sunny position
d.
e.
Incorporate the soil, seeds, and fertilizer together

make
add

Lucky Draw for


every purchase
above Rp 600.000
in a single receipt

Gold Royal Silverware 70% off


Sowaridi Chrystal Earrings 70% off
Designer Label purse 55% off
Charles and Keith Shoes

99

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

23.

Usual price
Rp 400.000
Now
Rp 200.000
Many more.
Based on the text above, why Metro is giving
discounts?
a. to invite more buyers
b. to celebrate Metros 10th Anniversary
c. to celebrate the first opening day
d. to cheat the people
e. to increase the selling rate

24.

How much is Charles and Keith shoes in sale day?


a. Rp. 120.000
b. Rp. 180.000
c. Rp. 200.000
d. Rp. 400.000
e. Rp. 600.000

25.

How can you get lucky draw?


a. You go to Metro
b. You are the first 100 shoppers
c. You buy things above Rp. 600.000 in a single
receipt
d. You buy Charles and Keith shoes
e. You buy Charles and Keith shoes for over
Rp. 400.000

26.

: Paul didnt pass his English course


test.
Dicky : He must be
disappointed.
a. It is not my business
b. Dont care
c. Really?
d. Im definitely sure about it
e. Im sorry to hear that

29.

Rio

30.

Bella
Lindy
Bella
Lindy

31.

Rian

My friend says he plans ...next year


a. studied
b. studying
c. study
d. to study
e. studies

28.

Fira
Dino
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Where were you yesterday?


: Oh, Im very sorry. Wemy
grandma when you phoned me.
visited
had visited
were visiting
visit
visiting

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

:
:
:
:

Im Bella.
Pleased to meet you Bella. Im Lindy.
Pleased to meet you too.
Would you like to join us to celebrate
our success?
The underlined sentence means
a. for meeting
b. asking for something
c. invitation
d. greeting
e. asking refuse the invitation

Jhon
a. whom
b. when
c. where
d. whose
e. who

Peter

27.

: . to go camping with us
tomorrow?
Tom : Oh dear! Im sorry I cant I have to finish
my homework.
a. Do you like
b. Have you tried
c. Can you follow me?
d. Would you like
e. Will you come

: Jhon, do you know the man..is


parking the car over there?
I watched him on TV last night.
: No, I dont know him

32.

: Well, Ferdi, do you think you have


passed?
Ferdi
: No, definitely not. I thought the
paper was terrible. I havent got a
hope of getting through.
The underlined part of the dialogue express.
a. displeasure
b. incapability
c. uncertainty
d. dissatisfaction
e. disappointment

33.

She is a professional .
a. beautiful
b. beauty
c. beautifully
d. beautician
e. beautify

34.

His directions how to get the station were


quite.
a. clearly
b. clear
c. clearing
d. clearness
e. clearity

Tidi

100

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
35.

Meta
Ben

: Hello.
: Hello, Meta. Do you feel like going
to a movie this evening?
Meta
: Thats sounds great, Ben. I havent
been to a movie for a long time.
The underlined utterance expresses.
a. persuasion
b. permission
c. suggestion
d. intention
e. invitation

Text 7
This text is for questions number 36-40
Television has a great influence on our ideas about
that is right and wrong, about the way we should behave,
and about life in general. Sometimes the value and life
.(36) that we get from television are in ..(37)
with those that are taught at home and school. Critics of
TV (38) that crime and western programs often
(39) to a taste of violence while many game shows
appeal to greed. Many critics also believe that television
should be used for .(40) constructive purpose as
well as for entertainment.
36.

a. challenge
b. objectives
c. styles
d. skills
e. competitions

37.

a. line
b. conflict
c. accordance
d. favor
e. dealing

38.

a. find out
b. carry out
c. take out
d. look out
e. point out

39.

a. prevent
b. minimize
c. appeal
d. remove
e. wipe

40.

a. social
b. socialize
c. socially
d. socialized
e. socializing

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

41.

My uncle .. advised me to take English


lesson.
a. strength
b. strong
c. strengthening
d. strongly
e. strengthen

42.

Annisa
Mother
Annisa

43.

Change the sentence into passive


Active sentence : They are building a new train
station.
Passive sentence : A new station
.
a. was being built
b. was built
c. would be built
d. is being built
e. is built

44.

Susi : My father died because of tsunami in


Aceh.
Rina : I am sorry to hear that.
The underlined utterance is an expression of
..
a. expressing regret
b. expressing disbelief
c. attracting attention
d. showing sympathy
e. expressing disappointment

45.

The author . novels for years, before he wrote


a book of property.
a. had written
b. wrote
c. has written
d. writes
e. is writing

46.

Adi and Roy are brothers, but they look very


..
a. differs
b. differential
c. difference
d. differently
e. different

: Good morning, Mom.


: Good morning, Annisa.
: Mom, may I invite some of my
classmate to our party?
Mother
: Yes, certainly.
The underlined utterance above expresses.
a. Preference
b. Permission
c. Invitation
d. Prohibition
e. Obligation

101

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
47.

Are you invited to the party?


Yes, here is the card.
a. invited
b. invitation
c. inviting
d. invite
e. invitational

48.

I cant find my cellphone.


Well, you .. in the car. Lets take a look.
a. may have to leave it
b. may have left it
c. should have left it
d. have to leave it
e. must leave it

49.

Student : Excuse me, Sir. May I go to the


restroom?
Teacher : Yes, but dont forget to return
immediately.
From the dialogue we know that the teacher

a. gives advice to the student


b. asks for permission to the student
c. allows the student to go to the restroom
d. doesnt agree with the student
e. doesnt allow the student to go to the
restroom

50.

I . All over the place for my dictionary


when I suddenly remembered that my sister had
borrowed it.
a. looked
b. am looking
c. was looking
d. have looked
e. have been looking

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

102

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Read the text carefully and answer the questions!
Text 1
Many years ago, there lived a hermit in a forest in
Sumatera. He did not grow foods but depended on the
jungle to survive. Soon, there was a drought, all the
plants and fruit trees in the jungle died
The old man had nothing to eat now, so he turned
to begging. He went to nearby village trying to get some
food. At first, the villagers were very happy to help him.
However, when he came continually, they refused to
give him any more food. They told him to grow his own
food.
One day, while the hermit was sitting in his hut,
sad and hungry, he began to think about growing his own
food. Just then a boatman stopped by and taking on the
hermit, gave him some rice seeds.
Before the boatman went away, he said, These
seeds will grow and give you everlasting harvest if you
work very hard. If you are tired of the work, the rice
plants will turn into weeds.
The old hermit worked hard to clear the land and
sowed the seeds before the rains came. Strangely, after a
short period of time, the rice was ready for harvesting.
The old man got a lot of rice from the harvest. After each
harvest, the plants grew back again right away.
When the villagers heard about the hermit and his
wonderful rice, they flocked to his rice-field and took
home as much rice as they could.
One day, the hermit became so tired of harvesting
the rice that she shouted. Oh, stop growing, you
wretched thing! As soon as he had said this, the rice
plants turned into weeds.
1.

What is the type of the text?


a. Narrative
b. descriptive
c. Argument
d. Persuasive
e. Exposition

2.

What did the boatman give to the hermit?


a. Fruit tree
b. Some food
c. Rice plants
d. Some weeds
e. Some rice seeds

3.

Which statement is true about the hermit?


a. He lived a small town
b. He went to the village to ask for some food
c. He liked to give the villagers fruit and rice
d. He died in the jungle when there was a
drought
e. He hated begging through there was nothing
to eat

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

4.

What is the main idea of paragraph 5?


a. The succession of rice harvest
b. The hermit should clear the land
c. The hermit was successful as a farmer
d. It needed a short of time to harvest the rice
e. The seeds should be shown before the rains
came

Text 2
In autumn, the color of the leaves changes into
beautiful yellow, red, and brown. Do you know how this
happens? To answer the questions, first we have to
understand about leaves.
Leaves are the food factories of plants. Plants take
water from the ground through their roots and they take
carbon dioxide from the air. Plants need glucose for
energy and for their growth.
The plants use sunlight to turn water and carbon
dioxide into glucose. The process is called
photosynthesis and substances process. The trees will
rest, and use the food that they have stored during
summer. The trees begin to close their food factories.
The green chlorophyll substance disappears from the
leaves. As the leaves begin to lose their green color, they
change into beautiful yellow and orange.
In some trees, like maple tree, glucose is trapped
in the leaves after the photosynthesis process stops.
Sunlight and cool rights turn the green color of the leaves
into red. Oak leaves become brown because of wastes
that are left in the leaves. This combination of red and
brown makes the trees look very beautiful in autumn.
5.

What is the best title of the text above?


a. The changes of leaves
b. The seasons
c. Photosynthesis
d. The trees
e. Beautiful Autumn

6.

How many kind of trees are there mentioned in


the text?
a.1
b.2
c.3
d.4
e.5

7.

A part of trees which is used to take water from


the ground is .
a. leave
b. branch
c. fruit
d. root
e. chlorophyll

103

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
8.

When do trees produce their food?


a. in summer
b. in autumn
c. in winter
d. in spring
e. in fall

9.

What makes the trees look beautiful in autumn?


a. Because their leaves are doing photosynthesis
b. Because the trees will rest and use their food
c. Because they have stored their food
d. Because the sunlight and cool nights turn the
color of leaves in maple tree
e. Because the leaves color of trees change into
beautiful combination of colors.

Text 3
At the birth of the Indonesian nation 1945,
Australia and Indonesia shared a positive and friendly
relationship. In 1947 Australia supported Indonesias
struggle for independence by placing embargos on Dutch
supplies, arms and troops. Australian dock workers went
on strike and significant numbers of Australians
demonstrated in the streets in support of Indonesian
independence. The Dutch were unable to ship supplies
through Australian ports during this period.
Much of the support Australians gave to
Indonesians was based on the friendship that developed
between Australian soldiers and the Indonesia people at
the end of the Second World War. There was also a
strong anti-imperialist mood among some sections of the
Australian population at that time. It is significant that
Australia supported her Asian neighbors against a
European colonial.
10.

What is the passage about?


a. A strong anti imperialist mood
b. The Indonesias struggle for the
independence
c. The early friendship between Indonesia and
Australia
d. The relationship between Australian and
Indonesian people
e. The influence of the second World War on
Indonesia and Australia

11.

What is the meaning of embargo?


a. prohibition
b. permission
c. alignment
d. shipping
e. agreement

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

12.

Indonesian and Australian shared positive and


______ relationship at the birth of the Indonesian
nation.
a. clear
b. significant
c. friendly
d. long lasting
e. friendship

13.

Which of the following statement is not correct


according to the text above?
a. going on strike
b. demonstrating in the streets
c. placing embargoes on Dutch supplies
d. shipping Dutch supplies through Australian
ports

14.

Tia
: Dad, may I go with Ajie this evening?
Dad : Be sure to be home before 9.
From the underlined words we know that father
Tia to go with Ajie to the cinema
a. warns
b. forbids
c. suggests
d. allows
e. advices

15.

X : Excuse me! .?
Y : Oh, Thank you. I think I can handle it myself.
a. Can I do something for you?
b. Could you help me with this?
c. Could you lift this bag for me?
d. Will you do me a favour
e. Is there something you can do for me

16.

Rani

: You know the horrible flood has


destroyed many houses in Kendal last
night.
Dian
: Really? Im so sorry about it. If I were
a millionaire, I would help the victims
to build their houses.
From the underlined words we know that
a. Dian is a millionaire so she builds many new
houses
b. Dian has no money to build new houses
c. Dian plans to build new houses for the
victims
d. Dian and Rani have no money to build new
houses
e. Rani asks Dian to build new houses for the
victims

17.

This is a very popular TV program. Every week it


. by many people.
a. watches
b. being watch
c is watched
d. has been watching
e. to be watched

104

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
18.

Our school . here next year


a. is going to rebuild
b. is building rebuild
c. will be rebuilt
d. is to be rebuilt
e. is rebuilt

21.

What does Honey refer to ?


a. A letter
b. A diary
c. A note
d. A book
e. A report

22.

The type of the text is


a. narrative
b. procedure
c. recount
d. descriptive

23.

The writer wrote about


a. Her dream
b. Her study
c. Her past time
d. Her lesson
e. Her scholarship

24.

The writer was born


a. in 1932
b. In 1972
c. In 1973
d. in 1974
e. 32 years ago

Text 4
INTEROFFICE MEMO
Meeting in the boardroom on Friday, July 10 at 10 am
has been changed to Monday, July 13. Same time, same
place. Please bring the notes of the previous meeting.
Director
19.

20.

The text above is .


a. An invitation
b. An announcement
c. An agreement
d. An intention
e. A news
Which of the statement below is not true
according to the text?
a. It is second meeting
b. They had another meeting before
c. The place and the time are charged
d. The meeting will be on Monday
e. The text is a note

Text 5
December, 2005
Dear Honey,
Im so excited. Finally, I got something. Ive been
dreaming of, but it was not so easy to get it. Let look
back to my past. I was born thirty-two years ago. I was
born in small village.
When I was a child, I was so naughty but so smart
according to my mother. I got the second rank when I
finished my elementary school, and in high school, I got
the first rank, thus I won the scholarship. I was so glad
and my parents were very proud of me. Then I went to
one of the best State University in Bandung. I took the
teacher training and education program. I majored in
English. I studied at the university for four years. There,
I used to be the best in all the subjects I took. In addition,
guess! I got the first rank from the first semester till the
last semester!. I won the scholarship for the third time. I
was active at the student organizations, and in many
activities such as discussions, seminars, trainings, etc. I
just began to learn computer programs after I graduated
from the university. Did you know that I worked part
time at a computer company while I was studying at the
university? It was very hard actually. Thank Honey, I
have written too much on you!

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 6
Two friends were traveling on the same road
together when they came face with a bear. One, in great
fear, and without a thought of his companion, climbed
into a tree and hid. The other, seeing that single handed
he was no match for the bear, threw himself on the
ground and feigned death, for he had heard that a bear
will not touch a dead body.
The bear approved him, sniffing at his nose and
ears, but the man, with great courage, held his breath and
kept still, and length the bear, supposing him to be dead,
walked slowly ahead.
When the bear was well out of sight the first
traveler came down from his tree and asked what it was
that the bear had said to him. For, said he, I observed
that he put his mouth very close to your ear. Why, he
replied the other, it was no great secret. He only advised
me not to keep company with those who, when they get
into difficulty, leave their friends in the lurch.
25.

What type of writing does this passage belongs


to?
a. Descriptive
b. Narrative
c. Explanation
d. Argumentative
e. Discussion

105

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

What is the orientation of the text above?


a. Two friends were traveling on the same road
together when they came face to face with a
bear
b. One in great fear, and without a thought of his
companion, climbed intro a tree and hid
c. When the bear was well out of sight the first
traveler came down from his tree and asked
whet is was that the bear had said to him
d. For, he said, I observed that he put his
mouth very close to you ear
e. Why, he replied the other, it was no great
secret.
Which of these phrases has similar meaning with
this phrase;
When the bear was well out of sight
a. The bear had lost his eyesight.
b. The bear had left the site.
c. The bear watched them from a far.
d. The traveler got blind.
e. The traveler got into difficulty
The word him in paragraph 2 line 3 refers to?
a. The bear
b. The firs traveler
c. The second traveler
d. Both traveler
e. The man
What is the moral for this story?
a. Pretend to be dead when you come face to
face with a bear.
b. A real friend will never leave his friends even
in difficult times.
c. A real friend will leave his friends in difficult
times.
d. Always bring a company when youre
traveling away.
e. Dont mess up with a bear.
: Randi, do you know the man is
parking the car over there?
I watched him on TV last night.
Randi : No, I dont know him.
a. whose
b. who
c. whom
d. when
e. where

32.

If I were you, I would leave for Jakarta soon.


From this sentence we can conclude that ..
a. I am you, so I leave for Jakarta
b. I was you, so I left for Jakarta
c. I am you, so I dont leave for Jakarta
d. I am not you, so I leave for Jakarta
e. I am not you, so I dont leave for Jakarta

33.

The man hit by a car yesterday would have died if


the doctors had not immediately operated on him.
a. The man will be immediately operated on
b. Its too late to save the men
c. The man died after the operation
d. The man still alive
e. The doctors didnt operated him

34.

Hary
: Ive got a terrible headache.
Rossy : Why dont you see the doctor?
From the expression, we know that Rossy ..
a. asks questions
b. gives order
c. gives advice
d. feels sorry
e. feels irritated

35.

Ridwan : Why dont you ride your motor


cycle to come here?
Raihan : It .. Last week
a. Has been sold
b. Has to sell
c. Had to sell
d. Wad sold
e. sells

36.

Randi

: Mom, I am nominated in the singing


contest.
Mother : Great, Im really proud of you.
The underlined utterance is an expression
a. will
b. hope
c. plan
d. pride
e. sad

37.

Fadli
Ari
Fadli

John

Which paintings will be exhibited tomorrow?


a. Are still being selected
b. Are still selected
c. Still be selected
d. Still selected
e. Still selecting

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Are you free today?


: Yes, whats up?
: Would you like to come with me to
watch the football match at Senayan?
Ari
: Thanks, Id be delighted to. Its my
favourite sport.
What are the speakers going to do?
a. To visit their friends house
b. To watch the football match
c. To enjoy their free time
d. To stay at home
e. To play football

106

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
38.

Mary : Why didnt you answer my call last


night?
John : I am sorry with my cousin
a. I was going out
b. I have gone out
c. I went out
d. I had gone out
e. I will go out

45.

The . . . of the new company is very enormous.


Now it has opened some new branches in many
different cities in the country.
a. develop
b. development
c. developing
d. developer
e. developed

39.

Berry

: Have you known your TOEFL


score?
Teddy
: Not yet. It .. next week.
a. Will have being announce
b. Will be announced
c. Is being announced
d. To be announced
e. Is announced

46.

The new cigarette product is very popular among


the young people. The new product is . . .
advertised on TV.
a. nation
b. nationally
c. national
d. nationalize
e. nationalization

40.

The antique building .. in 17th century.


a. build
b. builds
c. is built
d. was built
e. being built

47.

The people begin to show their . . . to the new


established government system.
a. appreciate
b. appreciable
c. appreciative
d. appreciably
e. appreciation

41.

Indonesian Batik is recognized.


a. international
b. internationalized
c. internationalization
d. internationality
e. internationalizing

48.

His parents are very kind. They let all their


children . . . some courses to sharpen their kills.
a. To take
b. Taking
c. Take
d. They take
e. Are to take

49.

Student : . . . . . . to carry these books to your


room, sir?
Teacher : . . . . . . No, thanks, I can do it myself.
a. Do you want
b. Shall I do
c. Can you help you
d. May I help you
e. Do you mind

42.

The doctor gained immediate . . . for his great


discovery.
a. recognition
b. recognize
c. recognizing
d. recognizable
e. recognized

43.

The room has been . . . decorated for the wedding


party.
a. Very beautiful
b. A beauty
c. beautifully
d. beautify
e. beautified

44.

Forests yield many . . . which are very beneficial


for the local people and
those who leave in
the cities.
a. producers
b. products
c. productively
d. productivity
e. productive

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

107

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Text 2

Text 1
112 Die in France from July Heat Wave

United Kingdom

A heat wave that struck Europe last month killed


112 people in France, on Thursday, many of them were
elderly. Of the people whose deaths were attributed to
the sweltering temperatures in France, 66 of them were
age 75 or up. French officials said, This year people
must be more careful to avoid a repeat of the summer of
2003, when 15,000 people, most of them elderly, died of
heat related causes.

The United Kingdom is a constitutional monarchy


comprising of four constituent countries; England,
Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. The first three
situated in Great Britain, which is an island that lies off
the North West coast of Europe. The island is surrounded
by the Atlantic Ocean to the west, and the North Sea to
the east. Meanwhile, Northern Ireland is located in
Ireland, which is an island that lies off the West Coast of
Great Britain. The island consists of Northern Ireland
and the Irish Republic.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Who suffered a lot from the heat wave?


a. Young people
b. Old people
c. Children
d. Women
e. Teenagers
Why were the French officials said that people
must be more careful about this year heat wave?
a. Because the present condition is better
b. Because the present condition is worse that
that in 2003
c. Because in 2003 more people had died
d. Because they didnt want more people die
e. Because they were responsible for the
citizens safety
Of the people whose deaths were attributed to the
sweltering temperatures . . .
The underlined word has almost the same
meaning as the word . . .
a. Due to
b. Comply with
c. Associate with
d. In response to
e. For the sake of
What is the newsworthy event of text 7?
a. French officials said This year, people must
be more careful to avoid a repeat of the
summer of 2003.
b. A heat wave that struck Europe last month
killed 112 people in France, on Thursday,
many of them were elderly.
c. Of the people whose deaths were attributed to
the sweltering temperatures in France, 66 of
them were age 75 or up.
d. Many of them were elderly.
e. When 15,000 people, most of them elderly,
died of heat related causes.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

5.

The purpose of the text is . . . .


a. To describe the United Kingdom
b. To inform about the United Kingdom
c. To retell about the United Kingdom
d. To explain about the United Kingdom
e. To persuade people about the United
Kingdom

6.

Which country is not situated in Great Britain?


a. England
b. Wales
c. Scotland
d. England, Wales and Scotland
e. Northern Ireland

7.

Where is the island of Ireland situated? It lies off .


..
a. The east coast of Great Britain
b. The west coast of Europe
c. The west coast of Great Britain
d. The west coast of Atlantic Ocean
e. The east coast of North Sea

8.

What do you call the text 8 above?


a. Report
b. Description
c. Narrative
d. Review
e. Exposition

Text 3
I personally believe that libraries are among
humanitys most important institutions for several
reasons.
Firstly, most of humanitys collective knowledge
is stored in libraries. Secondly, libraries protect and
preserve this knowledge. They also classify or group the
materials into logical and easily available divisions.
Furthermore, libraries make the materials
available to everyone and even provide librarians to help
us find what we need.
Finally, libraries are our link to the past and our
gift to the future.

108

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
From the facts above, I conclude that libraries are
important institutions for humanity.

Text 4

9.

Libraries are among humanitys most important


institutions for . . . reasons.
a. one
b. two
c. three
d. four
e. five

10.

Libraries also classify or group the materials into


logical and easily available divisions . . . readers
can find the materials easily.
a. it
b. because
c. after
d. however
e. therefore

11.

Libraries are our link to the past and our gift to


the future.
This means that we . . . to the past and the future
by libraries.
a. is linked
b. was linked
c. were linked
d. are linked
e. am linked

12.

What do you call the text above?


a. Analytical exposition
b. Hortatory exposition
c. Discussion
d. Explanation
e. Review

Julia Ward Howe and Anna Jarvis were the best


known pioneers who took up the cause of Mothers Day
in the United States. Julia Ward Howes Mothers Day
in 1872 was a call for disarmament by women. Anna
Jarvis, in 1907, organized a day to raise awareness of
poor health condition in her community, a cause she
believed would be best advocated by mothers. She called
it Mothers Work Day. In 1914, US President,
Woodrow Wilson signed a Joint Declaration. He
declared the second Sunday of May as Mothers Day, the
day to honor motherhood. Today, however, some may
think that the commercial community purposely created
Mothers Day to make some extra money.
Nowadays, this auspicious day has literally
become commercial affair. Many people spend their time
buying material gifts for their mothers. In order to sell
more products, many restaurants, gift shops, cake shops
and florists usually give special offers on Mothers Day.
Consequently, their cash registers keep ringing non stop.
Obviously, Mothers Day has become a major profit
makes for businesses.
It is important to remember that the reason behind
celebrating Mothers Day is to say thanks to the most
important person in our life our mother. It is the day to
tell her how much we love her and how special she is for
us.
Therefore, instead of merely giving material gifts,
giving our mother what she needs and really wants is
more precious. Showing off our love by spending more
time with her, for example, will certainly give us nothing
but heartfelt thanks and real gratitude from our mother.

13.

14.

The organization of the text 5 is . . .


a. thesis - arguments - reiteration
b. thesis - arguments - recommendation
c. general statement a sequence of
explanations - closing
d. identification - description
e. general classification - description
From the facts above, I conclude that libraries are
important institutions for humanity.
The last paragraph of the text is called the . . .
a. orientation
b. re-orientation
c. thesis
d. arguments
e. reiteration

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Mothers Day

15.

Some people thought Mothers Day was . . . .


a. purposely created just to make money
b. created to honor the mother
c. created to make the mother happy
d. created to respect the mother
e. created to pay tribute to mother

16.

Who was the creator of Mothers Day?


a. Anna Jarvis
b. Mary Thompson
c. President Woodrow Wilson
d. Joan of Arc
e. Julia Ward Howe

17.

What did Julia Ward Howe do in the 19th century?


a. She worked for the NGO.
b. She worked in a military service.
c. She called for disarmament by women.
d. She raised awareness of poor health
conditions in her community.
e. She became a charity worker.

109

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
18.

When did the Mothers Day become officially


recognized?
a. In 1758
b. In 19th Century
c. In 1924
d. In 1914
e. In 1800

19.

According to the text, when the Mothers Days


celebrated?
a. On the 1st week of June
b. On the 2nd week of April
c. On the 2nd week of May
d. On the 1st week of December
e. On the 3rd week of May

20.

21.

What does Mothers Day bring to the commercial


community?
a. It brings havoc to the commercial community
b. It brings problems to the commercial
community
c. It brings adversities to the commercial
community
d. It brings disasters to the commercial
community
e. It brings immense business to the commercial
community
Who will get benefits from Mothers Day?
a. The children
b. The hawkers
c. The taxi drivers
d. Restaurants owners, gift shops owners, cake
shops owners and florists owners
e. The beggars

Text 5
Changing the Handphone Covers
Before removing the cover, always switch off the
power, and disconnect the charger and any other device.
Avoid touching electronic components while changing
the covers. Always store and use the device with the
cover attached.
1. Press the back cover release button, open the back
cover and remove it.
2. Take off the front cover carefully.
3. Insert the keypad in the new front cover.
4. Align the top of the front cover to the top of the
phone, press the front cover to lock it into places.
22.

Insert the keypad in the new front cover.


The underlined word has the same meaning with .
..
a. enter
b. include
c. put into
d. join
e. set

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

23.

What will be done to the old front cover?


a. remove it
b. avoid touching it
c. store it
d. take it off
e. press it

24.

What is the type of the text?


a. report
b. procedure
c. narration
d. description
e. anecdote

25.

The communicative purpose of this text is to . . .


a. Guide the readers in changing the handphone
covers.
b. Share an amusing incident with others.
c. Describe a particular thing.
d. Persuade the readers to change the handphone
covers.
e. Inform the readers about handphone covers.

Text 6
Men sana in corpore sano, a healthy body
makes a sound mind. More and more people nowadays
are aware of the truth behind the maxim. As a result,
they make sports an integral part of their lives. Some
people participate in sports to release energy and tension,
while others do it to make friends. Sports, such as soccer,
basketball or boxing, have become an acceptable way to
release energy and aggression. Other sport like golf,
mountain climbing, dancing or bowling can be means of
starting or consolidating friendships. Most sports offer a
constructive escape from the pressures of the everyday
life. In fact, you can change your life if you take up and
keep up an activity suited to your character, abilities and
lifestyle.
It is important to realize that no matter what kind
of exercise you do, you can be sure that its always good
for your health and that its fun.
26.

People do sports . . .
a. to change their lives
b. as their hobby
c. to lessen the pressure of life
d. as part of their lives
e. to be healthy

27.

Most sports offer a constructive escape from the


pressures of the everyday life. (Paragraph 1). The
phrase escape from can be replaced by . . . .
a. hiding from
b. avoidance of
c. joining to
d. changing from
e. turning off

110

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
28.

What is the main idea of the text above?


a. Be healthy is important.
b. A lifestyle of human being.
c. Sport is a good way to keep persons health.
d. The purpose of the healthy life.
e. Many kinds of sports.

35.

This is a very popular TV program. Every week it


. . . by millions of the people.
a. watches
d. has watched
b. being watches
e. had watched
c. is watched

29.

Ely

: I . . . English since seven years ago.


Then, I am going study French next
month.
Dion
: Wow, thats great Ely.
a. have studied
b. studied
c. am studying
d. study
e. was studying

36.

Susan

37.

30.

Dinda : What about my new dress, Mom?


Mother : Dont worry. Your father . . . a lovely
evening dress for you.
Dinda : Really? Why didnt he tell me?
Mother : It will be surprise, wont it?
a. havent bought
b. was buying
c. has bought
d. were buying
e. isnt buying

38.

I will have a test tomorrow, therefore I study


to night.
a. may
d. must
b. can
e. have
c. might

39.

Johnny
: Mom, this is my friend, Freddy.
Mother
: . . . . Pleased to meet you.
a. How are you
b. Is it your name?
c. Well, great your name.
d. Ive been waiting for you
e. How do you do?

40.

Tony will go to the cinema. Its raining hard.


Tony
: Dad, I will go now. Its getting late.
Father
: Youd better stay at home;
otherwise, you will catch cold.
From the dialogue above we know that Tonys
father . . . .
a. asks for attention
b. shows anger
c. feels regret
d. asks for information
e. give advice

41.

Nico

31.

A well-known architect is designing our new


school building.
The passive voice form of the above sentence is
our new school building . . . by a well-known
architect.
a. designs
b. is designed
c. designed
d. is being designed
e. be designing

32.

The stewardess is now serving coffee to the


passengers.
The passive form of above sentence is . . . .
a. The passengers are serving coffee now
b. The passengers are now served coffee
c. Coffee is now served by the passengers
d. Coffee is now being served to the passengers
e. Coffee is now served to the passengers

33.

I am still waiting . . . for an interview.


a. to be called
d. to call
b. be called
e. called
c. be calling

34.

How old is this mosque?


Well, it . . . in 1870.
a. built
d. had built
b. to be built
e. had been building
c. was built

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Astrid is a diligent student. Im sure


she will pass the examination with
flying colors.
Agus : I think so.
The underlined utterance expresses . . . .
a. agreement
d. sympathy
b. prohibition
e. advice
c. regret
: Excuse me, sir!
. . . here, the parking lot is over there.
Y : Oh, Im sorry. I dont know about it.
a. You may park
b. You should park
c. You are not allowed to park
d. You are supposed to park
e. You dont have to park

: Tom, I am terribly sorry. I forget to


bring your notebook.
Tom
: . . . . I dont need it until the day
after tomorrow.
a. Oh? Really?
d. What a pity
b. Never mind
e. Not too bad
c. How lucky you are

111

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
42.

Dianas mother is a . . . She teaches student at the


Gajah Mada University.
a. teacher
d. receptionist
b. director
e. headmistress
c. lecturer

43.

Youd better put on your . . . when you go out. Its


very cold outside.
a. vest
d. sweater
b. scarf
e. raincoat
c. T-shirt

44.

Newspapers have a basic purpose, this is to get . . .


as quickly as possible from reliable sources to
readers.
a. news
d. advertisement
b. report
e. announcement
c. statement

45.

From 1967 onward, cinema begun to lose their . . .


People prefer watching TV programmes at home.
a. sponsors
d. companies
b. producers
e. cameramen
c. audiences

46.

Sony

47.

Ari

48.

Rieka

49.

Rudi
: Why are you so late today?
Tony
: Sorry, Rud. My car . . . .
Rudi
: So did you come here on foot?
Tony
: Yes, I did.
a. is repairing
b. is being repaired
c. has just repaired
d. will have been repaired
e. will be repairing

50.

Hady
: Donny, lets go to Lindas party.
Donny
: If I had time, I would go there.
From the dialogue we know that . . . .
a. Donny goes to Lindas party.
b. Hady goes to Lindas party.
c. Donny doesnt go to Lindas party.
d. Donny came to Lindas party.
e. Donny will come to Lindas party

: Have you visited Bob? He got an


accident last week.
Dona
: Oh, poor Bob. I hope hell be better
soon.
The Italicized sentence expresses . . . .
a. sadness
d. expectation
b. pleasure
e. satisfaction
c. sympathy
: Although this is the best cinema in
town, there are not many people
visiting it.
Tia
: . . . nowadays most people prefer
spending their time at home
watching TV.
a. Oh, no.
d. Thats right.
b. I dont think so.
e. Its not true.
c. Really?

Reza

: What would you give me if youre


sent abroad?
: If I were sent abroad, I . . . a
dictionary for you.

a. bought
b. will have bought
c. will buy
d. would have bought
e. would buy

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

112

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Once upon a time, a rabbit wanted to cross a river
but e could not swim. He had an idea. He saw a boss of
crocodile swimming in the river. The rabbit asked the
boss of crocodile, How many crocodiles are there in the
river? The boss of crocodile answered, We are twenty
here. Where are they? the rabbit asked for the second
time. What is it for? the boss of crocodile asked.
All of you are good, nice, gentle and kind, so I
want to make a line in order. Later I will know how kind
you are, said the rabbit. Then, the boss of the crocodile
called all his friends and asked them to make a line in
order from one side to the other side of the river. Just
then, the rabbit started to count while jumping from one
crocodile to another; onetwothree.four.until
twenty, and finally, he thanked all crocodiles because he
had crossed the river.
1.

The story mainly tells us about .


a. twenty crocodiles
b. the boss of the crocodile
c. a rabbit and twenty crocodiles
d. a rabbit and the boss of crocodile
e. the boss of the crocodile and all his friends

2.

We know from the first paragraph that the rabbit


actually wanted .
a. to cross the river
b. to swim across the river
c. to meet the boss of crocodile
d. to know where the crocodiles are
e. to know the number of crocodiles there

3.

All of you are good, nice, gentle, and kind


(Paragraph 2)
The underlined word is synonymous with .
a. wild
b. diligent
c. cheerful
d. easygoing
e. honorable

A fox fell into a well and couldnt get out. By and


by a thirsty goat came along. Seeing the fox in the well it
asked if the water was good. Good, said the fox Its
the best water Ive tasted in all my life. Come down and
try it yourself.
The goat was thirsty so he got into the well. When
he had drunk enough, he looked around but there was no
way to get out. Then the fox said, I have a good idea.
You stand on your hind legs and put your forelegs
against the side of the well. Then Ill climb on your back,
from there. Ill step on your horns, and I can get out. And
when Im out, Ill help you out of the well.
The goat did as he was asked and the fox got on
his back and climbed out of the well. Then he coolly
walked away. The goat called out loudly after him and
reminded him of his promise to help him out. The fox
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

merely turned to him and said; If you only had thought


carefully about getting out, you wouldnt have jumped
into the well.
The goat felt very sad. He called out loudly. An
old man walking nearby heard him and put a plank into
the well. The goat got out and thanked the old man.
4.

The text tells the story of .


a. a fox
b. a goat
c. a fox and a goat
d. an old man and the fox
e. the goat and an old man

5.

Paragraph 2 mainly tells .


a. how the fox helped the goat
b. why the fox got into the well
c. how the fox got out of the well
d. the foxs idea how to get out of the well
e. how both the goat and the fox got out of the
well

6.

The goat did as he was asked. (Paragraph 3)


What does the above sentence mean?
a. The goat drank enough and locked around.
b. The goat came down to the well and drank.
c. The goat called out loudly after the fox got
out.
d. The goat waited someone who might help
him.
e. The goat stood on his hind legs and put his
forelegs against the side of the well.

The Police thought that two burglars started the


robbery at 151 Pattimura street on Sunday afternoon.
The burglars broke into the students room while they
were going to a football game. They never thought that
while they were away, burglars would break into their
boarding house.
41.

What happened to the students room on Sunday


afternoon?
a. The police broke it.
b. The police ruined it.
c. Burglars broke into it.
d. Two burglars broke it.
e. The students started to ruin it.

42.

The burglars broke into the room when the


students .
a. were at a party
b. were talking a rest
c. were playing football
d. were at a football game
e. were watching football on TV

113

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
43.

The burglars broke into the students room .


The underlined phrase means .
a. broke forcefully
b. entered by force
c. put into pieces
d. easily entered
e. came into

44.

The students seem to think that .


a. they had locked their room
b. their boarding house was not safe
c. their boarding house was in a safe area
d. thieves would easily break into their room
e. there would be a robbery in their boarding
house

The elephant is the largest and strongest of all


animals. It is a strange looking animal with its thick legs,
huge sides and backs, large hanging ears, a small tail,
little eyes, long white tusks and above all it has a long
nose, the trunk.
The trunk is the elephants peculiar feature, and it
has various uses. The elephant draws up water by its
trunk and can squirt it all over its body like a shower
bath. It can also lift leaves and puts them into its mouth.
In fact the trunk serves the elephant as a long arm and
hand. An elephant looks very clumsy and heavy and yet
it can move very quickly.
The elephant is a very intelligent animal. Its
intelligent combined with its great strength makes it a
very useful servant to man and it can be trained to serve
in various ways such as carry heavy loads, hunt for tigers
and even fight.
45.

The third paragraph is mainly about the fact that


.
a. elephants are strong
b. elephants can lift logs
c. elephants are servants
d. elephants are very useful
e. elephants must be trained

46.

Which of the following is NOT part of the


elephant described in the first paragraph?
a. It looks strange.
b. It is heavy.
c. It is wild.
d. It has a trunk.
e. It has a small tail.

47.

It is stated in the text that the elephant uses the


trunk to do the following, EXCEPT.
a. to eat
b. to push
c. to drink
d. to carry things
e. to squirt water over the body

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

48.

The trunk is the elephant a peculiar feature .


(Paragraph 2)
The underlined word is close in meaning to .
a. large
b. strange
c. tough
d. smooth
e. long

49.

Nola : Do you know the boy sitting next to the


man with the red polka dot shirt?
Neli : He is Denis .father is a tycoon.
Nola : Oh, I see.
a. who
b. whom
c. whose
d. which
e. where

50.

Ferdi
Hasan
Ferdi
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

51.

: Do you see the large field over there?


: Yes, what is it for?
: Thats the land .is provided for the
elephants to live.

who
whom
where
which
whose

Bobby
Withney
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

52.

: I finally could buy the Chevrolet that


I had dreamed of for years.
: Oh, congratulations. Is it the one
.you showed me yesterday?

whom
where
who
which
whose

Read the following sentences. They are not in a


good order.
1. Enter the 14 digits.
2. How to charge your cell phone card.
3. Dial 222 C or OK.
4. Press 1 to get the charge option.
5. The amount of the voucher will be
automatically added onto your card.
6. First scratch the black area.
7. To check the remaining pulse credit dial
*222#.
The right arrangement of the sentences above is
.
a. 1 7 3 4 6 2 5
b. 2 6 3 4 1 5 7
c. 3 4 5 7 6 1 2
d. 5 3 7 6 4 2 1
e. 6 4 1 7 5 2 3

114

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
53.

X:
Y:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

54.

Retno : I called Joko last night.


Andri : What?
Retno : I said I .Joko last night.
a. have called
b. had called
c. would call
d. had to call
e. called

55.

56.

57.

58.

Hi I am Agung. Nice to meet you.


My name is Juli. Nice to meet you, too.
This is my friend, Agung.
Allow me to introduce myself
Let me introduce you to my friend
What do you do?
How are you doing?

Iwan has gotten three promotions at this


company a year ago.
a. since he started working
b. when he has started working
c. before he had started working
d. until he is starting working
e. after he was starting working
Oy : I forgot to bring my dictionary.?
Ani : Sure, here it is.
a. Could you lend me yours, please
b. This dictionary is yours, isnt it
c. Is your dictionary new
d. Could I lend you
e. How about you
: Have you heard that Mr. Yayan passed
away last night?
Ranto : Really? I dont believe it. Yesterday I
met him at the wedding party of my
neighbor.
Lusi
: Yeah, he had a heart attack last night.
Ranto : Oh, Im really sorry to hear that.
The underlined expression expresses .
a. ability
b. surprise
c. certainty
d. possibility
e. sympathy

59.

: Dad, can I use your car? I want to


borrow Aris camera.
Daddy : ? I need the car to go to the barber.
a. Why dont you use your motor cycle
b. Why dont you lend Fuads
c. Is Aris camera a good one
d. Does Ari have a camera
e. Does Ari want the car

60.

Jack :
Did Jane call you?
Bob :
What?
Jack :
I wanted to know if .
a. you had called Jane.
b. Jane called you.
c. you called Jane.
d. you have called Jane.
e. Jane had called you.

61.

Anto :
Ani :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

You look very busy with your work?


Sure. If you dont mind. How kind you
are.
Can you do me a favour
Can I help you
Would you like to help me
Do you like to help me
Are you tired

62.

: May I use your car to Rinas house,


Dad?
Father : Of course. Be careful.
From the underlined words we may conclude that
Andri asks for . to his father to use his car.
a. permission
b. agreement
c. possibility
d. suggestion
e. advice

63.

Father : When will you harvest your crops?


Adi
: Next week.
Father : I hope you will have a bumper crop.
The underlined sentence expresses.
a. desire
b. permission
c. certainly
d. expectation
e. sympathy

64.

Ridwan

Lusi

Rangga : My friend will hold a mask party next


week. Will you join us?
Dion
: Sounds interesting! But I have an
appointment with my boss.
From the dialogue we know that Dion .
a. will join Rangga
b. wont join Rangga
c. likes to go to the party
d. promises to go to the party
e. is not interested in going to the party

Totty

Andri

: Im afraid my parents rice fields


were damaged by the flood.
Pak Yusuf : Oh, Im sorry to hear that.
The underlined words express.
a. sorry
b. apology
c. sympathy
d. intolerance
e. complaint

115

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
65.

66.

67.

68.

69.

: Good morning, Madam. Anything I can do


for you?
Y : Yes, please. I need a T-shirt size 15.
The dialogue likely occurs.
a. at home
b. at a store
c. at a tailor
d. at a school
e. at the office
: What is your plan for the holiday?
: I have no idea.
: What about having a picnic to Lake
Toba, Wita?
Wita
: Id love to, but I have to attend a
seminar.
What are the speakers talking about?
a. Going to Witas house.
b. Attending a seminar.
c. Going to Lake Toba.
d. Spending their time.
e. Planning to spend a holiday.

70.

: The Indonesian Olympics contingent


had just arrived from Athens. They
brought one gold medal, one silver and
two bronze medals.
Daddy : Yeah, we have to be proud of them.
The underlined sentence is used to express .
a. apology
b. pleasure
c. pride
d. certainty
e. satisfaction

71.

Dinda

: Tina, .take this document to the


Accounting. Department?
Tina
: Yes, certainly. Im free now.
a. cant you please
b. is it possible for you to
c. may I tell you to
d. can I tell you to
e. should I ask you to

72.

A :
B:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

73.

Agus : Send me a postcard of Borobudur, Budi.


Rini : What did Agus say to you, Budi?
Budi : .
a. She told me to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
b. I told her to send him postcard of Borobudur.
c. He told me to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
d. He told you to send him postcard of
Borobudur.
e. I told him to send him postcard of Borobudur.

74.

Andi : Which book do you look for?


Sari : I look for ..
a. Which book I buy?
b. A book which I brought yesterday
c. Which book did you buy yesterday?
d. A book which it is about dream
e. Which book do you ask me, Andi?

Lisa
Wita
Lisa

Galih

: Dody, may I borrow your mobile


phone?
I want to call my girlfriend.
Dody : I am afraid not. I am charging the
battery.
The underlined utterance expresses .
a. giving information
b. asking for explanation
c. giving a permission
d. refusing a permission
e. asking for information
Mom : Girls, make up your beds!
Nindy : What did mom say to you just now?
Ninin : She asked usour beds.
a. make up
b. made up
c. to make up
d. making up
e. should make up
Budi : Good morning, Rina. Did you see Susi?
Rina : Yes, I did. She to Mr. Yusuf when I
entered the office just now.
a. talks
b. talked
c. has talked
d. would talk
e. was talking

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Tony

How was the result of your test?


I am really.I got a good score.
disappointed
appreciated
excited
satisfied
dedicated

116

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Text 1
Whales are the largest animal on earth. Bigger
than elephants, they may grow 95 feet long, and weight
150 tons. A baby blue whale, just born, can be 23 feet
long and weight 3 tons.
Although whales live in the oceans and can swim
like fish, they are not fish. They are mammals, like cows
and elephants. Unlike fish, they bear young alive net as
eggs. Their babies live on their mothers milk. They
breathe through their lungs and hold their breathe when
they go under water. If they cannot come to the surface
to breathe fresh air, they will drown. They are warm
blooded. Fish, however, lay eggs, breathe oxygen in the
water and are cold blooded.
Whales live in all the oceans. In the winter some
of them go to warm waters to breed and in the summer
most of them go to cold waters to feed. There are two
kinds of whales, whales with teeth (toothed whales) and
whales without teeth (baleen whales). The toothed
whales eat fish and squid, which they can catch with
their teeth, although they swallow their food without
chewing it. The baleen whales eat plankton (small sea
animals and plants). When they find plankton, they open
their mouths and swim into the plankton. When they
close their mouths, they squeeze out the water and
swallow the plankton.
Whales have few enemies. Only human beings
and the killer whales attack whales. And whales do not
seem to fight among themselves. They usually live from
20 to 30 years.
1.

2.

Which of the following is TRUE about whales?


a. Whales are generally 95 feet long and weigh
150 tons
b. Big animals living in the ocean tend to be
their enemies
c. like fish, whales can live in all kinds of
waters
d. Their life span is usually longer than human
beings
e. A new baby whale may weigh one-fife-teeth
o its mother
The organization of the text is .
a. identification description
b. general classification description
c. general classification to position the reader
explanation
d. orientation event (s) reorientation
e. goal material step (s)

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

3.

A suitable title for the text is .


a. Large Animals on Earth
b. Differences between Whales and Elephants
c. Whales, the Biggest Animal on Earth
d. Similarity between Fish and Whales
e. The Life of Whales in the Oceans

4.

The differences between whales and fish is that


whales .
a. do not have to come to the surface to get fresh
air
b. deliver their young like elephants do
c. will die if they cannot get any oxygen in the
water
d. are mammals that are cold blooded
e. can easily breathe when they are under water

5.

Whales occasionahy live in warm waters .to get


more food
a. to get more food
b. for reproduction
c. to avoid winter
d. for fresh air
e. to feed their babies

6.

Which one of the following statements is FALSE


based on the text about?
a. Whales are mammals
b. Whales give birth to a baby whale
c. Whales lay eggs
d. Whales breast feed their babies
e. Each kind of whale eat different kind of food

7.

From the text we may conclude that .


a. a whale can eat both squid and plankton
b. toothed whales chew their food before
swallowing it
c. the two types of whale live in different waters
d. baleen whales swallow of the water
containing plankton
e. each type of whale eats a specific kind of
food

Text 2
BINGKUANG
Bingkuang, a symbol of Padang, is a kind of
tropical fruit in Indonesia. It is not a seasonal fruit. This
fruit grows underground. Its similar to potato but the
difference is in growing it. With bingkuang, the pants
flower seed is planted in the ground. Bingkuang has an
off-white skin. It has white fresh. The longer it is kept.
The sweeter taste it will have. If the skin is damaged it
will not rot easily. This fruit can help prevent stomach
and colon disease. It can also help to lower body
temperature if someone has fever. It can help make our

117

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
skin soft and smooth. It is often used as ingredients of
traditional food like rujak and sari buah.
8.

9.

Where is the original of Bingkuang?


a. Padang
b. Java
c. madura
d. Jakarta
e. Irian Jaya
The TRUE statement based on the passage above
is .
a. bingkuang doesnt have any similarities to
potato
b. we can find Bingkuang in London
c. bingkuang is easy to decay
d. bingkuang doesnt have any advantages for
human being
e. bingkuang only grow in tropical climate place

12.

The climax of the text is when .


a. Patty went to the market to sell the milk
b. Patty was imagining her future
c. Patty fell her pail off
d. Patty went home sad
e. Pattys mother advised her

13.

The characters in text are .


a. Patty and the Milkmaid
b. Patty and farmer Brown
c. Patty and the Parsons wife
d. Patty and Polly Shaw
e. Patty and her mother

14.

Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying


her milk in a pail on her head.
The other name of pail is .
a. pale
b. bucket
c. box
d. glass
e. pan

Text 3
Patty The Milkmaid
Text 4
Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying
her milk in a pail on her head. As she went along she
began calculating what she would do with the money she
would get for the milk. Ill buy some fowls from
Farmer Brown, said she, And they will lay eggs each
morning, which I will sell to the parsons wife. With the
money that I get from the sale of these eggs Ill buy
myself a new dimity frock and a chip hat; and when I go
to market, wont all the young men come up and speak to
me! Polly Shaw will be that jealous; but I dont care. I
shall just look at her ad toss my head like this. As she
spoke she tossed her head back the Pail fell off it and all
the milk was spilt. So she had to go home and tell her
mother what had occurred.
Ah, my child, said the mother, Do not count
your chickens before they are hatched.
10.

Pattys job is .
a. milking a cow
b. selling milk
c. selling chicken
d. selling eggs
e. selling hat

11.

The character of Patty is .


a. diligent
b. lazy
c. arrogant
d. greedy
e. jealous

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

A Lion and a Mouse


A lion was awakened from sleep by a mouse
running over his face. Rising up angrily, he caught him
and was about to kill him when the mouse piteously
entered, saying, If you would only spare my life, I
would be sure to repay your kindness.
The lion laughed and let him go. It happened
shortly after this that the lion was caught by hunters, who
bound with him with strops to the ground. The mouse,
recognizing his roar, came, gnawed the rope with his
teeth, and set him free, exclaiming, You ridiculed the
idea of my ever being able to help you, expecting to
receive from me any repayment of your favor; now you
know that it is possible for even a mouse to confer on a
big lion.
(Source: Encarta)
15. The text above is a .
a. recount text
b. procedure
c. narrative
d. hortatory exposition
e. analytical exposition
16.

The characters in the text above are .


a. the lion and the hunter
b. the mouse and the hunter
c. the lion and the mouse
d. the lion and the farmer
e. the mouse and the farmer

118

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
17.

The orientation of the text above is stated in .


a. 1st paragraph
b. 2nd paragraph
c. 1st sentence
d. 2nd sentence
e. last sentence

18.

The reorientation of the text is .


a. the lion ate the mouse
b. the mouse helped the lion
c. the hunter killed the tiger
d. the lion helped the mouse
e. the hunter helped the lion

powerful enough to be called hurricanes. To be classified


as a hurricane, a tropical storm must have winds reaching
speed of at least 117 kilometers per hour, but the winds
are often much stronger than that; the winds of intense
hurricanes can easily surpass 240 kilometers per hour.
22.

The social function of the text above is .


a. to describe hurricanes
b. to tell event before hurricanes come
c. to show how to make hurricanes
d. to persuade some one to create hurricanes
e. to amuse the reader with hurricanes stories

23.

The passage mainly discusses .


a. the number of hurricanes in a year
b. the strength of hurricanes
c. the weather in the north Atlantic
d. hurricanes in a certain part of the world
e. hurricanes and disaster of the world

24.

Which of the following is TRUE according to the


text?
a. Three are always hurricanes in the North
Atlantic All year round.
b. Extremely warm weather and high humidity
can cause hurricanes.
c. Very strong winds are the result of
hurricanes.
d. Hurricanes occur every month from may to
November.
e. Tropical countries have a lot of intense
hurricanes.

Text 5
There are many different causes of car accidents
in the United States.
Sometimes accidents are caused by bad weather.
Ice or snow can make toads very dangerous. Accidents
also can result from problems with the car. Even a small
problem like a flat tire can be serious. Bad roads are
another cause of accidents. Some accidents are caused by
drinking too much alcohol.
19.

The social function of the text above is .


a. to tell the readers about the accident in the US
b. to persuade the reader that car accidents are
caused by some causes
c. to amuse the reader with car accident stories
d. to tell the reader the step to avoid car accident
e. to retell past stories of car accidents

20.

What is the paragraph about?


a. problems with car engines
b. result of car accidents
c. the frequency of car accidents
d. weather conditions in the US
e. car accidents and their causes

21.

Car accidents in the US are caused by the


following, except .
a. drunken drivers
b. bad roads
c. unskilled drivers
d. icy roads
e. a flat tire

Text 6
Hurricanes generally occur in the North Atlantic
from May through November, with the pack of the
hurricane season in September, only rarely will they
occur from December through April in that part of the
ocean. The main reason for the occurrence of hurricane
during this period is that the temperature on the water
surface is at its warmest and the humidity of the air is at
its highest.
Of the tropical storms that occur each year in the
North Atlantic, only about five, on the average, are
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 7
Have you ever been humiliated by a little girl?
Last week, my four year old daughter, Sally, was
invited to a children party. I decided to take her by train.
Sally was excited because she has never traveled
on in train before. She sat near the window and asked
question about any thing she saw.
Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out
compartment and sat opposite to sally.
Hallo, little girl, she said. Sally did lady was
dressed, but looked at her curiously. The lady was
dressed in a blue coat and a large, funny hat.
After the train had left the station, the lady opened
her handbag and took out her compact. She then began to
make up her face.
Why are you doing that? Sally asked.
To make my self beautiful, the lady answered.
She put away her compact and smiled kindly.
But you away still ugly, Sally said.
Sally was amused, but I was very embarrassed.

119

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
25.

Where did the incident happen?


a. at home
b. in the bus
c. in the train
d. at the bus station
e. at the railway station

26.

Where did Sally want to go?


a. She wanted to go her school.
b. She was going to go to her friends birthday
party
c. She would go to a wedding party
d. She went to the zoo
e. She was going to go to beauty salon

27.

28.

29.

30.

Suddenly, a middle aged lady came into out


compartment and sat opposite to Sally. The
underlined word has the same meaning with .
a. behind
b. in front of
c. next to
d. beside
e. far away
Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out
compartment and sat opposite Sally. The
underhand phrase means a lady whose age is
around .
a. 1 5 years old
b. 5 10 years old
c. 11 20 years old
d. 20 30 years old
e. 40 50 years old
The purpose of the text is .
a. to inform the readers of the incident in the
train
b. to entertain the readers with the incident
c. to explain the reader about the incident in the
train
d. to describe the character of sally
e. to persuade the reader to take a train
Who writes the text above?
a. Sallys mother
b. Sally
c. The middle-aged lady
d. The conductor
e. Another person in the train

When the baby screamed even louder she heard


him say, Cool it, Jason, dont get excited, lad, cool it
soon.
Touched by his gentle manner the woman leaned
into the pram and cooed, There, there, Jason. Whats
bothering you?
Excuse me, lady, said the father, Thats Jeremy, Im
Jason.
31.

Jason was the name of .


a. the baby
b. the father
c. the woman
d. the old woman
e. the middles-aged woman

32.

The code of the text above is .


a. when the young father took his baby for a
walk
b. when the baby cried loudly
c. when the woman looked at him
d. when the woman tried to help the man
e. when the man explained about their names

33.

The text above is told by .


a. the young father
b. the baby
c. the woman
d. a third person
e. the young mother

Teacher
Mimi
Teacher
Mini
Teacher
Mimi
Teacher
Mimi
34.

From the dialogue above we know that it was a/an


class
a. English
b. Art
c. Physics
d. Chemistry
e. Maths

35.

The teacher feels about Mimis work.


a. sad
b. dissatisfied
c. satisfied
d. unhappy
e. disappointed

Text 8
He was a young father, wheeling the pram trough
the garden while the baby was screaming its head off.
Take it easy, Jason, he said calmly, Theres nothing
to worry about.
A middle-aged woman noticed his soothing
manner and marveled at the new breed of young
husband.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Have you done your assignment?


: Yes, maam. Here it is
: Let me see, mm what do you want to
draw here
: Its village maam. These is a rice field, a
river, and a mounth.
: Its very good. I like it. What is it on the
rice field ?
: Its a buffalo, maam. It is ploughing the
field.
: I see. Keep up your work
: Thanks, maam

120

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
36.

What will Mimi do next?


a. play around
b. study chemist
c. continue drawing
d. count her money
e. sing loudly

37.

Father

38.

39.

40.

: Where have you been? You made us


worried!
Lina
: Im sorry, dad
From the dialogue above, we know that father
expresses .
a. Sympathy
b. Apology
c. Pleasure
d. Anger
e. relief
Teacher
Bimo
Teacher
Bimo

Bimo
Yes, maam
this is your test result
I got nine! Im glad about it. My
mother wont be angry with me
Bimo is expressing .
a. Worry
b. Anxiety
c. Anger
d. Rrelief
e. sadness

41.

Tina, look at this queue for the


ticket. I have to wait for a long time.
Tina
:
Come on, dont be mad. Its
common if we have to queue to get a
ticket for a new movie.
From the dialogue above, we know that Tina .
a. is angry
b. resolves anger
c. is disappointed
d. agrees with Winna
e. asks for information

42.

Nina

Oh, Im glad we finally catch this


bus. We wont be late.
Nani
:
Yes, youre right.
From the dialogue above we know that Nina is
expressing .
a. Pain
b. agreement
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

43.

Nube

: Congratulations, Maia. your


design won the contest.
Maia
: Thanks, Nube. Im very glad about
it.
The underlined phrase expresses .
a. pain
b. pleasure
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

44.

Yosie : Ouch!
Icha
: Whats up, Yos?
Yosie : I cut my finger
Icha
: Let me get you some medicine.
From the dialogue above, Yosie is expressing .
a. pain
b. pleasure
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

:
:
:
:

Ouch
What happened, son?
I cut my finger white cutting this carrot.
You should have been careful. Here, put the
medicine on it.
Yes, mom
From the sentence above, the son expresses .
a. Pain
b. Happiness
c. Sadness
d. Relief
e. pleasure
Mother

: What is this? Look at this mess!


Why dont you make your bed?
Son
: Ill do it right away, mom.
From the dialogue above, the mother expresses
.
a. Happiness
b. Love
c. Endearment
d. Anger
e. satisfaction

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Winna :

ANNOUNCEMENT
OSIS Committee are expected to attend the meeting on:
Day/date : Saturday, February 23, 2007
: 13.00
Time
: OSIS room
Place
: Preparation for school anniversary
Theme
Note: All committee must come
Chairman
Akbar

121

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
45.

Who writes the announcement above?


a. The headmaster does
b. The teacher does
c. The OSIS chairman does
d. The OSIS Committee does
e. The secretary of OSIS does

46.

When the teacher came into the classroom, he saw


all the students .
a. did the exam
b. doing the exam
c. had to the exam
d. must do the exam
e. have done the exam

47.

The workers,...that their wages were not raises,


went on strike.
a. they know
b. they knew
c. were knowing
d. realizing
e. realized

48.

You can trust him, because I have heard him .


a. telling the truth
b. told the truth
c. was telling the truth
d. to tell the truth
e. would tell the truth

49.

She bought ... from the exhibition.


a. an old interesting French painting
b. a French old interesting painting
c. an interesting old French painting
d. a French interesting old painting
e. an interesting French old painting

50.

My grandfather drives .
a. an old little red car
b. an old red little car
c. a red little old car
d. a red old little car
e. a little old red car

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

122

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
A Number of devices are available to help in the
effort to quit smoking. Nicotine patches are small,
nicotine-containing adhesive substances that are applied
to the skin. The nicotine is slowly absorbed through the
skin and enters the blood stream. Over time, the nicotine
dose is lessened and eventually the craving for nicotine
is alleviated. Nicotine gum works in a similar manner,
providing small doses of nicotine when chewed.
The benefits of smoking cessation include the
immediate reduction of health hazards for the smoker,
lower health insurance premiums, and easier admission
to social activities and institutions that ban smoking.
Nonetheless, to quit smoking is difficult, most likely
because smokers crave the effect of the nicotine in the
smoke. In a 1988 report, the U.S. surgeon general
declared nicotine to be an addictive drug comparable to
other addictive substances in its ability to induce
dependence. The report also called the monetary and
human costs far greater than those attributable to
cocaine, alcohol, or heroin. Some recent evidence
supports this claim, indicating that the overall mortality
attributable to tobacco smoking in the United States is
about 20 times that of the mortality due to all other
addictive drugs combined.
1.

What is the main purpose of the text?


a. To persuade people to stop smoking.
b. To inform people of ways to stop and shy they
should stop smoking.
c. To recent evidence support this claim.
d. To show people of the danger of smoking.
e. To convince people to use nicotine patches to
stop smoking.

2.

Here are some facts about nicotine patches,


except:
a. They are used by placing it upon the skin.
b. They can be absorbed trough the skin.
c. They can help smokers quit smoking.
d. They help smokers decrease their dependency
on nicotine.
e. The benefits of smoking cessation include the
immediate reduction of health hazards.

3.

The text concludes that nicotine....


a. is an additive drug comparable
b. is a dangerous as cocaine, alcohol, or heroin
c. is lessened when smokers chew gums
d. will be absorbed through the skin
e. are available to help smokers quit smoking

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

4.

The advantage of stop smoking are the following,


except:
a. Ex-smokers can avoid some diseases.
b. Smoking in USA is about 20 times.
c. Ex-smokers can have better social life.
d. Ex-smokers can pay lower health insurance
premium.
e. Ex-smokers can be admitted to social
institutions.

5.

Which of the following statements is true?


a. To quit smoking is not easy, thats why most
smokers crave the effect of the nicotine in the
smoke.
b. The nicotine doesn't lessened and eventually
the craving for nicotine isn't alleviated.
c. U.S. declared nicotine to be an addictive drug
less addictive that other addictive substance
in its ability to induce dependence.
d. In the U.S., the overall mortality because of
tobacco smoking greater than that of the
mortality because of cocaine, alcohol, or
heroin.
e. In the U.S., the monetary and human costs
because of cigarettes are equal to those
caused by other addictive substances.

TOKYO: A Japanese man who stole valuable king


crabs from a fish marker was arrested after accidentally
locking himself inside a freezer, a police spokesman said
on Tuesday.
Unemployed Hirohisa Matsumoto, 32, allegedly
broke into a fish markers freezes storage in Kagoshima,
southern Japan, early on December 23 last year. Police
said Matsumoto had netted 42,000 (US$400) worth of
king crabs, and other seafood. However, it is alleged
when back into the freezer to fetch more, the door
closed, locking him inside.
Police said Matsumoto was trapped in the freezer,
where the temperature was minus 16 degrees Celcius
(3.2 degrees Fahrenheit), for about 20 minutes. He used
his mobile phone to call a friend, who then asked a
security guard to open the freezer door, police said.
Investigators believed the man could have died
had his mobile phone failed to work.. AFP
6.

The following statements are true, except:


a. Horohisa Matsumoto stole crab for the first
time.
b. Hirohisa Matsumoto was lucky.
c. Hirohisa Matsumoto went into the freezer
more than once.
d. Hirohisa Matsumoto was alone when he stole
the crabs.
e. Hirohisa's old is 32.

123

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
7.

The topic of the above text is....


a. Matsumoto was trapped in the freezer.
b. A criminal who was trapped inside of a fish
market.
c. A Japanese man who stole valuable king crabs
from a fish market.
d. A. Japanese man who allegedly broke into a
fish markets freezer storage in Kagoshima.
e. A crab thief who was arrested after being
rescued from a freezer.

8.

The meaning of the last sentence of the text is


that....
a. The man died in the freezer because he had a
mobile phone.
b. The man was lucky that his mobile phone can
be used to call for help.
c. The man was arrested because he call a
security guard to rescue him from the freezer.
d. The man will die.
e. The man was dead when his mobile phone
failed to work.

A golf course is divided into 18 sections, called


holes. The standard course is about 6500 to 7000 yr
(about 5900 to 6400 m). The individual holes may vary
in length from 100 to 600 yd (about 90 to 550 m). Each
hole has at one end a starting pint known as a tee end,
imbedded in the ground at the other end and marked by a
flag, a cup or cylindrical container (also called a hole)
into which the ball must be propelled in order to
complete play at each hole. The cup is usually made of
metal or plastic, 4.2 in (10.8 cm) in diameter, and at least
4 in (10 cm) deep.
9.

10.

The topic of the above text is....


a. The cup.
b. Golf course standards
c. World standards golf course
d. Golf courses facilities
e. Golf course is divided into 18 sector
The following sentences abut golf course are true,
except:
a. Golf courses have 18 holes.
b. Golf courses diver in length and width.
c. Golf courses have only one tee.
d. Golf courses have tees, which are marked by
flags.
e. Golf is an expensive game.

A month ago, I had no idea that on Saturday


afternoon in November Id be hanging 30 meters above
the ground and enjoying it. Now I looked down at the
river far below me, and realized why people love rockclimbing.
My friend Matt and I had arrived at the Activity
Center on Friday evening. The accommodation wasnt
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

wonderful, but we had everything we needed (beds,


blankets, food), and we were pleases to be out of the city
and in the fresh air.
On Saturday morning, we met the other ten
members of our group. Cameron had come along with
two friends, Kevin and Simon, while Sister Carole and
Lynn had come with Amanda. We had come from
various places and none of us knew the area.
We knew we were going to spend the weekend
outdoors, but none of us was sure exactly how. Half of
us spend the morning caving while the others went rockclimbing and then we changed at lunchtime. Matt and I
went to the caves first. Climbing out was harder than
going in, but after a good deal of pushing, we were out at
last covered in mud but pleased and excited by what
weve done.
11.

What is the writer trying to do in the text?


a. Going to spend the weekend outdoors.
b. Advertise the Activity Center.
c. Describe some people she met.
d. Say how she spend some free time.
e. Explain how to do certain outdoor sports.

12.

What can the reader learn from the text?


a. How to apply for a place at the Center.
b. What sort of activities you can experience at
the Center.
c. When to depend on other people at the Center.
d. Which time of year is best to attend the Center.
e. If we want to go hiking is on Sunday.

13.

How do you think the writer might describe her


weekend?
a. boring
c. relaxing
e. unpleasant
b. interesting
d. frightening

14.

What do we learn about the group?


a. They had already chosen their preferred
activities.
b. They're boring people.
c. Some of them had been there before.
d. They came from the same city.
e. Some of them already knew each other.

15.

.... We had everything we needed.... The word


we on the second paragraph refers to....
a. Matt and Simon
b. Matt and Carole
c. Mat and Simon
d. Matt and I
e. Matt and Amanda

124

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
When we buy canned or bottled food products at
the grocers or the supermarket, we will find out that
there are some additives added to the main nutrients. An
additive is a nonnutritive substance intentionally added
to food, generally in small quantities, to improve
appearance, flavour, storage properties, etc.
A group of food additives includes vitamins,
amino acids, and minerals, which are added to foodstuffs
to compensate for losses occurring during processing or
to provide additional sources in diets that might
otherwise be deficient in such nutrients. Examples of
their use include enrichment of margarine with the
addition of vitamin A, and niacinamide to flour or bread.
Salt often has a small amount of iodine added to it to
avoid a diet deficiency that can cause goiter
development.
Appearance is an important factor in food appeal,
and legislation in most countries permits the addition of
both natural and synthetic colouring matter based on the
colouring standards issued by the Food and Agricultural
Organization (FAO) and World Health Organization
(WHO).
Flavouring materials are added to basic foodstuffs
to provide a characteristic product flavour or to
supplement or modify the original flavour. Most
flavouring materials are still of natural origin, but
progress in organic chemistry has made it possible to
analyze flavouring materials and to synthesize products
similar with those found in nature. Flavour can also be
influenced by the addition of flavour enhancer as
monosodium glutamate, which intensifies perception of
flavouring.
16.

17.

Which statement is true according to the text?


a. Canned or bottled food is better in quality than
fresh food.
b. Synthetic colouring is the same as natural one.
c. To improve the appearance, flavouring
materials are added.
d. For the shake of storage, antimicrobial
preservatives are not important.
e. Canned food can last long because of the
antimicrobial preservatives.
Paragraph 4 tells us about....
a. kinds of flavouring materials
b. the use of flavouring materials
c. what flavouring material is
d. the similarity between natural and synthetic
flavouring
e. the difference between natural and synthetic
flavouring

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

18.

What is the additive added to the food for?


a. to produce better products
b. to make the consumers satisfied
c. to put the food in the cans or bottles
d. to improve the appearance, flavour, and
storage properties
e. to prevent the products from physical factors

19.

The main information of the text is about....


a. Additives are very important in food products.
b. There are no regulations in adding additives to
the food products.
c. All canned or bottled food products contain
additives.
d. We must buy canned or bottled food products
in the supermarket.
e. It is better for us to consume the canned food
products.

20.

What does it in the second paragraph refer to?


a. salt
b. goiter
c. vitamin A
d. niacinamide
e. margarine

Put the verbs into the correct form, past continuous or


past simple!
21. Donny.... to his walkman when I....
a. were listening, arrived
b. was listening, arrived
c. was listened, arrived
d. was listening, arrives
e. was listening, arriving
22.

What.... this time yesterday?


a. were you do
c. were you did
e. were you doing
b. was you doing
d. was you done

23.

How fast.... when the accident....


a. were you driving, happened
b. you was driving, happened
c. was you driving, happened
d. were you driving, happens
e. you were driving, happened

24.

I.... along the street when suddenly I.... footsteps


behind me.
a. walked, was hearing
b. was walking, heard
c. was walking, hearded
d. walked, were hearing
e. were walking, heard

125

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
25.

When I was young, I.... to be an artist.


a. wants
b. wanted
c. wants to
d. wanting
e. want to

Ultraviolet light means the invisible part of the


spectrum beyond violet. This light has always been
regarded as very useful because it is uses to cure certain
skin diseases, kill bacteria, detect counterfeit money,
form vitamins, etc.
Along with the increasingly extensive use of
computers in financial activities, ultraviolet light has
been widely applied by banks to identify the signatures
of their customers in passbook. When a customer opens a
new account with a bank, the bank teller always asks him
to sign on a card placed in the signature column of a
passbook. When the card is removed, the trace of his
signature will be left. This can be used to compare with
the signature on the customers withdrawal slip under
ultraviolet light.
Ultraviolet light certainly has many practical
applications, but it may also be harmful to human beings
on some occasions. To everyones knowledge, the direct
impact of the light on the eyes for an excessive length of
time may blind a person.
Even though it can cure certain skin diseases, it is
also very harmful to the skin. A study just completed in
the United States says that the light may cause skin
cancer. The ultraviolet rays of the sun have been ranked
as the third most dangerous cancer-causing agent after
alcohol and tobacco.
It is high time to warn sun-worshipper in the guest
for a bronzed look to be careful of excessive and
uncontrolled exposure to hen sun.
26.

27.

We may conclude that the main information of the


text about....
a. the advantages and disadvantages of ultraviolet
light
b. the use of ultraviolet light in business
c. the application of ultraviolet rays on human
being
d. the effect of ultraviolet rays on human being
e. the danger of ultraviolet light to peoples
health
Which of the following statement about ultraviolet
light is TRUE according to the text?
a. Ultraviolet is uses by banks for computers
b. The position ultraviolet rays is above the
spectrum
c. Skin diseases can only be caused by ultraviolet
rays
d. Ultraviolet light which is part of the spectrum
cannot be seen
e. Ultraviolet light is one of the existing vitamins

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

28.

We may conclude that the writers main purpose


in writing the text is to....
a. Encourage people to get the best advantage of
ultraviolet rays.
b. Explain that sunrays consist of violet and
ultraviolet rays.
c. Introduce the effective use of ultraviolet light
in banks.
d. Warn people against the alarming dangers
caused by sunrays.
e. Ask people to avoid the use of ultraviolet light
as mush as possible.

29.

We benefit from ultraviolet rays as they can....


a. sign customers passbooks
b. check customers deposits
c. detect false signatures
d. be a component in medicines
e. cure a particular kind of cancer

30.

Ultraviolet rays may endanger people who....


a. take vitamins regularly
b. consume alcohol and tobacco
c. stay indoors
d. like sun bathing
e. have skin cancer

31.

I havent heard anything from Leni.


....
a. So have I
b. Either have I
c. Me, neither
d. I havent also
e. Neither have I

32.

The chairman of the organization did not attend


the meeting, and....
a. the secretary didnt either
b. nor the secretary did
c. the secretary did too
d. so did the secretary
e. neither didnt the secretary

33.

I didnt like the film that we saw.


....
a. So didnt I
b. I didnt either
c. So can I
d. I didnt so
e. Neither I didnt

34.

If you are able to do that job, and....


a. so do I
b. so will I
c. so can I
d. so am I
e. so must I

126

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
35.

36.

37.

38.

Tono : My brother has just bought a new


motorcycle.
Parto : What a coincidence, ....
a. my brother has too
b. so does my brother
c. my brother also did
d. also my brother
e. my brother does to
Jane is interested in literature, and so is Bob.
This sentence can be rewritten as:
a. Jane is interested in literature, but Bob is not.
b. Bob is interested in literature, but Jane is not.
c. Both Jane and Bob are interested in literature.
d. Jane is interested in literature, and Bob too.
e. Neither Jane nor Bob is interested in literature.
Yanti didnt like the movie and Tati didnt
either.
It means:....
a. Yanti and Tati didnt like to movie
b. Yanti didnt like the movie as much as Tati did.
c. Only Yanti didnt like the movie.
d. Yanti didnt like the movie but Tati did.
e. One of the two girls didnt like the movie.
She never seems to care,.....?
a. is he
b. has she
c. does she
d. doesnt he
e. wont she

39.

There is someone at the door, ....?


a. isnt there
b. will you
c. cant you
d. isnt it
e. isnt he

40.

Shut the door, ....?


a. do you
b. will you
c. cant you
d. dont you
e. could you

41.

Lets go to the movie, ....?


a. do we
b. cant we
c. shouldnt we
d. shall we
e. wouldnt we

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

42.

His name is Paul, isnt ....?


a. he
b. that
c. it
d. his
e. so

43.

Shes been very kind, ....?


a. doesnt she
b. hasnt she
c. wont we
d. wasnt she
e. hadnt she

44.

The dishes we had for lunch were all delicious,


....?
a. didnt they
b. were they
c. werent they
d. hadnt they
e. had they

45.

You didnt come to class yesterday, did you?


....
a. Yes, I didnt
b. But I have
c. But I did
d. Did I?
e. Yes, I have

Paris is the capital of a European nation of France.


It is also one of the most beautiful and the most famous
cities in the world
Paris is called the city of light. It is also an
international fashion center. What stylish women are
wearing in Paris will be worn by women all over the
world. Paris is also a famous world center of education.
For instance, it is the headquarters of UNESCO, the
United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization.
The Seine River divides the city into two parts.
Thirty-two bridges cross this scenic river. The oldest and
perhaps most well-known is the Pont Neuf, which was
built in the sixteenth century. The Sorbonne, a famous
university, is located on the left bank (south side) of the
river. The beautiful white church Sacre Coeur lives on
the top of the hill called Montmartre on the right bank
(north side) of the Seine.
There are many other famous places in Paris, such
as the famous museum the Louvre as well the cathedral
of Notre Dame. However, the most famous landmark in
this city must be the Eiffel Tower.
Paris is named after a group of people called the
Parisii. They built a small village on an island in the
middle of the Seine River about two thousands years
ago. This island, called the Ile de la Cit, is where Notre
Dame is located. Today around eight million people live
in the Paris area.

127

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
46.

The topic of the text is....


a. France, a European nation
b. The Seine River
c. The city of Paris
d. Education in France
e. French culture

47.

Where is the Sacre Coeur located?


a. In the city of light
b. Next to the Sorbonne University
c. On the southern side of the river
d. On the top of the hill mountain
e. Outside Paris

48.

According to the text which of the following


statements is TRUE about Pont Neuf?
a. Pont Neuf is one of the oldest universities.
b. Pont Neuf is located near Montmartre.
c. Pont Neuf separates the Seina River from the
city.
d. Pont Neuf is a bridge crossing the Seine
River.
e. Pont Neuf is located on the south side of the
Seine.

49.

From the text, we know that Notre Dame is


located ....
a. on the left bank
b. on the right bank
c. on neiter bank
d. near the Louvre
e. outside the city of Paris

50.

Which of the following statements is NOT


TRUE?
a. The name Paris originated from the name of
the inhabitants of the Ile de la Cite.
b. French people were called Parisii two
thousand years ago.
c. Paris was the name of a small village in the
middle of the Seine River.
d. In ancient times, Paris was on an island called
Ile de la Cit.
e. Ile de la Cit used to be an island located in
the middle of the Seine River

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

128

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
Text 1
Whales are the largest animal on earth. Bigger
than elephants, they may grow 95 feet long, and weight
150 tons. A baby blue whale, just born, can be 23 feet
long and weight 3 tons.
Although whales live in the oceans and can swim
like fish, they are not fish. They are mammals, like cows
and elephants. Unlike fish, they bear young alive net as
eggs. Their babies live on their mothers milk. They
breathe through their lungs and hold their breathe when
they go under water. If they cannot come to the surface
to breathe fresh air, they will drown. They are warm
blooded. Fish, however, lay eggs, breathe oxygen in the
water and are cold blooded.
Whales live in all the oceans. In the winter some
of them go to warm waters to breed and in the summer
most of them go to cold waters to feed. There are two
kinds of whales, whales with teeth (toothed whales) and
whales without teeth (baleen whales). The toothed
whales eat fish and squid, which they can catch with
their teeth, although they swallow their food without
chewing it. The baleen whales eat plankton (small sea
animals and plants). When they find plankton, they open
their mouths and swim into the plankton. When they
close their mouths, they squeeze out the water and
swallow the plankton.
Whales have few enemies. Only human beings
and the killer whales attack whales. And whales do not
seem to fight among themselves. They usually live from
20 to 30 years.
1.

Which of the following is TRUE about whales?


Whales are generally 95 feet long and weigh
150 tons
b. Big animals living in the ocean tend to be their
enemies
c. like fish, whales can live in all kinds of waters
d. Their life span is usually longer than human
beings
e. A new baby whale may weigh one-fife-teeth o
its mother

4.

The differences between whales and fish is that


whales .
a. do not have to come to the surface to get fresh
air
b. deliver their young like elephants do
c. will die if they cannot get any oxygen in the
water
d. are mammals that are cold blooded
e. can easily breathe when they are under water

5.

Whales occasionahy live in warm waters .to get


more food
a. to get more food
b. for reproduction
c. to avoid winter
d. for fresh air
e. to feed their babies

6.

Which one of the following statements is FALSE


based on the text about?
a. Whales are mammals
b. Whales give birth to a baby whale
c. Whales lay eggs
d. Whales breast feed their babies
e. Each kind of whale eat different kind of food

7.

From the text we may conclude that .


a. a whale can eat both squid and plankton
b. toothed whales chew their food before
swallowing it
c. the two types of whale live in different waters
d. baleen whales swallow of the water
containing plankton
e. each type of whale eats a specific kind of
food

a.

2.

The organization of the text is .


a. identification description
b. general classification description
c. general classification to position the reader
explanation
d. orientation event (s) reorientation
e. goal material step (s)

3.

A suitable title for the text is .


a. Large Animals on Earth
b. Differences between Whales and Elephants
c. Whales, the Biggest Animal on Earth
d. Similarity between Fish and Whales
e. The Life of Whales in the Oceans

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

Text 2
BINGKUANG
Bingkuang, a symbol of Padang, is a kind of
tropical fruit in Indonesia. It is not a seasonal fruit. This
fruit grows underground. Its similar to potato but the
difference is in growing it. With bingkuang, the pants
flower seed is planted in the ground. Bingkuang has an
off-white skin. It has white fresh. The longer it is kept.
The sweeter taste it will have. If the skin is damaged it
will not rot easily. This fruit can help prevent stomach
and colon disease. It can also help to lower body
temperature if someone has fever. It can help make our
skin soft and smooth. It is often used as ingredients of
traditional food like rujak and sari buah.

129

8.

Where is the original of Bingkuang?


a. Padang
b. Java
c. madura
d. Jakarta
e. Irian Jaya

13.

The characters in text are .


a. Patty and the Milkmaid
b. Patty and farmer Brown
c. Patty and the Parsons wife
d. Patty and Polly Shaw
e. Patty and her mother

9.

The TRUE statement based on the passage above


is .
a. bingkuang doesnt have any similarities to
potato
b. we can find Bingkuang in London
c. bingkuang is easy to decay
d. bingkuang doesnt have any advantages for
human being
e. bingkuang only grow in tropical climate place

14.

Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying


her milk in a pail on her head.
The other name of pail is .
a. pale
b. bucket
c. box
d. glass
e. pan

Text 4
Text 3
A Lion and a Mouse
Patty The Milkmaid
Patty the Milkmaid was going to market carrying
her milk in a pail on her head. As she went along she
began calculating what she would do with the money she
would get for the milk. Ill buy some fowls from
Farmer Brown, said she, And they will lay eggs each
morning, which I will sell to the parsons wife. With the
money that I get from the sale of these eggs Ill buy
myself a new dimity frock and a chip hat; and when I go
to market, wont all the young men come up and speak to
me! Polly Shaw will be that jealous; but I dont care. I
shall just look at her ad toss my head like this. As she
spoke she tossed her head back the Pail fell off it and all
the milk was spilt. So she had to go home and tell her
mother what had occurred.
Ah, my child, said the mother, Do not count
your chickens before they are hatched.
10.

11.

12.

A lion was awakened from sleep by a mouse


running over his face. Rising up angrily, he caught him
and was about to kill him when the mouse piteously
entered, saying, If you would only spare my life, I
would be sure to repay your kindness.
The lion laughed and let him go. It happened
shortly after this that the lion was caught by hunters, who
bound with him with strops to the ground. The mouse,
recognizing his roar, came, gnawed the rope with his
teeth, and set him free, exclaiming, You ridiculed the
idea of my ever being able to help you, expecting to
receive from me any repayment of your favor; now you
know that it is possible for even a mouse to confer on a
big lion.
(Source: Encarta)
15.

Pattys job is .
a. milking a cow
b. selling milk
c. selling chicken
d. selling eggs
e. selling hat

The text above is a .


a. recount text
b. procedure
c. narrative
d. hortatory exposition
e. analytical exposition

16.

The character of Patty is .


a. diligent
b. lazy
c. arrogant
d. greedy
e. jealous

The characters in the text above are .


a. the lion and the hunter
b. the mouse and the hunter
c. the lion and the mouse
d. the lion and the farmer
e. the mouse and the farmer

17.

The orientation of the text above is stated in .


a. 1st paragraph
b. 2nd paragraph
c. 1st sentence
d. 2nd sentence
e. last sentence

The climax of the text is when .


a. Patty went to the market to sell the milk
b. Patty was imagining her future
c. Patty fell her pail off
d. Patty went home sad
e. Pattys mother advised her

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

130

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
18.

The reorientation of the text is .


a. the lion ate the mouse
b. the mouse helped the lion
c. the hunter killed the tiger
d. the lion helped the mouse
e. the hunter helped the lion

Text 5
There are many different causes of car accidents
in the United States.
Sometimes accidents are caused by bad weather.
Ice or snow can make toads very dangerous. Accidents
also can result from problems with the car. Even a small
problem like a flat tire can be serious. Bad roads are
another cause of accidents. Some accidents are caused by
drinking too much alcohol.
19.

The social function of the text above is .


a. to tell the readers about the accident in the US
b. to persuade the reader that car accidents are
caused by some causes
c. to amuse the reader with car accident stories
d. to tell the reader the step to avoid car accident
e. to retell past stories of car accidents

20.

What is the paragraph about?


a. problems with car engines
b. result of car accidents
c. the frequency of car accidents
d. weather conditions in the US
e. car accidents and their causes

21.

Car accidents in the US are caused by the


following, except .
a. drunken drivers
b. bad roads
c. unskilled drivers
d. icy roads
e. a flat tire

Text 6
Hurricanes generally occur in the North Atlantic
from May through November, with the pack of the
hurricane season in September, only rarely will they
occur from December through April in that part of the
ocean. The main reason for the occurrence of hurricane
during this period is that the temperature on the water
surface is at its warmest and the humidity of the air is at
its highest.
Of the tropical storms that occur each year in the
North Atlantic, only about five, on the average, are
powerful enough to be called hurricanes. To be classified
as a hurricane, a tropical storm must have winds reaching
speed of at least 117 kilometers per hour, but the winds
are often much stronger than that; the winds of intense
hurricanes can easily surpass 240 kilometers per hour.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

51.

The social function of the text above is .


a. to describe hurricanes
b. to tell event before hurricanes come
c. to show how to make hurricanes
d. to persuade some one to create hurricanes
e. to amuse the reader with hurricanes stories

52.

The passage mainly discusses .


a. the number of hurricanes in a year
b. the strength of hurricanes
c. the weather in the north Atlantic
d. hurricanes in a certain part of the world
e. hurricanes and disaster of the world

53.

Which of the following is TRUE according to the


text?
a. Three are always hurricanes in the North
Atlantic All year round.
b. Extremely warm weather and high humidity
can cause hurricanes.
c. Very strong winds are the result of
hurricanes.
d. Hurricanes occur every month from may to
November.
e. Tropical countries have a lot of intense
hurricanes.

Text 7
Have you ever been humiliated by a little girl?
Last week, my four year old daughter, Sally, was
invited to a children party. I decided to take her by train.
Sally was excited because she has never traveled on
in train before. She sat near the window and asked
question about any thing she saw.
Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out
compartment and sat opposite to sally.
Hallo, little girl, she said. Sally did lady was
dressed, but looked at her curiously. The lady was
dressed in a blue coat and a large, funny hat.
After the train had left the station, the lady opened
her handbag and took out her compact. She then began to
make up her face.
Why are you doing that? Sally asked.
To make my self beautiful, the lady answered.
She put away her compact and smiled kindly.
But you away still ugly, Sally said.
Sally was amused, but I was very embarrassed.
54.

Where did the incident happen?


a. at home
b. in the bus
c. in the train
d. at the bus station
e. at the railway station

131

55.

Where did Sally want to go?


a. She wanted to go her school.
b. She was going to go to her friends birthday
party
c. She would go to a wedding party
d. She went to the zoo
e. She was going to go to beauty salon

56.

Suddenly, a middle aged lady came into out


compartment and sat opposite to Sally. The
underlined word has the same meaning with .
a. behind
b. in front of
c. next to
d. beside
e. far away

57.

Suddenly, a middle-aged lady came into out


compartment and sat opposite Sally. The
underhand phrase means a lady whose age is
around .
a. 1 5 years old
b. 5 10 years old
c. 11 20 years old
d. 20 30 years old
e. 40 50 years old

60.

Jason was the name of .


a. the baby
b. the father
c. the woman
d. the old woman
e. the middles-aged woman

61.

The code of the text above is .


a. when the young father took his baby for a
walk
b. when the baby cried loudly
c. when the woman looked at him
d. when the woman tried to help the man
e. when the man explained about their names

62.

The text above is told by .


a. the young father
b. the baby
c. the woman
d. a third person
e. the young mother

Teacher
Mimi
Teacher
Mini

58.

59.

The purpose of the text is .


a. to inform the readers of the incident in the
train
b. to entertain the readers with the incident
c. to explain the reader about the incident in the
train
d. to describe the character of sally
e. to persuade the reader to take a train

Teacher
Mimi
Teacher
Mimi
63.

From the dialogue above we know that it was a/an


class
a. English
b. Art
c. Physics
d. Chemistry
e. Maths

64.

The teacher feels about Mimis work.


a. sad
b. dissatisfied
c. satisfied
d. unhappy
e. disappointed

65.

What will Mimi do next?


a. play around
b. study chemist
c. continue drawing
d. count her money
e. sing loudly

Who writes the text above?


a. Sallys mother
b. Sally
c. The middle-aged lady
d. The conductor
e. Another person in the train

Text 8
He was a young father, wheeling the pram trough
the garden while the baby was screaming its head off.
Take it easy, Jason, he said calmly, Theres nothing
to worry about.
A middle-aged woman noticed his soothing
manner and marveled at the new breed of young
husband.
When the baby screamed even louder she heard
him say, Cool it, Jason, dont get excited, lad, cool it
soon.
Touched by his gentle manner the woman leaned
into the pram and cooed, There, there, Jason. Whats
bothering you?
Excuse me, lady, said the father, Thats
Jeremy, Im Jason.
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: Have you done your assignment?


: Yes, maam. Here it is
: Let me see, mm what do you want to
draw here
: Its village maam. These is a rice field, a
river, and a mounth.
: Its very good. I like it. What is it on the
rice field ?
: Its a buffalo, maam. It is ploughing the
field.
: I see. Keep up your work
: Thanks, maam

132

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
66.

: Where have you been? You made us


worried!
Lina
: Im sorry, dad
From the dialogue above, we know that father
expresses .
a. Sympathy
b. Apology
c. Pleasure
d. Anger
e. relief

67.

Teacher : Bimo
Bimo : Yes, maam
Teacher : this is your test result
Bimo : I got nine! Im glad about it. My
mother wont be angry with me
Bimo is expressing .
a. Worry
b. Anxiety
c. Anger
d. Rrelief
e. sadness

68.

69.

Father

Ouch
What happened, son?
I cut my finger white cutting this carrot.
You should have been careful. Here, put the
medicine on it.
Yes, mom
From the sentence above, the son expresses .
a. Pain
b. Happiness
c. Sadness
d. Relief
e. pleasure
Mother : What is this? Look at this
mess!
Why dont you make your bed?
Son
: Ill do it right away, mom.
From the dialogue above, the mother expresses
.
a. Happiness
b. Love
c. Endearment
d. Anger
e. satisfaction

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

70.

Winna : Tina, look at this queue for the ticket.


I have to wait for a long time.
Tina
: Come on, dont be mad. Its common
if we have to queue to get a ticket for a
new movie.
From the dialogue above, we know that Tina .
a. is angry
b. resolves anger
c. is disappointed
d. agrees with Winna
e. asks for information

71.

Nina : Oh, Im glad we finally catch this bus.


We wont be late.
Nani : Yes, youre right.
From the dialogue above we know that Nina is
expressing .
a. Pain
b. agreement
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

72.

Nube : Congratulations, Maia. your design won


the contest.
Maia : Thanks, Nube. Im very glad about it.
The underlined phrase expresses .
a. pain
b. pleasure
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

73.

Yosie : Ouch!
Icha : Whats up, Yos?
Yosie : I cut my finger
Icha : Let me get you some medicine.
From the dialogue above, Yosie is expressing .
a. pain
b. pleasure
c. relief
d. sympathy
e. sorrow

133

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Latihan Soal
The text below is for questions 1 to 3
My Brother's Smart Parrot
My brother has a very smart pet. It is a parrot.
Wlien he bought it one year ago from his friend, it was
just like other parrot. My brother wants that his parrot
can speak like people.
Every day my brother trains it how to speak like
people. First, he says some short words or expressions
such as hello, good inorning, and good bye. Then, he
asks the parrot to follow what he says. He does this again
and again until his parrot can follow the expressions
well.
Now, my brother's parrot can speak almost like
people. There are some words and expressions that this
parrot can say such as "hello, good morning, how are
you, who are you, and good bye". But, "hello" is one
word that the parrot can sav very fluently. Since my
brother puts his parrot in front of the house, every time
someone passes by, the parrot always greets him saying
"hello".
1.

How is the parrot ?


a. small
b. smart
c. big
d. beautiful
e. brown

2.

"... the parrot can say very fluently". (Par 3, line


6) What does the word printed in bold meari?
a. able to speak a language
b. able to speech
c. able to speak a language easily and well
d. able to talk
e. able to sing

3.

What is the writer's purpose of writing this kind of


text?
a. To entertain the readers.
b. To tell unusual things in the past.
c. To tell a series of events in the past.
d.
e.

To tell a series of story about a smart parrot.


To tell many kinds of parrot.

The text below is for questions 4 to 6


Me Versus High Heels
(Aku VS Sepatu Hak Tinggi)
Sasha is a tomboy who likes basketball, soccer,
wall climbing, and other boys' activities. She doesn't pay
much attention to her looks, fashion trends, and other so called girly stiff.
Until the day she bumps into Arnold and falls
Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

madly really in love with him. She's willing to do


anything to be Arnold's kind of girl; feminine, trendy,
nea.t, and girly. With the help of her friend, Lola, Sa sha
starts shopping for all the things girly and trendy, goes to
beauty parlors and spas, and learns to wear highheels.
She leaves all the boys' stuff and activities. Instead, she
joins yoga and gymnastics classes, becomes a member of
her school cheerleader team, and learns how to cook.
But after everything that she's done, Arnold
doesn't really love her. He doesn't even like her. Then she
breaks into pieces. But that makes her realize that there's
a boy who's in love with her. A boy who loves her just
the way she is.
4.

Who is the story mostly about?


a. A Snow Princes
b. Cinderella
c. Sasha
d. Lola
e. Sasha's friend

5.

... shopping for all the things girly and trendy ...
(paragraph 2, line 6).
The word printed in bold shows that Sasha starts
shopping for all things girly and....
a. traditional fashion
b. well-known fashion
c. old fashion
d. modern and influenced by the most recent
fashions
e. good fashion

6.

What is the correct structure of the narrative text


above?
a. Orientation Record of event
Reorientation
b. Orientation Resolution Complication
c. Orientation
Complication

Resolution
d. Aim Materials Steps
e. Introduction Orientation Record of
event

The text below is for questions 7 to 9


Singapore has a variety of sports facilities which
include indoor and outdoor stadiums, tracks,
multipurpose playing fields, sports halls and courts,
swimming complexes, sailing lagoons, as well as outdoor
exercise apparatus in public parks. These facilities cater
to a great variety of sports that people enjoy.
One traditional sporting game still played is 'sepak
raga'. This refers to a ball made of woven rattan. The ball
is tossed to players of the opposing team using any parts
of the body, especially the feet and head but never the
hands, and it must not be allowed to touch the ground.

134

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
Until recently, no proper roles existed for the
game. It is now popularly known by its Thai name
`Sepak takraw'. It now has its own set of formal rules and
a more durable plastic ball is used.
7.

What is one traditional sporting game in


Singapore according to the text above?
a. basketball
b. volleyball
c. sepak raga
d. football
e. swimming

8.

Singapore has a variety of sports facilities ...


(Paragraph 1, line 1). The word printed in bold has
the same meaning with ....
a. different things
b. various
c. same things
d. similar with
e. traditional

9.

The second paragraph of the text above describe


about ....
a. Singapore city
b. Tourism areas in Singapore
c. A variety of sports facilities
d. Sepak raga
e. People in Singapore

The text below is for questions 10 to 13


WELCOME TO AMERICA
It's the first time for young Jose to travel to the
United States from Mexico. He made his first trip to
Yankee Stadium, but there were no tickets left for sale.
Taking pity on the poor guy, a friendly ticket
salesman found him an empty seat near the American
flag.
Later, Jose wrote home enthusiastically about his
experience.
"The Americans are so friendly!" he concluded .
"Before the game started, they all stood up and
looked at me and sang, Jose, can you see?"
(The first line of the US' anthem, " Oh, say, can you
see?")
10.

Who does make a travel from Mexico to United


States?
a. Salesman
b. Americans
c. Jose
d. A guy
e. A little boy

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

11.

Taking pity on the poor guy, a friendly ticket


salesman found him .... (line 5) What does the
word printed in bold mean?
a. A feeling of happiness
b. A feeling of pride
c. A feeling of unhappiness
d. A feeling of sympathy and understanding for
someone else's unhappiness or difficult
situation.
e. A feeling of dislike

12.

How does the writer make the scene 9 funny?


a. By providing clue at the beginning.
b. By arranging events in the order they
happened.
c. By giving a personal comment in the end of
the story.
d. By giving a twist at the end of the story.
e. By giving a funny thing in the middle of
story.

13.

The communicative purpose of this text is....


a. to inform readers about the soldier's problem
b. to describe the soldier's experience
c. to explain the reader's about the job' of a
surgeon
d. to share amusing story with others
e. to persuade readers to be concerned with the
soldier's case

The text below is for questions 14 to 17


The students in the second level of SMPN 5 YK
went to Bali last year for study tour. At 7 o'clock in the
morning, the students went to Bali by bus. They were
very enjoyable in the travelling. They sang some pop
songs and made some games. Also they exchanged their
snack to each other. At 12 o'clock, they stayed for an
hour to have supper and took a rest in the restaurant.
They were served with a lot of foods such as sate, soto,
bakso, and soup. Some of them ate Sate and others ate
solo and bakso. They were very satist ed with the
restaurant service.
One hour later, they came into the bus and
continued their travelling. During that time most of them
slept. Only some of there read some comics and listened
to the music. A 6.00 o'clock p.ni they arrived in
Gilhnarrr;ifr, then one hour later' they crossed, the straits
by ship. Lastly, they arrived in die.ho,el.
During three days, the weut to Sanur Beach,
Bedigul. Pure Bekasih, Kute Beach, Tanah Lot and
Sangeh. They were beautiful places that would never. be
gotten. In Ilie next morning, they came haci. to
jogyakarta.

135

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
14.

How was the travelling that told in the text above?


a. It was boring.
b. It was not interesting.
c. It was terrible.
d. It was enjoyable.
e. It was sad event.

15.

Which places were not visited by them in Bali?


a. Tanah Lot
b. Bedigul
c. Sanur beach
d. Sangeh
e. Tulamben

16.

17.

Also they exchanged their snack to each other


(paragraph 1, line 6).
What does the word printed in bold mean?
a. To give a gift for others.
b. To buy a thing for others.
c. To change for something else of a similar
value or type.
d. To make a thing for anybody else.
e. To share something with others.
Why did not the writer tell some interesting places
in Bali clearly?
a. Because the writer focused on them.
b. Because the writer mostly tell about the
travelling to Bali.
c. Because the writer didn't know about them.
d. Because the writer did not go there.
e. Because the writer me. tly tell on their
activities.

The text below is for questions 18 to 20

19.

That's no offense", .... (line 4)


The word printed in bold means ... .
a. good feelings
b. happy
c. upset and hurt feelings
d. worry
e. sad

20.

How does the writer make the scene funny?


a. by providing clue at the beginning.
b. by presenting a personal replied.
c. by giving a twist at the beginning.
d. by giving a twist in the end.
e. by presenting some funny words.

The text below is for questions 21 to 23


The Best Remedy
Cheating was one of the bad habits that I couldn't
get rid of. One day, during a test, I finished faster than
my best friend who sat. next to me. Amazingly, I didn't
cheat on that exam because l had realy studied the night
before and I could answer all of the questions quite
easily. Seeing that I had finished, my friend signaled nre
asking me to cheat for her! She indicated she didn't have
the nerve to do it herself. I told her to look out of the
teacher while I took a, peek at my note book while I was
doing drat. Suddenly, out of nowhere someone pinched
my ear and I heard the whole class laughed at me. Yep,
the teacher was standing behind us and had watched the
whole scene. Needless to say, I never cheated again.
(CMS English Teen Magazine Vol.4 No. 26)
21.

What is the writer's bad habit according to the text


above?
a. cheating
b. robbing
c. killing
d. playing
e. buying

22.

She indicated she didn't have the nerve to do it


herself (line 7-8).
What does the word printed in bold mean?
a. to notice
b. to give attention
c. to show a value or change
d. to know more detail
e. courage

23.

How does the writer make the scene funny?


a. by arranging events in the order they
happened
b. by giving a twist in the end of the story
c. by presenting a personal comment in the end
of the story
d. by providing clue at the beginning
e. by presenting some funny words

Early Shopping
It was holiday season and the judge was in a
merry mood as he asked the prisoner, "What are you
charged with?"
"Doing my shopping early," relied the defendant.
"That's no offense," said the joggle. "How early
were you doing this dropping?'.
"Before the store opened," countered the prisoner.
(Taken horn C'NS, English Teen Magazine Vol.4 No. 26)

18.

Where does the above take place?


a. in a class
b. in a court
c. in a bank
d. in a course
e. in a market

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

136

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
24.

Lia : Did you make this cake by yourself?


Tia : Oh, I had my servant make it.
From the dialogue we know that Lia ....
a. had made the cake
b. made the cake herself
c. got the cake made
d. was asked to make the cake
e. made the cake with her servant

25.

Aji : Can you cook "sate" by yourself? Ita


No, I'll have my sister ... it.
a. cook
b. cooked
c. to cook
d. checking
e. being checked

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

Andi : I didn't see your sister yesterday.


Where was she?
Roy : She ... with her friend when you came
here.
a. is going
b. was going
c. were going
d. is gone
e. was gone

31.

Elis

32.

Dinda

33.

The teacher said., "Is Mary absent?"


The teacher asked ... .
a. is Mary absent?
b. was Mary absent?
c. if Mary is absent
d. whether Mary is absent
e. if Mary was absent

34.

I asked Wati, "Where does she come from?"


I asked Wati ....
a. where she comes from
b. from where was coming
c. from which she came
d. where she came from
e. from where she is?

35.

Annie asked, "Where do you come from?"


Annie asked her ....
a. where did she come from
b. from where was she coming
c. from which she came
d. where she came from
e. from where she is

Reta : May I borrow your book ?


Desi : I'm sorry, it ... by my mother now.
a. read
b. is reading
c. is being read
d. will read
e. is read
Ari

: Why don't you try to find a job in


factory? With the money you earn, you
can buy things you need.
Boy : If I worked in a factory. I wouldn't have
much time to study.
What does the italicized sentence mean?
a. Boy works hard in a factory.
b. Ari allows Boy to work in a factory.
c. Boy didn't work in a factory.
d. Boy worked in a factory.
e. Boy doesn't work in a factory.
Hayati : Bonny is very disappointed.
Hanafi : It's his own fault. If he had come on
time, he would have got the job.
From the dialogue we can conclude that....
a. Bony got the job
b. Hanafi came on time
c. Bony came late
d. Hanafi got the job
e. Hanafi missed the opportunity
Nindy
Lia
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: When did you get this cassette?


: Yesterday. When I ... home, a boy
asked me to give it to you.
walk
walked
walking
was walking
has been walking

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: I ... English since seven years ago. Then,


I am going study French next month.
Dion : Wow, that's great Elis.
a. have studied
b. am studying
c. was studying
d. studied
e. study
: What about my new dress, Mother?
Mother: Don't worry. Your father ... a
lovely evening dress for you.
Dinda : Really? Why didn't he tell me?
Mother : It will be surprise, won't it?
a. haven't bought
b. has bought
c. isn't buying
d. was buying
e. were buying

137

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
37.

The student said, "Do we have a test today?"


The student asked ... .
a. do we have a test today
b. were we have a test today
c. if we had a test that day
d. whether we have a test today
e. whether we have a test that day

38.

Rieka

39.

40.

41.

42.

: What would you give me if you're sent


abroad?
Reza
: If I were sent abroad, I . . . a dictionary
for you.
a. bought
b. will buy
c. would buy
d. will have bought
e. would have bought
Ady : Sony, let's go to Lina's party.
Sony : If I had time, I would go there.
From the dialogue we know that ....
a. Sony goes to Lina's party.
b. Ady goes to Lina's party.
c. Sony doesn't go to Lina's party.
d. Sony came to Lina's party.
e. Sony will come to Lina's party.
Ani : .... the bag?
Reza : Yes, please. Thank you.
a. Should you carry
b. Must you carry
c. Why do you carry
d. Aren't you tired of carrying
e. Would you like me to carry
Yusuf : .......
Joni : I am sorry to hear that.
a. I will go for holiday tomorrow.
b. They bought a new car yesterday.
c. Let us go to the library.
d. Do you need some help.
e. My mother is sick Rina
Rina : I think the deforestation will cause even
greater disaster.
Nina : . . . . Therefore the illegal logging should
be stopped. The government has to be
serious to deal with this problem.
a. I'm absolutely agree with you.
b. I don't think so.
c. Not at all.
d. I doubt it.
e. I am sorry to hear that.

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

43.

Lili

: Will you go to the art museum with your


parents?
Dion : Of course not. I ... watch football on TV
than go to the art museum.
a. prefer
b. choose
c. like
d. hate
e. would rather

44.

Andy
Irma
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

: Hi, Irma....?
: That's very kind of you, but I'm
expecting my father.
Could you tell me the way
Can I drive you home
Shall I bring you a drink
Shall I help you
Could. you give me a lift

45.

Sri

: Have you visited Bob? He got an accident


last week.
Dwi : Oh, poor Bob. I hope he'll be better soon.
The italicized sentence expresses ....
a. sadness
b. pleasure
c. sympathy
d. expectation
e. satisfaction

46.

Adi : Jane didn't pass her exam.


Yudo : Oh. I am sorry to hear that.
From the italicized words we know that the se
cond speaker expresses her . . .
a. disappointment
b. sympathy
c. displeasure
d. apology
e. anger

47.

Catherine
Larissa

: Why do you look so sad?


: Didn't you hear the news last
night? The eruption volcano has
killed more than two hundred
people in my village.
Catherine : I'm sorry to hear that.
Catherine expresses her ... .
a. fear
b. sadness
c. apology
d. surprise
e. sympathy

138

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
48.

Ani

49.

Ari

: Although this is the best cinema in town,


there are not many people visiting it.
Tia : . . . nowadays most people prefer
spending their time at home watching
TV.
a. Oh, no.
b. I don't think so.
c. Really?
d. That's right.
e. It's not true.

50.

Audi : I think the government should give more


attention to small scale industries.
Bobi : I think so. Because this group offers more
job opportunities.
The italicized sentence means Bobi ....
a. likes it
b. denies it
c. objects it
d. dislike it
e. agrees it

: Do you know that Mrs. Joko is in the


hospital?
Ben : No, I don't. What's wrong with her?
Ani : She had an accident not far from your
house?
Ben : I'm sorry to hear that. Shall we go to visit
her now?
Ani : OK. I'll pick me up now.
The italicized sentence expresses ....
a. invitation
b. probability
c. ignorance
d. advice
e. sympathy

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

139

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

Latihan Soal
Read the text carefully and answer the questions!

4.

Text 1
A young student was walking in the woods when
he heard a small voice calling him. He looked all around,
but could not see anyone. The voice called out again, and
appear to come from the roots of an enormous oak tree.
There, the student found a bottle, in which there was a
tiny man who begged, Let me out.
So the student removed the cork, and a cloud of
smoke emerged and grew into a frightening giant.
I am a genie, said the giant, and I was
imprisoned in the bottle by magician. But now that I am
freed, prepare to meet your end.
Wait a minute, said the young man. I dont
believe one word you have said. A giant of your size
could not have really come out of that little bottle. You
could never forget into it.
Of course I can, said the genie, Ill prove it to
you. As soon as the genie returned to the bottle, the
young man replaced the cork. The next time, in order to
get free, the spirit had to make a bargain with the
student: not only would it refrain from killing him, but it
had also to give him a dagger which turned into gold
everything it touched, and healed all wounds. And
afterwards, thanks to that magic dagger, the student
brcame a rich and famous doctor .
1.

The type of the text above is .


a. narrative
b. description
c. anecdote
d. report
e. procedure

2.

The characters in the text above are .


a. The student and the genie
b. The giant and the genie
c. The magician and the genie
d. The magician and the student
e. The doctor and the student

3.

The story take place in .


a. oak tree
b. the woods
c. doctors room
d. imprisoned
e. a bottle

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

The word I in: I dont believe on word


(paragraph 4) refers to .
a. genie
b. famous doctor
c. young man
d. magician
e. magic dagger

Text 2
At the birth of the Indonesian nation in 1945,
Australia and Indonesia shared a positive and friendly
relationship. In 1947 Australia supported Indonesias
struggle for independency by placing embargoes on
Dutch supplies, arms and troops. Australian dock
workers went on strike and significant numbers of
Australians demonstrated in the streets in support of
Indonesian independence. The Dutch were unable to ship
supplies through Australian ports during this period.
Much of the support Australians gave to Indonesia
was based on friendship that developed between
Australian soldiers and the Indonesian people at the end
of the Second World War. There was also a strong antiimperialist mood among some sections of the Australian
population at that time. It is a significant that Australia
supported her Asian neighbours against a European
colonial power.
5.

The passage above is about .


a. the early friendship between Indonesia and
Australia
b. the influence of the Second World
War on Indonesia and Australia
c. A strong anti-imperialist mood
d. the relationship between Australian soldiers
and Indonesian people
e. the dutch were unable to ship supplies
through Australion ports

6.

What is the meaning of embargo?


a. permission
b. demonstration
c. prohibition
d. shipping
e. aligment

7.

Indonesia and Australian shared positive and .


relationship at the birth of the Indonesia nation.
a. clear
b. friendly
c. friendship
d. significant
e. long lasting

140

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA

8.

Australia did the following to support Indonesia,


except .
a. placing embargoes to Dutch supplies
b. demonstrating in the streets
c. going in strike and significant
d. shipping Dutch supplies through Australian
ports
e. support dutch to supplies through Australian
ports

Text 3
All plants need water to grow. They get this water
from the soil. In some places nature supplies all the
water that is needed. But in other places people must find
ways to supplement natures supply. The system of
supplying water to ensure proper growth of plants and to
increase the field of crops is called irrigation.
The use of irrigation is one of the most important
practices ever developed. Only about 15 % of the
worlds farmland is irrigated. But the irrigated land
supplies a large percentage of the worlds food supply.
Irrigation is a practiced on every continent except
Antarctica.
Irrigation is used to supplement rainfall. Even in
humid areas, irrigation is needed to grow certain crops.
For example, rice-fields must be flooded until harvest
time.
9.

10.

11.

12.

Where do the plants get water from?


a. the soil
b. the rain fall
c. humid areas
d. the flood
e. Antarctica
The main purpose of irrigation is .
a. to absorb water
b. to grow certain crops
c. to obtain water for a reservoir
d. to store water
e. to make plants grow
Which of the following statement is true
according to the text?
a. Irrigation is used in addition to rainfall
b. Nature supplies all the water everywhere
c. In the rainy season we dont need irrigation
d. All the worlds farmland use irrigation
e. Irigation is well developed in Antarctica
The second paragraph is about .
a. the use of irrigation
b. the worlds food supply
c. how to irrigate rice-field
d. the importance of agriculture practice
e. the ways to supplement natures supply

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

13.

Even in humid areas, irrigation is needed to grow


certain crops.
The underlined word means .
a. damp
b. dry
c. wet
d. hard
e. soft

14.

The practice of supplying water to ensure proper


growth . (paragraph 2)
The synonym of the word proper is ..
a. true
b. safe
c. effective
d. good
e. right

Text 4
Roses are very popular flowers. The most
common roses are red and white roses. In some places,
there are purple and black roses. A rose has thorn on its
stem. Jasmine is also popular flower. It is much smaller
and has only a white color. Jasmine is used for materials
and ornaments for various needs and occasion. Dahlia is
much bigger than a rose. It has more petals and looks
more solid. It usually has a dark red color. Sunflowers
are the biggest of all. The petals are longer and more
pointed. They also have longer stems and they are mostly
yellow in colour. Another popular name for the
sunflower is chrysanthemum.
15.

The text above is mainly talks about _______


a. roses
b. jasmine
c. colour
d. flowers
e. sunflowers

16.

The text describe many colours for _______


a. roses
b. jasmine
c. ornaments
d. flowers
e. sunflowers

17.

What is the smallest size of all flowers according


to the text?
a. roses
b. jasmine
c. dahlias
d. flowers
e. sunflowers

141

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
18.

What is the type of the above text ?


a. narrative
b. descriptive
c. report
d. recount
e. anecdote

Text 5
Internet access and e-commerce in Australia
remains inequitable, with disabled and older people
facing many barriers to participation in the electronic
age. The barriers include the physical design of facilities,
the cost of internet access and the design of interactive
voice-response systems. The Human rights and Equal
Opportunity Commissions report on electronic
commerce said that technologys great potential for
increasing access was not being realized.
The commission emphasized that electronic
facilities needed improvement. The design of advanced
ATMs had made them harder for blind people to use,
compared with earlier models. Machines that once had
buttons now relied on screen displays, for instance. The
commission also suggested that students with disabilities
needed particular attention when educational material
was provided in electronic form.
19.

20.

21.

What is the main topic of passage above?


a. the internet access and e-commerce in
Australia
b. the Human Rights and Equal Opportunity
Commission
c. the barriers faced by disabled and older
people using electronic facilities
d. the cost of internet access and design of
voice-response system
e. the improvement of electronic facilities in
Australia
Why is it difficult for blind people to use ATMs
now? Because .
a. ATMs use interactive voice-response system
b. Technologys great potential for increasing
access was not being realized
c. ATMs that once had buttons now relied on
screen displays
d. The earlier designs were more advanced
e. Electronic facilities needed improvement
Internet access and e-commerce in
Australia
remains inequitable,with disabled and older
people facing . (paragraph 1)
The word disabled bold means .
a. skilled
b. honored
c. handicapped
d. injured
e. treated

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

22.

What is the synonym of the word equal on the


first paragraph?
a. the activities
b. the models
c. the ability
d. the same
e. the strength

Text 6
A young man and very beautiful princess lost her
ball in the water while she was playing by the side of a
lake. She began to cry so sadly that the frog who sat
beside the lake croacked to her, What will you give me
if I get you your ball back?
All the gold you could wish for! said the
princess. No, I ask only Ill be allowed to stay with you
and be your friend, said the frog. The princess gave her
word (what did such a promise cost her if it meant she
could have her ball back she ran off so fast that the frog
could not keep up with her. Nevertheless, after a while
the frog arrived at the place.
As soon as she saw the frog, the princess was
frightened. She ran to ask for help from her father, but
the king, who knew what had happened, ordered his
daughter to keep her promise. So the princess picked the
frog up gently in her hand, but, with a shiver of disgust,
she let it drop to the ground again. But that one brief
touch was enough to break the spell that bound the frog,
and caused it to turn back into a young and handsome
prince he had been before.
The story ends with the happiest wedding
ceremonies.
23.

What is the type of the text?


a. narrative
b. descriptive
c. report
d. recount
e. anecdote

24.

What is the topic the text above?


a. The princess ball
b. A beautiful princess
c. The princess and the frog
d. The young prince
e. The princess father

25.

Paragraph three mainly talks about


a. the frightened princess
b. how the princess broke her promise
c. what the princess asked her father
d. why the frog turned back into a handsome
prince
e. what the King ordered his daughter to do.

142

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
26.

Which of the following statement is true


according to the text?
a. The princess hid at the back of the palace
b. The princess tried not to keep her promise
c. The frog couldnt help the beautiful princess
d. The frog paid no attention to the princess
e. The King asked his daughter to marry the
frog

27.

All the gold you could wish for! replied the


princess. (Paragraph 2)
The word replied means .
a. answered
b. ordered
c. shouted
d. told
e. said

31.

Rossy

32.

If he studied hard, he _____ his examinations.


a. passes
b. had passed
c. would have passed
d. will pass
e. would pass

33.

If you use a city map, you _____ your way.


a. are not losing
b. have not lose
c. did not lose
d. will not lose
e. would not lose

34.

My neighbour is well _____ and a very succeesful


businessman.
a. educate
b. educative
c. educating
d. education
e. educated

35.

The hall has been _____ decorated for the opening


ceremony.
a. beauty
b. beautiful
c. beautifully
d. beautify
e. beautified

36.

Harry : I am not well today.


Rony : What did Harry say to you?
Rudi : She said _____________
a. I am not well today
b. He was not well today
c. He had not been well that day
d. He is not well today
e. I was not well today

37.

The strong earthquake caused a lot of _____ to


several houses and building in Yogyakarta and
central Java.
a. disaster
b. strikes
c. victims
d. advantages
e. damage

Text 7
I think federal governments are necessary because
they help to keep the economic system in order; if any
problems occur, the federal government will more or less
lighten it out..
I also think that the state governments arent
necessary because there are local governments, which
are known as municipalities. There is hardly any use for
the state governments do all the work.
28.

29.

30.

The passage above talks about .


a. the lack of federal government
b. the benefit of state government
c. the similarities of federal government and
state government
d. the difference between federal government
and state government
e. governmental system of a country
The writer seems to have the . government.
a. federal
b. republic
c. state
d. communist
e. kingdom
The two paragraphs above are part of a hortatory
exposition. They are the of the text.
a. point
b. argument
c. recommendation
d. thesis
e. conclusion

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

: I did not meet Fikri when I came to


his house yesterday.
Ade
: Oh, he _____ for Pontianak to see his
uncle.
a. will leave
b. would leave
c. are leaving
d. is leaving
e. has left

143

.
B. Inggris Kelas 11 SMA
38.

Although everything written in newspapers is not


always true, newspapers are believed to be an
important _____ information.
a. force
b. source
c. course
d. torch
e. porch

44.

Puji : Where is Rizky?


Haris : He _____ the new good book in the library
now.
a. is reading
b. was reading
c. has been reading
d. will be reading
e. would be reading

39.

The young beautiful Lady _____ husband is a


journalist is talented teacher.
a. that
b. who
c. whose
d. which
e. whom

45.

The hospital _____ his father works has a large


building.
a. who
b. when
c. which
d. where
e. whom

40.

Lake Maninjau is one of the famous tourist spots


in west Sumatera. The word famous means _____
a. beautiful
b. wonderful
c. well-known
d. exiting
e. interesting

46.

Dont make noise, students, the teacher said.


a. She told the students dont make noise
b. She said the students didnt make noise
c. She didnt say the students should make noise
d. She told the students not to make noise
e. She tells the dtudents not to make noise

47.
41.

Where are you from, Frans?


I asked Frans _____
a. from where is he
b. from which he came
c. from which he came
d. where he came from
e. where did he came from

48.

My sister is very busy in the kitchen. She _____ a


cake for my father birthday.
a. prepare
b. will prepare
c. has been preparing
d. is preparing
e. was preparing

49.

If I saw you, I would say hello.


It means _____
a. I saw you
b. I dont see you
c. I had not seen you
d. I didnt see you
e. I wouldnt see you

50.

If you want to make a good dress, why dont you


ask him?
He is a good _____
a. theraphyst
b. beautician
c. tailor
d. manicurist
e. barber

42.

43.

: We hope someday our generation can build


a temple like Prambanan.
Y : Yes, I hope so.
From the dialogue we know that both of the
speakers express their _____
a. desire
b. regret
c. sympathy
d. request
e. axpectation
The man _____ was caught breaking into his
neighbours house is arrested to the police station.
a. which
b. whom
c. whose
d. who
e. that
The students book were left in the classroom. He
came here this morning to take them. Wa can say:
The student _____ books were left in the
classroom came here this morning to take them.
a. which
b. whom
c. whose
d. who
e. that

Bimbel SD, SMP dan SMA Aqila Course

144

Anda mungkin juga menyukai